Home

DL850/DL850V ScopeCorder Communication Interface User`s Manual

1. Command Function Page TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of 5 142 SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt the specified logic channel for AND triggers TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic 5 142 SCHannel lt x gt CONDition channel for AND triggers TRIGger ATRigger Queries all condition A settings 5 142 TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel of 5 142 BIT lt x gt condition A TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic 5 142 CONDition channel of condition A TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of 5 142 SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt the specified logic channel of condition A TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic 5 143 SCHannel lt x gt CONDition channel of condition A TRIGger ATRigger CONDition Sets or queries the achievement condition of condition A 5 143 TRIGger BBETween Queries all B Between trigger settings 5 143 TRIGger BBETween TIME lt x gt Sets or queries a pulse width for B Between triggers
2. The DL850E DL850EV supports interface messages marked with an asterisk Note Difference between SDC and DCL In multi line messages SDC messages are those that require talker or listener designation and DCL messages are those that do not require the designation Therefore the SDC command affects a specific device while the DCL command affects all devices on the bus IM DL850E 17EN Chapter 4 4 1 Messages Programming Overview Messages Messages are used to exchange information between the controller and the DL850E DL850EV Messages that are sent from the controller to the DL850E DL850EV are called program messages and messages that are sent from the DL850E DL850EV back to the controller are called response messages If a program message contains a command that requests a response a query the DL850E DL850EV returns a response message upon receiving the program message The DL850E DL850EV returns a single response message in response to a single program message Program Message The program message syntax is as follows lt Program message unit gt p lt PMT gt lt Program Message Unit gt A program message consists of one or more program message units Each unit corresponds to one command The DL850E DL850EV executes the commands in the order that they are received Separate each program message unit with a semicolon For details on the program message syntax see the next section Exampl
3. TRIGger BGTime Function Syntax Queries all B gt Time trigger settings TRIGger BGTime TRIGger BGTime TIME Function Sets or queries the pulse width for B gt Time triggers Syntax TRIGger BGTime TIME lt Time gt TRIGger BGTime TIME lt Time gt 10ns to 10s Example TRIGGER BGTIME TIME 0 001 TRIGGER BGTIME TIME gt TRIGGER BGTIME TIME 1 00000000E 03 TRIGger BLTime Function Queries all B lt Time trigger settings Syntax TRIGger BLTime O TRIGger BLTime TIME S Function Sets or queries the pulse width for B lt Time 3 triggers A Syntax TRIGger BGTime TIME lt Time gt TRIGger BGTime TIME lt Time gt 10ns to 10s Example TRIGGER BLTIME TIME 0 001 TRIGGER BLTIME TIME gt TRIGGER BLTIME TIME 1 00000000E 03 TRIGger BTOut Function Queries all B TimeOut trigger settings Syntax TRIGger BTOut TRIGger BTOut TIME Function Sets or queries the pulse width for B TimeOut triggers Syntax TRIGger BTOut TIME lt Time gt TRIGger BTOut TIME lt Time gt 10ns to 10s Example TRIGGER BTOUT TIME 0 001 TRIGGER BTOUT TIME gt TRIGGER BTOUT TIME 1 00000000E 03 TRIGger BTRigger Function Queries all condition B settings Syntax TRIGger BTRigger IM DL850E 17EN 5 143 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified l
4. Command Function Page CURSor TY HORizontal DyY Queries the AY axis value of the horizontal cursors on the T Y display 5 73 VALue CURSor TY HORizontal Sets or queries a horizontal cursor position on the T Y display 5 73 POSition lt x gt CURSor TY HORizontal TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the 5 73 horizontal cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt Queries all Y axis settings of the horizontal cursor on the T Y display 5 73 CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a horizontal cursor on the T Y 5 73 STATe display is displayed CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt Queries the Y axis value of a horizontal cursor on the T Y display 5 73 VALue CURSor TY HVERtical DYDx Queries all settings related to the AY AX value which is a value between the 5 74 vertical cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY HVERtical DYDx Sets or queries the on off status of the AY AX value which is a value 5 74 STATe between the vertical cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY HVERtical DYDx Queries the AY AX value which is a value between the vertical cursors on 5 74 VALue the T Y display CURSor TY MARKer Queries all marker cursor settings for the T Y display 5 74 CURSor TY MARKer FORM Sets or queries the form of the marker cursors on the T Y display 5 74 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Queries all settings
5. cccccecceeeeseeeteeeeeeteeaeeeeeneeeees F Page FFT Cursor Marker CUrSOF cssc00 eeseescircct eesieceenecaesssciapieaced 5 69 FFT cursor peak CUrSOP ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseneeeteneee 5 70 FFT points MATH 5 107 file copying 5 89 file deletion 5 89 THM ANNE eieiei obey eas snes eazisbeescvienvatasenteeasscererests 4 7 file name hard disk recording ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeteeees 5 29 file saving se filter FreqQUeNCY cceceecececeeeeeenaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaee 5 45 filter MAT Fl szenes aano 5 107 filter Saimes aeniea aks ated ad Ane aed 5 52 filter DAN isseire niise ien inienn duanian 5 107 IM DL850E 17EN Index NETDEN font size format capture wee 5 33 format MONON histei ciel anes 5 121 fOrmiat SYSLOM sssini niniin i aaie format waveform F format ZOOM senean as aaa aa A aA EAEEREN 5 159 MAME D roning eneen E 5 48 MEQUONCY kananan ne iTO NNa 4 6 MONT ore Lale PSE A a E 1 1 2 1 3 1 G Page gain acceler ALON cctcieiisecfevideckeetesvoes ses cad a ET EN 5 35 CaM MONTON caino R ae s EER Ee tenet taversaaree tasers 5 121 gauge factor Strain wiesevee dees ccvesesnneneaserseassensdiemeuesessecees 5 52 SPHIB DOAN errereen E A EEEE GP IB interface NOU DS iee ara En EEE E ER GTL GO TO LOCAl niio a a 3 7 H Page hard disk recOndiNg sissies eine isi 5 28 5 29 H cursor X Y
6. SYSTem KEYResponse Example SYSTEM KEYRESPONSE SEC1 SYSTEM KEYRESPONSE gt SYSTEM KEYRESPONSE SEC1 SYSTem LANGuage Function Sets or queries the message language Syntax SYSTem LANGuage CHINese ENGLish FRENch GERMan ITALian JAPANese KORean SPANish RUSSian SYSTem LANGuage Example SYSTEM LANGUAGE ENGLISH SYSTEM LANGUAGE gt SYSTEM LANGUAGE ENGLISH SYSTem LCD Function Queries all LCD settings Syntax SYSTem LCD SYSTem LCD AUTO Function Queries all the settings for the feature that automatically turns off the backlight Syntax SYSTem LCD AUTO SYSTem LCD AUTO MODE Function Sets or queries whether the feature that automatically turns off the backlight is on Syntax SYSTem LCD AUTO MODE lt Boolean gt SYSTem LCD AUTO MODE Example SYSTEM LCD AUTO MODE ON SYSTEM LCD AUTO MODE gt SYSTEM LCD AUTO MODE 1 SYSTem LCD AUTO TIME Function Sets or queries the amount of time until the backlight is turned off Syntax SYSTem LCD AUTO TIME lt NRf gt SYSTem LCD AUTO TIME lt NRf gt 1 to 60 minute Example SYSTEM LCD AUTO TIME 10 SYSTEM LCD AUTO TIME gt SYSTEM LCD AUTO TIME 10 SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness Function Sets or queries the LCD brightness Syntax SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness lt NRf gt SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness lt NRf gt 1 to 10 Example SYSTEM LCD BRIGHTNESS 3 SYSTEM LCD BRIGHTNESS gt SYSTEM LCD
7. gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN INVERT 1 Example CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Function Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale AVALue Function Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale AVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale AVALue lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE AVALUE gt CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 Description The coefficient cannot be set to 0 CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale BVALue Function Sets or queries the scaling coefficient B that is used during linear scaling for an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale BVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale BVALue lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE BVALUE gt CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 Description The coefficient cannot be set to 0 Example 5 52 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype Function Queries all the linear scaling display mode settings of an i
8. lt NRf gt 1 to 5000 this varies depending on the measurement time sample rate and memory model Example When data is being sent in BYTE WORD or DWORzd format WAVeform SEND gt 9 9 digit number of bytes data byte sequence e When data is being sent in ASCII format WAVeform SEND gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Description lt NRf gt can be omitted If you specify lt NRf gt waveform data is queried lt NRf gt times in order starting from the record located at the record number specified by WAVeform RECord lt NRf gt The return value when logic waveform data is being sent in ASCII format is an 8 bit bit pattern LSB is bit 1 and MSB is bit 8 expressed in decimal format If the number of bytes of binary data that are being sent exceeds the 9 digit number the data will not be sent If the output format is PP and the original data is less than 10 div only the queried portion of the data is sent When the output format is PP the output start and end points are disabled The output format for logic and event waveforms is shown below When Data Transmitted in BYTE Format t t t Start point First data after End point data data the start point When Data Transmitted in WORD LSBF Format t t Start point First data after End point data data the start point When Data Transmitted in WORD MSBF Format o eremm oere t t Start point First data after End poin
9. CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut BWIDth Function Sets or queries the input signal bandwidth limit of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut BWIDth FULL lt Frequency gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut BWIDth lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Frequency gt 100Hz 1kHz 10kHz 100kHz If Preset is set to AC200V or AC100V you cannot select FULL CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT BWIDTH FULL CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT BWIDTH gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT BWIDTH FULL Example CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut CELimination Function Sets or queries the input signal chattering elimination of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut CELimination lt Time gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut CELimination lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Time gt 0 to 1000ms Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT CELIMINATION 0 000 CHANNEL FREQ INPUT CELIMINATION gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT CELIMINATION 0 000 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut COUPling Function Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut COUPling AC DC CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut COUPling lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT COUPLING DC CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT COUPLING gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT COUPLING DC Example CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut HYSTeresis Function Sets or queries the hysteresis of an installed frequency module Syntax
10. gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 BURNOUT 1 This command is valid when the input coupling is set to TC Error 113 Undefined header will occur if the input coupling is set to a setting other than TC CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt COUPling Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the input coupling setting of the 16 CH temperature voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt COUPling DC TC GND OFF CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt COUPling lt x gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 COUPLING TC CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 COUPLING gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 COUPLING TC IM DL850E 17EN 5 55 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt LABel Function Sets or queries the label of the 16 CH temperature voltage input module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt LABel lt String gt CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt LABel lt x gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 LABEL CH9 1 CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 LABEL gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 LABEL CH9 1 CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt RJC Function Sets or queries whether the 16 C
11. 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing MODE Function Sets or queries whether smoothing is turned on for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing MODE lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing MODE lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL5S FREQ SETUP FILTER SMOOTHING MODE ON CHANNELS FREQ SETUP FILTER SMOOTHING MODE gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP FILTER SMOOTHING MODE 1 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing VALue Function Sets or queries the moving average order of smoothing of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing VALue lt Time gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing VALue lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Time gt Oms to 1000 0ms Example CHANNEL5S FREQ SETUP FILTER SMOOTHING VALUE 0 1 CHANNELS FREQ SETUP FILTER SMOOTHING VALUE gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP FILTER SMOOTHING VALUE 0 1000 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FUNCtion Function Sets or queries the measurement mode of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANne1l lt x gt FREQ SETup FUNCtion DUTY FREQuency PERiod PFReq PINTeg PWIDth RPM RPS VELocity CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FUNCtion lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL5S FREQ SETUP FUNCTION FREQUENCY CHANNELS FREQ SETUP FUNCTION gt CHANNEL5 FR
12. CAPTure WINDow lt x gt MODE Example CAPTURE WINDOW MODE ON CAPTURE WINDOW MODE gt CAPTURE WINDOW MODE 1 CAPTure WINDow POSition Function Sets or queries the dual capture window horizontal position Syntax CAPTure WINDow lt x gt POSition lt NRf gt CAPTure WINDow lt x gt POSition lt NRf gt 5 to 5div Example CAPTURE WINDOW POSITION 0 CAPTURE WINDOW POSITION gt CAPTURE WINDOW POSITION 0 000000000000 5 34 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group The commands in this group deal with a channel s vertical axis You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the VERTICAL group keys CH and V DIV keys on the front panel CHANnel lt x gt Function Queries all vertical axis settings of a channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL Function Queries all the settings of an installed acceleration voltage module lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt ACCL BIAS Function Sets or queries whether the bias current supply to the acceleration sensors of an installed acceleration voltage module is on Syntax CHANnel lt x gt ACCL BIAS lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL BIAS lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 ACCL BIAS ON CHANNEL1 ACCL BIAS gt CHANNEL1 ACCL BIAS 1 CHANnel lt x gt ACCL BWIDth Function Sets or queries the filter when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration Syntax CHANnel
13. CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt INVert Function Syntax Description Sets or queries whether the display is inverted ON or not OFF for an installed 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt INVert lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt INVert CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH voltage input module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt LABel Function Syntax Sets or queries the label string of the specified sub channel for the specified 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt LABel lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt LABel CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 the upper limit varies depending on the module type lt String gt Up to 16 characters CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale Function Syntax Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale AVALue Function Syntax Example Description Sets
14. Description This command returns the same response as the MEAS CHAN lt Parameter gt STAT command MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt COUNt Function Syntax Example Queries the count of measured values for cyclic statistical processing of a waveform parameter MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt COUNt lt Parameter gt AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDth1 BWIDth2 DUTY cycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWIDth PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TY 1Integ TY2Integ MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK COUNT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK COUNT 3 MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MA TH lt x gt lt Parameter gt MAXimum MEAN MIN imum SDEViation Function Syntax Example Description Queries a cyclic statistical processing value of a waveform parameter MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation lt Parameter gt AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDth1 BWIDth2 DUTYcycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWIDth PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TY 1Integ TY2Integ MEASURE CHANNEL PTOPEAK MAXIMUM gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK MAXIMUM 30 633333E 00 This com
15. Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the scaling constant offset value of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt OFFSet lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt OFFSet For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 OFFSET 5E15 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 OFFSET gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 OFFSET 5 00000E 15 Description This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe command is set to UNSigned or SIGNed CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt POSition Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the vertical position of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt POSition lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt POSition For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 5 00 to 5 00 div in 0 01 steps CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 POSITION 1 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 POSITION gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 POSITION 1 00 5 40 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group
16. HD or EHD GPIB GPIB e IRIG IRIG e User defined computations USERDEFINE e Probe power supply output PROBEPOWER An error occurs if there is a query after this command Initializes settings RST RST Description This command also clears the OPC and OPC SRE Function Syntax Example commands that have been sent Sets or queries the service request enable register value SRE lt NRf gt SRE lt NRf gt 0 to 255 SRE 239 SRE gt 175 STB Function Syntax Example Description TST Function Syntax Example Description WAI Function Syntax Example Description Queries the status byte register value STB STB gt 4 e This command returns a sum of the values of each bit in decimal format e Because the register is read without executing serial polling bit 6 is an MSS bit not an RQS bit e For example if a value of 4 is returned this indicates that the status byte register is set to 00000100 This means that the error queue is not empty in other words an error occurred e A query using STB will not clear the contents of the status byte register e For information about the status byte register see page 6 2 Performs a self test and queries the result The self test consists of tests of each kind of internal memory TST TST gt 0 This command returns 0 if the self test is successful and 1 otherwise Holds the execution of
17. MATH lt x gt AVERage MODE Function Sets or queries the averaging mode Syntax MATH lt x gt AVERage MODE CYCLe EXPonent LINear OFF PEAK MATH lt x gt AVERage MODE lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify H1 AVERAGE MODE EXPONENT H1 AVERAGE MODE MATH1 AVERAGE MODE EXPONENT Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option a J Example v MATH lt x gt AVERage TYPE Function Sets or queries the averaging domain Syntax MATH lt x gt AVERage TYPE FREQuency TIME H lt x gt AVERage TYPE lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify H1 AVERAGE TYPE FREQUENCY H1 AVERAGE TYPE MATH1 AVERAGE TYPE FREQUENCY Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option a 3 Example v MATH lt x gt BINary Function Queries all binary computation settings Syntax MATH lt x gt BINary IM DL850E 17EN 5 105 puewwog 5 20 MATH Group MATH lt x gt BINary CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt THReshold Function Sets or queries the threshold level of the specified channel for binary computations Syntax MATH lt x gt BINary CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt THReshold lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Current gt lt Current gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt BINary CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt
18. TRIGger ADB A Delay B Function Queries all A Delay B trigger settings Syntax TRIGger ADB TRIGger ADB DELay Function Sets or queries the delay time for condition B for A Delay B triggers Syntax TRIGger ADB DELay lt Time gt TRIGger ADB DELay lt Time gt Ons to 10s Example TRIGGER ADB DEL 0 001 TRIGGER ADB DEL gt TRIGGER ADB DELAY 1 0000000E 03 Description The resolution is 10 ns TRIGger AND Function Queries all AND trigger settings Syntax TRIGger AND IM DL850E 17EN 5 141 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger AND CHANne1l lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel for AND triggers Syntax TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt TRIGGER AND CHANNEL9 BIT1 DONTCARE TRIGGER AND CHANNEL9 BIT1 gt TRIGGER AND CHANNELO BIT1 DONTCARE Example TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic channel for AND triggers Syntax TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt CONDition DONTcare HIGH LOW WLIn WLOut TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt CONDition TRIGGER AND CHANNEL2 CONDITION HIGH TRIGGER AND CHANNEL2 CONDITION gt TRIGGER AND CHANNEL2 CONDITION HIGH Description Use this command on channels that do not have sub channels
19. gt CAPTURE ACTION MAIL MODE 1 Description This setting is shared with the corresponding e mail transmission settings of other actions CAPTure ACTion SAVE Function Queries all dual capture action data save settings Syntax CAPTure ACTion SAVE CAPTure ACTion SAVE ANAMing Function Sets or queries the auto file naming method Syntax CAPTure ACTion SAVE ANAMing DATE NUMBering CAPTure ACTion SAVE ANAMing Example CAPTURE ACTION SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING CAPTURE ACTION SAVE ANAMING gt CAPTURE ACTION SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING Description This setting is shared with the auto naming settings of other actions CAPTure ACTion SAVE CDIRectory Function Sets the current directory on the storage medium where the screen capture is saved to as a capture action Syntax CAPTure ACTion SAVE CDIRectory lt String gt Example CAPTURE ACTION SAVE CDIRECTORY ABCD CAPTure ACTion SAVE MODE Function Sets or queries whether captured data is saved to a storage medium as a capture action Syntax CAPTure ACTion SAVE MODE lt Boolean gt CAPTure ACTion SAVE MODE Example CAPTURE ACTION SAVE MODE ON CAPTURE ACTION SAVE MODE gt CAPTURE ACTION SAVE MODE 1 Description This setting is shared with the corresponding data save settings of other actions 5 32 IM DL850E 17EN 5 5 CAPTure Group CAPTure ACTion SAVE NAME Function Sets or queries the file name that i
20. 2 is valid on models with the G2 option FFT WINDow Function Queries all FFT analysis settings Syntax FFT WINDow FFT WINDow EXPonential Function Queries all FFT exponential window settings Syntax gt FFT WINDow EXPonential IM DL850E 17EN 5 87 5 13 FILE Group FFT WINDow EXPonential DRATe Function Sets or queries the FFT exponential window s damping rate Syntax FFT WINDow EXPonential DRATe lt NRf gt FFT WINDow EXPonential DRATe Example FFT WINDOW EXPONENTIAL DRATE 100 FFT WINDOW EXPONENTIAL DRATE gt FFT WINDOW EXPONENTIAL DRATE 100 Description lt NRf gt 1 to 100 the initial value and the setting are the same for Window 1 and Window 2 FFT WINDow EXPonential FORCe lt x gt Function Sets or queries the FFT exponential window s Force1 or Force2 value Syntax FFT WINDow EXPonential FORCe lt x gt lt NRf gt FFT WINDow EXPonential FORCe lt x gt Example FFT WINDOW EXPONENTIAL FORCE1 100 FFT WINDOW EXPONENTIAL FORCE1 gt FFT WINDOW EXPONENTIAL FORCE1 100 Description lt NRf gt 1 to 100 the initial value and the setting are the same for Window 1 and Window 2 gt FFT WINDow TYPE Function Sets or queries the computation window type for FFT analysis Syntax FFT WINDow TYPE HANNing RECTangle FLATtop EXPonential HAMMing FFT WINDow TYPE Example FFT WINDOW TYPE HANNING FFT WINDOW TYPE gt FFT
21. 7 YOKOGAWA DL850 VPOO S MADS UTILITY key page 2 4 Press this key to set the communication interface for remote control and to enable remote control through the USB ports when you want to use remote commands Side Panel A EXT IIO ANEXT CLKIN USB ports These ports are for connecting the DL850E DL850EV to a controller such as a PC using a USB cable For details on FOMOBASE T how to connect the DL850E DL850EV to i controller see page 2 3 IM DL850E 17EN 2 1 Je zul JSN 2 2 USB Interface Features and Specifications USB Interface Features Reception Features Allows you to specify the same settings that you can using the front panel keys Receives output requests for measured and computed data panel setting data and error codes Transmission Features The DL850E DL850EV can transmit measured and computed data The DL850E DL850EV can transmit panel setting data and the status byte The DL850E DL850EV can transmit error codes when errors occur USB Interface Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications USB 2 0 Connector Type B connector receptacle Number of ports 2 Power supply Self powered System requirements APC with a USB port running Windows 7 32 bit Windows Vis
22. ACTion IMAGe CDIRectory Function Sets the current directory where the screen capture is saved to when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion IMAGe CDIRectory lt String gt GONogo ACTion IMAGe CDIRectory lt String gt Directory name GONOGO ACTION IMAGE CDIRECTORY CASE1 GONOGO ACTION IMAGE CDIRECTORY gt GONOGO ACTION IMAGE CDIRECTORY CASE1 Example GONogo ACTion IMAGe DRIVe Function Sets or queries the medium that the screen capture is saved to when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion IMAGe DRIVe HD lt NRf gt NETWork SD USB lt NRf gt GONogo ACTion IMAGe DRIVe GONOGO ACTION IMAGE DRIVE HD GONOGO ACTION IMAGE DRIVE gt GONOGO ACTION IMAGE DRIVE HD 0 Description Specify HD for the internal hard disk lt NRf gt This can be omitted if the disk is not partitioned For the DL850E DL850EV internal hard disk omit this value or specify 0 Specify SD for the SD memory card Specify NETWork for a network drive Specify USB for a USB storage medium First lt NRf gt 0 to LUN or the partition number can be omitted On the DL850E DL850EV this number is decided by the order that USB storage media are inserted into the device Example Partition numbers Internal hard disk 0 to 2 USB 0 to 3 IM DL850E 17EN 5 93 puewwoy 5 14 GONogo Group GONogo ACTion IMAGe MODE Function Sets or queries whether a screen capt
23. HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM VALUE gt HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM1 VALUE 150 25000E 00 HISTory PARameter LOGic Function Sets or queries the logic to apply to history waveform searches Syntax HISTory PARameter LOGic AND OR lt x gt 1 to 4 Example HISTORY PARAMETER LOGIC AND HISTORY PARAMETER LOGIC gt HISTORY PARAMETER LOGIC AND HISTory PARameter TRANge Function Sets or queries the determination range of history waveform parameter searches Syntax HISTory PARameter TRANge lt NRf gt lt NRf gt HISTory PARameter TRANge lt NRf gt 5 to 5 div HISTORY PARAMETER TRANGE 5 5 HISTORY PARAMETER TRANGE gt HISTORY PARAMETER TRANGE 5 000000000000 5 000000000000 Example HISTory RECord Function Sets or queries the source record Syntax HISTory RECord lt NRf gt MINimum HISTory RECord lt NRf gt 0 to 4999 Specify MINimum to specify the minimum record number HISTORY RECORD 1 HISTORY RECORD gt HISTORY RECORD 1 Example HISTory RECord MINimum Function Queries the minimum record number Example HISTORY RECORD MINimum HISTORY RECORD 4 Description This command returns the record number of the oldest data in the history function During measurements this value is fixed to 0 Use this command when the DL850E DL850EV is not performing measurements HISTory SMODe Function Sets or queries the history waveform search mode
24. MICRo MILI KILO MEGA GIGA TERA CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT AUTO CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT gt CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT AUTO CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale GETMeasure Function Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale GETMeasure P1X P2xX lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANnel1l STRAIN LSCale GETMeasure P1X CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale MODE Function Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale MODE AXB OFF P12 SHUNt CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale MODE SHUNt can only be set when the installed module is a 701271 CHANNEL11 STRAIN LSCALE MODE OFF CHANNEL11 STRAIN LSCALE MODE gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN LSCALE MODE OFF Example IM DL850E 17EN 5 53 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y Function Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt x gt 1 to 16 P1X or P2X s lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 0 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 P1Y or
25. MICRo MILI KILO MEGA GIGA TERA CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Syntax DISPlaytype SUBunit lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT AUTO CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT AUTO Example CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale GETMeasure Function Syntax Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale GETMeasure P1X P2x lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale MODE Function Syntax Example CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale MODE AXB OFF P12 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale MODE lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE MODE AXB CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE MODE gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE MODE OFF puewwoy Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt x gt 1 to 16 P1X or P2X s lt
26. SYSTem PACTion Sets or queries whether the action mode will be enabled when the DL850E 5 138 DL850EV turns on ON or not OFF 5 22 IM DL850E 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page SYSTem PSTart Sets or queries whether waveform acquisition will be started when the 5 138 DL850E DL850EV turns on ON or not OFF SYSTem RCMode Remote Control Sets or queries whether remote signals to stop measurements will be 5 138 Mode ignored ON or not OFF SYSTem SCALefont Sets or queries the font size that is used for waveform labels and scale 5 138 values SYSTem SOITem Scale On ITEM Sets or queries which scales are displayed 5 138 SYSTem STORage MEDia Sets or queries the medium that you want to format 5 138 SYSTem STORage FORMat EXECute Formats the specified medium This is an overlap command 5 138 SYSTem TSYNchro Time Sets or queries the time synchronization 5 138 Synchronization SYSTem USBKeyboard Sets or queries the USB keyboard type 5 138 TIMebase Group TIMebase Queries all time base settings 5 139 TIMebase CHANnel lt x gt SRATe Queries the sample rate of the specified channel 5 139 TIMebase SOURce Sets or queries the time base 5 139 TIMebase SRATe Sets or queries the sample rate 5 139 TIMebase TDIV Sets or queries the
27. Syntax HISTory SMODe OFF ZONE PARameter HISTory SMODe HISTORY SMODE ZONE HISTORY SMODE gt HISTORY SMODE ZONE Example 5 100 IM DL850E 17EN 5 16 HISTory Group HISTory TIME Function Queries the trigger time of the data at the specified record number Syntax HISTory TIME lt NRf gt MINimum lt NRf gt 0 to 4999 Example HIST TIME 1 gt HIST TIME 0001 10 20 30 04 Description If you specify a record number that is lower than MINimum this command will return HISTory ZONE Function Queries all history waveform zone search settings Syntax HISTory ZONE HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt Function Queries all settings for the specified search zone Syntax HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 4 HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the specified search zone s search condition Syntax HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt CONDition OFF IN OUT HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt CONDition Example HISTORY ZONE EDIT1 CONDITION IN HISTORY ZONE EDIT1 CONDITION gt HISTORY ZONE EDIT1 CONDITION IN HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt SOURce Function Sets or queries the specified search zone s source waveform Syntax HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt SOURce lt NRf gt HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt SOURce lt x gt 1 to 4 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Example HISTORY ZONE EDIT1 SOURCE 1 HISTORY ZONE EDIT1 SOURCE g
28. THReshold MATH lt x gt BINary CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt THReshold lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Current gt lt Current gt lt NR gt lt NR gt MATH lt x gt BINary CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt THReshold MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 for modules that have sub channels lt Voltage gt lt Current gt and lt NRf gt The selectable range varies depending on settings such as the range and offset For details see the DL850E DL850EV User s Manual For settings other than MATH lt x gt lt NRf gt 10 to 10 div or equivalent values For MATH lt x gt lt NRf gt 5 to 5 div in 0 01 div steps Example MATH1 BINARY CHANNEL1 THRESHOLD 1 0 MATH1 BINARY CHANNEL1 THRESHOLD gt MATH1 BINARY CHANNEL1 THRESHOLD 1 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 MATH lt x gt CONStant lt x gt Function Sets or queries a constant for user defined computation Syntax MATH lt x gt CONStant lt x gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt CONStant lt x gt MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 CONStant lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example MATH1 CONSTANT1 1 MATH1 CONSTANT1 gt MATH1 CONSTANT1 1 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt DEFine Function Sets or queries an expression for user defined computation Syn
29. The DL850E DL850EV s GP IB interface conforms to the IEEE 488 2 1992 standard This standard specifies that the following 23 items be stated in the document This section describes these items 1 2 3 4 5 b c d e Of the IEEE 488 1 interface functions the subsets that are supported See section 3 4 GP IB Interface Specifications The operation of the device when it is assigned an address outside the 0 to 30 range The address of this instrument cannot be set to an address outside the 0 to 30 range Reaction of the device when the user changes the address The address change is detected when the user presses UTILITY and then the Remote Ctrl soft key and changes the address The new address is valid until the next time it is changed Device settings at power on The commands that can be used at power on As a basic rule the previous settings the settings that were in use when the DL850E DL850EV was turned off are used There are no limitations on the commands that can be used at power on Message exchange options a Input buffer size 4096 bytes Queries that return multiple response messages See the example of the commands given in chapter 5 Queries that create response data when the command syntax is being analyzed All queries create response data when the command syntax is analyzed Queries that create response data during reception There are no queries of which the
30. VOLTage Queries all the linear scaling display mode settings of an installed 16 CH 5 62 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale voltage input module DISPlaytype CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the decimal place that is used during linear scaling when the 5 62 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale display mode is set to Float for an installed 16 CH voltage input module DISPlaytype DECimalnum CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the display mode that is used during linear scaling for an 5 62 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale installed 16 CH voltage input module DISPlaytype MODE CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the unit prefix that is used during linear scaling when the 5 62 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale display mode is set to Float for an installed 16 CH voltage input module DISPlaytype SUBunit IM DL850E 17EN 5 7 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an 5 62 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale GETMeasure _ installed 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed 16 CH voltage input 5 63 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale MODE module CHANnel lt x1 gt Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y
31. WORD DWORd MONitor FORMat HANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt HANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 CHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel MONITOR FORMAT CHANNEL SCHANNEL1 WORD MONITOR FORMAT CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 gt MONITOR FORMAT CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 WORD Ho Qa Example MONitor GAIN CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Queries the gain that is used when the specified channel s numeric monitor data is converted to a physical value Syntax MONitor GAIN CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel Example MONITOR GAIN CHANNEL1 MONitor LATCh ASENd Function Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of all channels Syntax MONitor LATCh ASENd MONITOR LATCH ASEND gt The response format is the same as the MONitor ASENd command Description The data that is present at the time when you execute the latch command is sent If the latch command has not been executed an undefined value is returned Example IM DL850E 17EN 5 121 puewwoy 5 22 MONitor Group MONitor LATCh ASENd CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of the specified channel Syntax MONitor LATCh ASENd CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt
32. ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Function Sets or queries whether the specified source waveform of the specified group display of zoom waveforms is displayed Syntax ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt lt Boolean gt ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt lt x1 gt 1 to 4 sets the group display lt x2 gt 1 to 64 sets the source waveform Example 2ZO0M GROUP1 TRACE1 1 ZOOM GROUP1 TRACE1 gt ZOOM GROUP1 TRACE1 1 Description ZOOM1 and ZOOM2 both reference the same setting Any changes made to the dual capture setting do not affect this setting nor do any changes made to this setting affect the dual capture setting ZOOM MAG lt x gt Function Sets or queries the horizontal magnification of the specified zoom waveform Syntax ZOOM MAG lt x gt lt NRf gt ZOOM MAG lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 sets the target zoom box lt NRf gt 1 to 200000000 ZOOM MAG1 100 ZOOM MAG1 gt ZOOM MAG1 100 0 Description Use this command when the DL850E DL850EV is using an external clock When the DL850E DL850EV is using the internal clock use the ZOOM TDIV lt x gt command to set the magnification The magnification is set as a percentage Example ZOOM MAIN Function Sets or queries the proportion of the main waveform display area that is used when zooming waveforms Syntax ZOOM MAIN 20 50 OFF ZOOM MAIN Example ZOOM MAIN 20 ZOOM MAIN gt ZOOM MAIN 20 ZOOM
33. gt CURSOR XY MARKER M1 T VALUE 3 0000000E 03 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the marker cursors on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt TRACe OFF XY1 XY2 XY3 XY4 XY5 XY6 XY7 XY8 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt TRACe lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR XY MARKER M1 TRACE XY1 CURSOR XY MARKER M1 TRACE gt CURSOR XY MARKER M1 TRACE XY1 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X Function Queries all X axis value settings for a marker cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe Function Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a marker cursor on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR XY MARKER M1 X STATE 1 CURSOR XY MARKER M1 X STATE gt CURSOR XY MARKER M1 X STATE 1 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X VALue Function Queries the X axis value of a marker cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X VALue lt x gt 1to4 Example CURSOR XY MARKER M1 X VALUE gt CURSOR XY MARKER M1 X VALUE 333 33333E 03 CURSor XY MARKer FORM Function Sets or queries the form of the marker cursors on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer FORM LINE MARK CURSor
34. lt NRf gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt SOURce lt x gt WaAVeform lt x gt s lt x gt 1 2 SOURce lt x gt s lt x gt 1 2 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 6 First lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Sub channel lt NRf gt 1 to 60 Example FFT WAVEFORM1 SOURCE1 1 FFT WAVEFORM1 SOURCE1 gt FFT WAVEFORM1 SOURCE1 1 Description This command returns Math1 if no modules are installed FFT WAVeform lt x gt STYPe Sub Type Function Sets or queries an FFT window s analysis sub type Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt STYPe REAL IMAG MAG PHASe LOGMag FFT WAVeform lt x gt STYPe lt x gt 1 2 Example FFT WAVEFORM1 STYPE LOGMAG FFT WAVEFORM1 STYPE gt FFT WAVEFORM1 STYPE LOGMAG Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option FFT WAVeform lt x gt TYPE Function Sets or queries an FFT window s analysis type Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt TYPE LS PS PSD CS TF CH FFT WAVeform lt x gt TYPE lt x gt 1 2 Example FFT WAVEFORM1 TYPE PS FFT WAVEFORM1 TYPE gt FFT WAVEFORM1 TYPE PS Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option FFT WAVeform lt x gt UNIT Function Sets or queries a unit string that is attached to FFT computation results Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt UNIT lt String gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt UNIT lt x gt 10r2 lt String gt Up to 4 characters Example FFT WAVEFORM1 UNIT UU FFT WAVEFORM1 UNIT gt FFT WAVEFORM1 U
35. 25000 50000 100000 waveform 2 The waveform that was captured 250000 500000 two waveforms before the Current waveform If Example CAPTURE RLENGTH 10000 you specify MAXimum the Current waveform is CAPTURE RLENGTH specified If you specify MINimum the number of gt CAPTURE RLENGTH 10000 the oldest waveform is specified When the capture mode is set to On Start Current 1 2 Current The latest waveform CAPTure TDIV 1 The oldest waveform 2 The second oldest Function Sets or queries the dual capture T DIV setting waveform the waveform that was captured Syntax CAPTure TDIV lt Time gt before the Current waveform If you specify CAPTure TDIV MAXimum the waveform that was captured lt Time gt 1us to 60s before the Current waveform is specified If Example CAPTURE TDIV 100 0E 06 you specify MINimum the number of the oldest CAPTURE TDIV waveform is specified gt CAPTURE TDIV 100 0E 06 CAPTure WINDow MAG Function Sets or queries the dual capture window zoom CRRTULE WINDOW factor as a time Function Queries all dual capture display window settings Syntax a Syntax CAPTure WINDow MAG lt Time gt CAPTure WINDow MAG Example CAPTURE WINDOW MAG 100 0E 06 CAPTURE WINDOW MAG gt CAPTURE WINDOW MAG 100 0E 06 lt NRf gt 1us to 60s CAPTure WINDow MODE Function Sets or queries whether the dual capture window is turned on Syntax CAPTure WINDow lt x gt MODE lt Boolean gt
36. 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE MODE AXB CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE MODE gt CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE MODE OFF CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2yY lt x1 gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 P1X or P2X s lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 0 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 P1Y or P2Y s lt NRf gt 9 9999E 25 to 1E 25 0 1E 25 to 9 9999E 25 CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE P1X 1 CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE P1X gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE P1X 1 CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale UNIT Function Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed 16 CH voltage input module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale UNIT lt x1 gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 lt String gt Up to 4 characters Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE UNIT UU CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE UNIT gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSC
37. ASCRo11 TARGet Function Sets or queries the zoom window that will be auto scrolled Syntax ZOOM ASCRol1 TARGet Z1 2Z2 ZOOM ASCRo11 TARGet Example Z00M ASCROLL TARGET 21 ZOOM ASCROLL TARGET gt ZOOM ASCROLL TARGET Z1 ZOOM FITMeasure Function Moves the range on which automated measurement of waveform parameters is performed to the zoom waveform display frame Syntax ZOOM FITMeasure 21 22 Example ZO0OM FITMEASURE Z1 ZOOM FORMat lt x gt Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the display format of the specified zoom waveform ZOOM FORMat lt x gt MAIN lt NRf gt ZOOM FORMat lt x gt lt NRf gt 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 lt x gt 1 2 sets the target zoom box ZOOM FORMAT 1 ZOOM FORMAT1 gt ZOOM FORMAT1 1 ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt Function Syntax Queries all settings related to the specified group display of zoom waveforms ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt ZOOM GROUp lt x1 gt FORMat lt x2 gt Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the zoom waveform display format of the specified display group ZOOM GROUp lt x1 gt FORMat lt x2 gt MAIN lt NRf gt ZOOM GROUp lt x1 gt FORMat lt x2 gt lt NRf gt 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 lt x1 gt 1 to 4 lt x2 gt 1 2 sets the target zoom box ZOOM GROUP1 FORMAT1 1 ZOOM GROUP1 FORMAT1 gt ZOOM GROUP1 FORMAT1 1 IM DL850E 17EN 5 159 puewwoy 5 37 ZOOM Group
38. CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE VGAIN 1 01 Description This command is valid when any of the following Example modules is installed and the input coupling is set to DC 701250 HS10M12 701251 HS1M16 701255 NONISO_10M12 720210 HS100M12 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage ZOOM Function Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage ZOOM lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage ZOOM lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 1 0 111 0 125 0 143 0 167 0 2 0 25 0 33 0 4 0 5 0 556 0 625 0 667 0 714 0 8 0 833 1 1 11 1 25 1 33 1 43 1 67 2 2 22 2 5 3 33 4 5 6 67 8 10 12 5 16 7 20 25 40 50 100 However the 701260 67 has the following limits Direct input at 50 V div 0 25 to 100 Direct input at 100 V div 0 5 to 100 Direct input at 200V div 1 to 100 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE ZOOM 1 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE ZOOM gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE ZOOM 1 Example IM DL850E 17EN 5 65 puewwog 5 7 CLEar Group The command in this group deals with executing the clear trace operation You can execute the same operation that you can execute by using the CLEAR TRACE key on the front panel CLEar Function Clears traces Syntax CLEar 5 66 IM DL850E 17EN 5 8 COMMunicate Group The commands in this group deal with communications There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group
39. CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt Function Queries all AY value settings AY is between the marker cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AY value between the marker cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt STATe lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DY2 STATE ON CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DY2 STATE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DY2 STATE 1 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt VALue Function Queries the AY value between the marker cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt VALue lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DY2 VALUE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DY2 VALUE 0 0000000E 00 5 74 IM DL850E 17EN 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt JUMP Function Moves the specified marker cursor to the center of the specified zoom window Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt JUMP 2Z1 22 lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt POSition Function Sets or queries a marker cursor position on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt POSition lt NRf gt CURSor TY MARKer
40. CURSor XY VERTical TRACe XY1 XY2 XY3 XY4 XY5 XY6 XY7 XY8 CURSor XY VERTical TRACe CURSOR XY VERTICAL TRACE XY2 CURSOR XY VERTICAL TRACE gt CURSOR XY VERTICAL TRACE XY2 Example CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt Function Queries all X axis value settings for a V cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a V cursor on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt STATe lt x gt 1 2 CURSOR XY VERTICAL X1 STATE ON CURSOR XY VERTICAL X1 STATE gt CURSOR XY VERTICAL X1 STATE 1 Example CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt VALue Function Queries the X axis value of a V cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt VALue lt x gt 1 2 CURSOR XY VERTICAL X1 VALUE gt CURSOR XY VERTICAL X1 VALUE 150 00000E 00 Example 5 80 IM DL850E 17EN 5 10 DISPlay Group The commands in this group deal with the screen display You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using keys such as the DISPLAY and UTILITY keys on the front panel DISPlay Function Queries all display settings Syntax DISPlay DISPlay ACCumulate Function Queries all accumulated waveform display settings Syntax DISPlay ACCumulate DISPla
41. CopyDestination Function Sets or queries whether the copy destination channel is ON or OFF for when parameter measurement items are copied between channels Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt CDEStination lt Boolean gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CDEStination lt x gt 1 to 16 lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 MEASURE CHANNEL2 CDESTINATION ON MEASURE CHANNEL2 CDESTINATION gt MEASURE CHANNEL2 CDESTINATION 1 MEASURE CHANNEL7 SCHANNEL1 CDESTINATION ON MEASURE CHANNEL7 SCHANNEL1 CDESTINATION gt MEASURE CHANNEL7 SCHANNEL1 CDESTINATION 1 Example MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COPY Function Copies all the measurement item ON OFF settings from one specified channel to another specified channel Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt COPY MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COPY lt x gt 1 to 16 lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 COPY MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay Function Queries all delay settings Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay 5 114 IM DL850E 17EN 5 21 MEASure Group MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay COUNt Function Queries the statistics count of the delay b
42. FFT MARKER M1 Y VALUE 46 750000E 00 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Function Queries all settings of an FFT cursor peak cursor Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 Cursor 1 is dedicated for use as FFT1 Cursor 2 is dedicated for use as FFT2 2 is valid on models with the G2 option CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F Function Queries all frequency axis settings of an FFT cursor peak cursor Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 2 is valid on models with the G2 option CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F STATe Function Sets or queries whether the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor peak cursor is displayed Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F STATe lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 2 is valid on models with the G2 option Example CURSOR FFT PEAK1 F STATE ON CURSOR FFT PEAK1 F STATE gt CURSOR FFT PEAK1 F STATE 1 P 5 70 IM DL850E 17EN 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F VALue Function Queries the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor peak cursor Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F VALUE lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 2 is valid on models with the G2 option CURSOR FFT PEAK1 F VALUE gt CURSOR FFT PEAK1 F VALUE 2 0000000E 03 Example CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt RANGe Function Sets o
43. Hold Off UME oana eeen nia horizontal cursor T Y s lt sccsessersecesenscescancenasesovanensencencensanes 5 73 horizontal magnification ZOOM 5 160 horizontal position Capture cece eee eeeeteeeeees 5 34 hysteresis 1EQUENCY i ciicccsceccs cocescanessevscess e 5 42 l IFC Interface Cleat cescesccisisesev eee ta arden MMI ANZA OM x ces eese eies or aN rno eTO ans E ENRERE input coupling 16CH voltage s r sssssisiiiniisiisnseinisiisas input coupling acceleration voltage input coupling analog voltage cccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeee input COUplING MEQUENCY s cesssccees dosent input coupling temperature intensity IRIG format IRIG MOGUIATION esseccttaverdeiecsecaarnsdantentsonsaccancd binewnarennassecs K Page KEY IOCK isis EEA EET E octane 5 136 L Page LCD briQhtNGSS essere steele ana ees 5 137 linear scaling 16CH voltage ccceeeeeseeeteeteeeteeeeeeee 5 61 linear scaling analog VOItage ceceeeeseeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeee 5 58 linear scaling frequency cccccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeteneeetees 5 43 linear scaling Strain ccecscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteneeeeees 5 52 Listen Only izis LLO Cocal LOCKOUL ciiisean 3 7 local OCK OUT snie inrer iea rea 5 67 log starting 5 104 logic history 5 100 logic condition MStOry Jisses 5 101 M Page IMANWAl MOOSE soies ori annei marker cursof T Y Jaiei hha a eed
44. LABel MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify lt String gt Up to 16 characters Example MATH1 LABEL ABC MATH1 LABEL gt MATH1 LABEL ABC MATH lt x gt MODE Function Sets or queries whether the DL850E DL850EV is in computation mode Syntax MATH lt x gt MODE lt Boolean gt MATH lt x gt MODE MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify Example MATH1 MODE ON MATH1 MODE gt MATH1 MODE 1 MATH lt x gt MREFerence Function Sets or queries the computation range Syntax MATH lt x gt MREFerence lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt MREFerence MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify lt NRf gt 5 to 5 div Example MATH1 MREFERENCE 5 5 MATH1 MREFERENCE gt MATH1 MREFERENCE 5 000000000000 5 000000000000 MATH lt x gt OPERation Function Sets or queries the computation type Syntax MATH lt x gt OPERation PLUS MINus MULTiple BINary DIVIde SHIFt PS OFF USERde fine MATH lt x gt OPERation MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 MATH1 OPERATION PS MATH1 OPERATION gt MATH1 OPERATION PS Example Description The USERdefine parameter is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt SCALe Function Queries all scaling settings Syntax MATH lt x gt SCALe MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 MATH lt x gt SCALe
45. MAXIMUM gt SEARCH SELECT 5 Description The string NAN is returned if the search could not retrieve a position SEARch SPOint Start POint Function Sets or queries the search start position Syntax SEARch SPOint lt NRf gt SEARcCh SPOint lt NRf gt 5 to 5div the resolution depends on the measurement length Example SEARCH SPOINT 5 SEARCH SPOINT gt SEARCH SPOINT 5 000000000000 SEARch TDIV lt x gt Function Sets or queries a zoom waveform T DIV value Syntax SEARch TDIV lt x gt lt Time gt HOUR1 HOUR2 HOUR3 HOUR4 HOURS HOUR6 HOUR7 HOURS HOURS HOUR10 HOUR12 DAY1 DAY2 DAY3 SEARCh TDIV lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 sets the target zoom box lt Time gt the same as the T Div setting Example SEARCH TDIV1 0 01 SEARCH TDIV1 gt SEARCH TDIV1 10 00E 03 Description This command is valid when the DL850E DL850EV is using the internal clock When the DL850E DL850EV is using an external clock use the SEARch MAG lt x gt command to set the magnification SEARch TIME Function Queries all time search settings Syntax SEARch TIME SEARch TIME TIME Function Syntax Example Description SEARch TWINdow Target WINdow Sets or queries the time of the time search SEARch TIME TIME lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NR gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt SEARch TIME TIME lt NRf gt 2000
46. P2X or P2Y value of an installed 5 63 VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt 16 CH voltage input module LSCale P1X P1Y P2xX P2yY CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed 16 CH voltage 5 63 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale UNIT input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the offset voltage of an installed 16 CH voltage input module 5 63 SCHannel lt x2 gt 0FFSet CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the vertical position for an installed 16 CH voltage input 5 63 SCHannel lt x2 gt POSition module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed 5 64 SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries how the vertical scale is set for an installed 16 CH voltage 5 64 SCHannel lt x2 gt VARiable input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the V DIV setting of an installed 16 CH voltage input module 5 64 SCHannel lt x2 gt VDIV CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed 16 CH voltage input 5 64 SCHannel lt x2 gt Z00M module CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VARiable Sets or queries how the vertical scale is set for an installed module that can 5 64 perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VDIV Sets or queries the V div setting of an installed module that can perform 5 65 analog voltage measurement
47. Queries all averaging settings 5 28 ACQuire AVERage COUNt Sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions to perform during 5 28 averaging ACQuire AVERage EWEight Sets or queries the attenuation constant of exponential averaging 5 28 Exponent Weight ACQuire CLOCk Sets or queries the time base internal or external clock 5 28 ACQuire COUNt Sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions to perform in Normal 5 28 mode ACQuire MODE Sets or queries the waveform acquisition mode 5 28 ACQuire PROTate Sets or queries the pulse rotate setting to use during external clock input 5 28 ACQuire RLENgth Sets or queries the record length 5 28 ACQuire RTOut Queries all hard disk recording settings 5 28 ACQuire RTOut ANAMing Sets or queries the hard disk recording auto naming feature 5 29 ACQuire RTOut COMMent Sets or queries the hard disk recording comment 5 29 ACQuire RTOut DIVide MODE Sets or queries whether divided recording is enabled for hard disk recording 5 29 ACQuire RTOut DIVide NUMBer Sets or queries the number of divisions when divided recording is performed 5 29 during hard disk recording ACQuire RTOut FILename Sets or queries the hard disk recording file name 5 29 ACQuire RTOut MODE Sets or queries whether hard disk recording is enabled 5 29 ASETup Group ASETup EXECute Executes auto setup 5 30 ASETup UNDO Undoes auto setup 5 30 CALibrate Group CALibrate Queries all calibration
48. SAVE PATH Function Queries the current directory Example IMAGE SAVE PATH gt IMAGE SAVE PATH Path HD 0 IMAGe SEND Function Queries the screen capture data Syntax IMAGe SEND Description The screen capture data is returned as block data IMAGe TONE Function Sets or queries the color tone of the screen capture data that will be saved Description IMAGe TONE COLor GRAY OFF REVerse IMAGe TONE Example IMAGE TONE REVERSE IMAGE TONE gt IMAGE TONE REVERSE 5 102 IM DL850E 17EN 5 18 INITialize Group The commands in this group deal with initializing the DL850E DL850EV settings You can perform the same operations that you can by pressing the SETUP key on the front panel and then the Initialize soft key INITialize EXECute Function Initializes the settings This is an overlap command Syntax INITialize EXECute lt String gt lt String gt Omitted Initialize and then start measurement NSTart Initialize but not start measurement Description The following settings cannot be reset Date and time settings Communication settings The language setting English or Japanese Environment settings An error will occur if the DL850E DL850EV receives this command while hard disk recording is being performed When you want to execute this command stop hard disk recording e History data is cleared e lt String gt can be used on models with firmware version 2
49. Syntax CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt VALue lt x gt 1 2 Example CURSOR TY VERTICAL X1 VALUE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL X1 VALUE 0 0000000E 00 Description When the Internal Clock Is Being Used as the Time Base When measurements are performed in the time domain this queries the time When measurements are performed in the frequency domain this queries the frequency When an External Clock Is Being Used as the Time Base When measurements are performed in the time domain this queries the number of points using the trigger point as the reference When measurements are performed in the frequency domain this queries the number of points using the front of the waveform as the reference CURSor TY VERTical Y lt x gt Function Queries all Y axis value settings for a V cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 CURSor TY VERTical Y lt x gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a V cursor on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY VERTical Y lt x gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSOr TY VERTIcal Y lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 Example CURSOR TY VERTICAL Y1 STATE 1 CURSOR TY VERTICAL Y1 STATE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL Y1 STATE 1 CURSor Function Syntax Example Description CURSor Function Syntax Example Description CURSor Function Syntax CURSor Function Syntax TY VERTical Y lt
50. Syntax ACQuire AVERage COUNt lt NRf gt INFinity ACQuire AVERage COUNt lt NRf gt 2 to 65536 in 2 steps ACQUIRE AVERAGE COUNT INFINITY ACQUIRE AVERAGE COUNT gt ACQUIRE AVERAGE COUNT INFINITY Example ACQuire AVERage EWEight Exponent Weight Function Sets or queries the attenuation constant of exponential averaging Syntax ACQuire AVERage EWEight lt NRf gt ACQuire AVERage EWEight lt NRf gt 2 to 256 in 2 steps ACQUIRE AVERAGE EWEIGHT 16 ACQUIRE AVERAGE EWEIGHT gt ACQUIRE AVERAGE EWEIGHT 16 Example ACQuire CLOCk Function Sets or queries the time base internal or external clock Syntax ACQuire CLOCk INTernal EXTernal ACQuire CLOCk Example ACQUIRE CLOCK INTERNAL ACQUIRE CLOCK gt ACQUIRE CLOCK INTERNAL ACQuire COUNt Function Sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions to perform in Normal mode Syntax ACQuire COUNt lt NRf gt INFinity ACQuire COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 65536 ACQUIRE COUNT INFINITY ACQUIRE COUNT gt ACQUIRE COUNT INFINITY Example ACQuire MODE Function Sets or queries the waveform acquisition mode Syntax ACQuire MODE AVERage BAVerage ENVelope NORMa1 ACQuire MODE Example ACQUIRE MODE NORMAL ACQUIRE MODE gt ACQUIRE MODE NORMAL ACQuire PROTate Function Sets or queries the pulse rotate setting to use during external clock input Syntax ACQuire PROTa
51. a Div fregUenCy sivasapssieveiisiaii V cursor T Y x MVecurSor XM ere deurne rene EEEE EEEE vertical position 16CH voltage c ccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees vertical position acceleration vertical position analog voltage vertical position CAN 05 x vertical position frequency sssssssessssssrssssnsessrrerrnsene Vertical position LIN sea a vertical position logic vertical scale 16CH voltage vertical scale analog voltage vertical scale center valu nnise vertical scale sensitivity FET inrsriinsnsn nanan vertical zoom factor 16CH voltage vertical zoom factor acceleration cccceeeeeteeeeeteees vertical zoom factor analog voltage ceseeeeeees 5 65 vertical zoom factor CAN cccsceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeees 5 42 vertical zoom factor frequency csceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 5 47 vertical zoom factor LIN s vertical Zoom factor IOI 5 51 WOM AC Co cares acces esse aa E E E 4 6 voltage range freqUuency 2 ccceesceeceeteeeeeneeeeteneeeeetaeees 5 43 IM DL850E 17EN Index W waveform accumulation number Of cece eee waveform acqui Sitio sree naan aR Eirne waveform acquisitions number of waveform interpolation waveform label frequency me waveform label MATH vsecisseveciiciescteteneatanascncdcs waveform saving GO NO GO ccccseeeeeeee
52. gt CHANNEL1 ACCL POSITION 0 00 puewwoy CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SCALe Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SCALe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SCALe lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1000000 to 1000000 CHANNEL1 ACCL SCALE 5000 00 5000 00 CHANNEL1 ACCL SCALE gt CHANNEL1 ACCL SCALE 5000 00 5000 00 IM DL850E 17EN 5 35 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SENSitivity Function Sets or queries the sensitivity when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration Syntax CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SENSitivity lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SENSitivity lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 1 to 2000 Example CHANNEL1 ACCL SENSITIVITY 1 00 CHANNEL1 ACCL SENSITIVITY gt CHANNEL1 ACCL SENSITIVITY 1 00 CHANnel lt x gt ACCL UNIT Function Sets or queries the unit string when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration Syntax CHANnel lt x gt ACCL UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL UNIT lt x gt 1 to 16 lt String gt Up to 4 characters Example CHANNEL1 ACCL UNIT m s2 CHANNEL1 ACCL UNIT gt CHANNEL1 ACCL UNIT m s2 CHANnel lt x gt ACCL VARiable Function Sets or queries t
53. lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt LOGic POSition lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 5 00 to 5 00 div in 0 01 div steps CHANNEL15 LOGIC POSITION 1 CHANNEL15 LOGIC POSITION gt CHANNEL15 LOGIC POSITION 1 00 Example CHANnel lt x gt LOGic ZOOM Function Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage ZOOM lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage ZOOM lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 1 0 111 0 125 0 143 0 167 0 2 0 25 0 33 0 4 0 5 0 556 0 625 0 667 0 714 0 8 0 833 1 1 11 1 25 1 33 1 43 1 67 2 2 22 2 5 3 33 4 5 6 67 8 10 12 5 16 7 20 25 40 50 100 CHANNEL15 LOGIC ZOOM 1 CHANNEL15 LOGIC ZOOM gt CHANNEL15 LOGIC Z00M 1 000 Example CHANnel lt x gt MODU1le Function Queries the module that is installed in the channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt MODUle lt x gt 1 to 16 Description Values that are returned from each module NOMODULE No module is installed in the specified channel or an even numbered channel in which a 16 CH voltage input module is installed was specified M720210 720210 100M module M720220 16 CH Voltage Input Module M720221 16 CH Temperature Voltage Input Module M720230 Logic Input Module M720240 CAN Bus Monitor Module M720241 CAN amp LIN Bus Monitor Module If a 1 channel module or a 16 CH voltage input module or 16 CH tempe
54. marker Cursor KEY aarahi aE ARE measurement pulse frequency i MEIUM ree SpaCe cirian narra menu NAIA AG Oa acces ectee ce verre ct resccaesseve cans eevee es Bae MESAN ais message format message Diiren i iai 5 37 5 40 message language ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeteeeeteteeeeeeaees 5 137 MESSAGE Shainin wee 4 4 moving average order frequency ceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeee 5 46 N Page NO GO COUN PA A E EEEN 5 95 O Page offset 16GH voltage usisna a 5 62 5 63 offset analog voltage ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 58 5 60 OffSeti MEQUON CY Jii seecencssexecssccacesesnecusexseyarcateaangunweseuieraceres 5 44 offset monitor 5 122 one shot output 5 36 one cycle mode 5 120 OUTDUTIQUBUC nnsa a aS 6 6 over limit reset frequency sssessssesssssssrssesrrssrerrerresne 5 46 overlap COMIMAINGS scisso eaan e RTENE 4 8 P Page P1X P2X 16CH y lta ge sisina a 5 62 P1X P2X analog Voltage ccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeeee 5 59 P1X P2X frequenCy Jsa 5 44 P1X P2X Stainer a aa 5 53 pen marker cceeeees 5 157 phase shift external clock n 5 106 phase shift internal CIOCK ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 5 109 preset frequency sissies toza probe analog voltage 7 probe attenuation frequency esessssesssesssssesessesrnssrnes 5 43 program MESSAGE einsa TN AR POX UMA choc AA E E E E T AEA p
55. puewwoy 5 30 STOP Group The command in this group is used to stop waveform acquisition You can execute the same operation that you can by using the START STOP key on the front panel STOP Function Stops waveform acquisition Syntax STOP Description If recording is in progress it is also stopped 5 132 IM DL850E 17EN 5 31 STORe Group The commands in this group deal with saving setup data You can perform the same operations that you can by pressing the SETUP key on the front panel the Setup Data Store Recall soft key and then the Store Exec soft key STORe Function Queries all the information related to setup data in the internal memory Syntax STORe STORe SETup lt x gt Function Queries information about the setup data in the specified location of the internal memory Syntax STORe SETup lt x gt lt x gt 1 to3 STORe SETup lt x gt CLEar Function Clear the setup data that is stored to the specified location in the internal memory Syntax STORe SETup lt x gt CLEar lt x gt 1 to 16 Example STORE SETUP1 CKEAR STORe SETup lt x gt COMMent Function Sets or queries the comment for the setup data that is stored to the specified location in the internal memory Syntax STORe SETup lt x gt COMMent lt String gt STORe SETup lt x gt COMMent lt x gt 1to3 lt String gt Up to 14 characters Example STORE SETUP1 COMMENT ABCD STORE SETUP1 COMMENT g
56. 0 to 65535 See the figure in the description of the COMM WAIT command Description Bits fixed to 0 are not set to 1 so the response to the query only indicates 1 for bits 3 5 and 6 COMMunicate REMote Function Sets or queries whether the DL850E DL850EV is in remote or local mode ON is remote mode Syntax COMMunicate REMote lt Boolean gt COMMunicate REMote COMMUNICATE REMOTE ON COMMUNICATE REMOTE gt COMMUNICATE REMOTE 1 puewwog Example Description This command is designed for use in USB and Ethernet communications COMMunicate VERBose Function Sets or queries whether query responses are returned in full or abbreviated form Syntax COMMunicate VERBose lt Boolean gt COMMunicate VERBose COMMUNICATE VERBOSE ON COMMUNICATE VERBOSE gt COMMUNICATE VERBOSE 1 Description This setting is lost when the DL850E DL850EV is Example turned off COMMunicate WAIT Function Waits for a specified extended event to occur Syntax COMMunicate WAIT lt Register gt lt Register gt 0 to 65535 extended event register Example COMMUNICATE WAIT 65535 IM DL850E 17EN 5 67 5 8 COMMunicate Group COMMunicate WAIT Function Syntax Example Creates the response that is returned when a specified extended event occurs COMMunicate WAIT lt Register gt lt Register gt 0 to 65535 extended event register COMMUNICATE WAIT 65535 gt 1 elele
57. 1 4 Device Set Device to USB i USB Function 7 Set USB Function to TMC Storage Note Only use the selected communication interface If you send commands simultaneously from another communication interface that has not been selected the DL850E DL850EV will not execute the commands properly To remotely control the DL850E DL850EV through a USB port using communication commands set USB Function shown in the figure above to TMC and then carry out the following steps To activate the USB Function settings you need to restart the DL850E DL850EV Turn off the DL850E DL850EV power switch wait ten seconds or more and then turn on the switch e Install the YOKOGAWA USB TMC Test and Measurement Class driver on your PC For information about how to obtain the YOKOGAWA USB TMC driver contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer You can also access the YOKOGAWA USB driver download webpage and download the driver http www yokogawa com ymi e Do not use USB TMC drivers or software supplied by other companies IM DL850E 17EN Chapter3 GP IB Interface Optional 3 1 Component Names and Functions Front Panel SHIFT key and CLEAR TRACE key Press these keys to switch from remote mode in which settings and operations are performed through remote commands to local mode in which operations can be performed using the DL850E DL850EV keys These keys are disabled when local lockout see page 3 7 has been activate
58. 5 98 HISTory Group HISTory Queries all of the settings for the history feature 5 99 HISTory ABORt Aborts the history search 5 99 HISTory CLEar Clears the data of all history waveforms 5 99 HISTory DATE Queries the trigger date of the data at the specified record number 5 99 HISTory DISPlay Sets or queries the history start and end numbers that will be displayed 5 99 HISTory DMODe Display MODE Sets or queries the history waveform display mode 5 99 HISTory EXECute Executes the history waveform search This is an overlap command 5 99 HISTory PARameter Queries all history waveform parameter search settings 5 99 HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt Queries all the specified parameter s settings for history waveform parameter 5 99 searches HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt Sets or queries the specified parameter s reference condition for history 5 99 CONDition waveform parameter searches HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt Sets or queries the bit when the specified parameter s source trace for 5 99 LOGic BIT history waveform parameter searches is set to 720230 logic module HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt Sets or queries the specified parameter s source trace for history waveform 5 100 SOURce parameter searches HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt Queries for history waveform parameter searches the specified parameter s 5 100 TYPE automatically measured item and upper and lower limits HISTory PARameter ITEM lt
59. BITS8 CELIMINATION 1 0000000E 02 5 50 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 DISPlay Function Sets or queries whether the display of each bit is turned on for the specified logic channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 DISPlay lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 DISPlay lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT1 DISPLAY ON CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT1 DISPLAY gt CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT1 DISPLAY 1 Example CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 LABel Function Sets or queries the label of each bit for the specified logic channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 LABel lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 LABel lt String gt Up to 16 characters lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT8 LABEL ABC HANNEL15 LOGIC BIT8 LABEL gt CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT8 LABEL ABC Q CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BMAPping Function Sets or queries the bit display method of the specified logic channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BMAPping AUTO FIXed CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BMAPping lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL15 LOGIC BMAPPING AUTO CHANNEL15 LOGIC BMAPPING gt CHANNEL15 LOGIC BMAPPING AUTO Example CHANnel lt x gt LOGic POSition Function Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified logic channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic POSition
60. BYTEORDER gt WAVEFORM BYTEORDER LSBFIRST Description This command is only valid in the WAVeform group WAVeform CAPTure Function Queries all capture data output settings Syntax WAVeform CAPTure WAVeform CAPTure DATE Function Queries the year month and day of the trigger of the specified capture waveform Syntax WAVeform CAPTure DATE lt NRf gt MAXimum MINimum When the capture mode is set to Auto lt NRf gt 0 to 4999 If you specify MAXimum the trigger date of the latest waveform the same as number 0 is queried If you specify MINimum the trigger date of the oldest waveform is queried When the capture mode is set to On Start lt NRf gt 0 to 5000 If you specify MAXimum the trigger date of the latest waveform the same as the capture count is queried If you specify MINimum the trigger date of the oldest waveform the same as number 1 is queried If you specify 0 the trigger date of the latest waveform the same as the capture count and MAXimum is queried WAVeform CAPTure DATE gt WAVeform CAPTure DATE 0001 2012 09 01 Description If you set lt NRf gt to a number greater than Example the number of captures the string lt NRf gt is returned If you specify MAXimum or MINimum when nothing has been captured the string 0000 is returned If you query while the DL850E DL850EV is running the string 0000 is retu
61. CHANNEL1 DELAY MEASURE COUNT 2 MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEASURE COUNT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEASURE COUNT 2 MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure SLOPe Function Sets or queries a source waveform slope that will be used to measure delay between channels for a waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure SLOPe RISE FALL BASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure SLOPe Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEASURE Ss SLOPE RISE MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEASURE SLOPE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEASURE SLOPE RISE MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence Function Queries all reference waveform settings used to measure the delay between channels for the specified waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence COUNt Function Sets or queries the edge detection count of the reference waveform used to measure the delay between channels for the specified waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence COUNt lt NR gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt D
62. CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt SBIT Start BIT Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the bit number of the starting position of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt SBIT lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt SBIT For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 0 to 63 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 SBIT 10 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 SBIT gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 SBIT 10 CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt SCALe Function Syntax Example Description Sets or queries the display range values upper and lower limits of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt SCALe AUTO DEFault lt NRf gt lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt SCALe For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 30 000E 30 to 30 000E 30 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 SCALE AUTO CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 SCALE gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 SCALE AUTO This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe command is set to UNSigned SIGNed or FLOat
63. CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut HYSTeresis HIGH LOW MIDD1le CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut HYSTeresis lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT HYSTERESIS LOW CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT HYSTERESIS gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT HYSTERESIS LOW Example 5 42 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PRESet Function Sets or queries the preset setting of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PRESet AC100v AC200v EMPickup LOG12v LOG24v LOG3v LOG5v PULLup USER ZERO CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PRESet lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PRESET USER CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PRESET gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PRESET USER CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PROBe Function Sets or queries the probe attenuation of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PROBe lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PROBe lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 10 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PROBE 1 CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PROBE gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PROBE 1 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PULLup Function Sets or queries whether pull up is turned on for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PULLup lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PULLup lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PULLUP ON CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PULLUP gt CHANNEL1 FREQ IN
64. COUNt Sets or queries the number of times that e mail is sent when the condition is 5 94 met GONogo ACTion MAIL MODE Sets or queries whether e mail is sent when the condition is met 5 94 GONogo ACTion SAVE CDIRectory Sets the current directory on the storage medium where waveform data is 5 94 saved to when the condition is met GONogo ACTion SAVE DRIVe Sets or queries the storage medium that waveform data is saved to when the 5 94 condition is met GONogo ACTion SAVE MODE Sets or queries whether waveforms are saved to the storage medium when 5 94 the condition is met GONogo ACTion SAVE PATH Queries the path on the storage medium that waveform data is saved to 5 94 when the condition is met GONogo ACTion SAVE TYPE Sets or queries the file format that waveforms are saved as on the storage 5 95 medium when the condition is met GONogo COUNt Queries the number of GO NO GO determinations that were performed 5 95 GONogo LOGic Sets or queries the GO NO GO determination logic 5 95 GONogo MODE Sets or queries the GO NO GO determination mode 5 95 GONogo NGCount Queries the GO NO GO determination NO GO count 5 95 GONogo PARameter Queries all parameter determination settings 5 95 GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt Queries all settings for the specified waveform parameter for parameter 5 95 determination GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt Queries whether the specified waveform parameter for paramet
65. DISPlay CINFormation FULL NARRow WIDE WWSCale DISPlay CINFormation Example DISPLAY CINFORMATION NARROW DISPLAY CINFORMATION gt DISPLAY CINFORMATION NARROW DISPlay CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COLor 9 Function Sets or queries a waveform color 3 Syntax For channels that do not have sub channels or 3 for math channels a DISPlay CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt COLor BLUE BGReen CYAN DBLue GRAY REen LBLue LGReen MAGenta MGReen RANge PINK PURPle RED SPINk YELLow DISPlay CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt COLor O Q e For channels that have sub channels DISPlay CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COLor BLUE BGReen CYAN DBLue GRAY GREen LBLue LGReen MAGenta MGReen ORANge PINK PURP1e RED SPINk YELLow DISPlay CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COLor Example DISPLAY CHANNEL1 COLOR YELLOW DISPLAY CHANNEL1 COLOR gt DISPLAY CHANNEL1 COLOR YELLOW Description The FFT1 and FFT2 waveforms are the same color as the MATH7 and MATH8 waveforms respectively DISPlay COLor BASecolor Function Sets or queries the base color of the screen Syntax DISPlay COLor BASecolor BLUE GRAY DISPlay COLor BASecolor Example DISPLAY COLOR BASECOLOR GRAY DISPLAY COLOR BASECOLOR gt DISPLAY COLOR BASECOLOR GRAY IM DL850E 17EN 5 81 5 10 DISPlay Group DISPlay DECimation Function Sets or queries the number of dots
66. DL850E 17EN 5 14 GONogo Group GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt TRACe Function Sets or queries the specified determination pattern s determination waveform for waveform zone determination Syntax GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt TRACe MATH lt x gt lt NRf gt GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt TRACe lt x gt 1 to 16 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Channel number Example GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 TRACE 1 GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 TRACE gt GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 TRACE 1 GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt ZONE Function Sets or queries the specified determination pattern s source waveform zone data for waveform zone determination Syntax GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt ZONE lt NRf gt o GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt ZONE S lt x gt 1 to 16 3 lt NRf gt 0 to 5 3 Example GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 ZONE 1 GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 ZONE gt GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 ZONE 1 IM DL850E 17EN 5 97 5 15 HCOPy Group The commands in this group deal with printing screen captures from the internal printer and other devices You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the PRINT MENU key on the front panel HCOPy HCOPy NETPrint TYPE Function Queries all screen capture data output settings Function Sets or queries the network printer output Syntax HCOPy command type Syntax HCOPy NETPrint TYPE EINKjet HCOPy COMM
67. DL850EV can transmit error codes when errors occur Note Talk only listen only and controller capabilities are not available on the DL850E DL850EV Switching between Remote and Local Modes Switching from Local to Remote Mode The DL850E DL850EV switches to remote mode when it is in local mode and it receives a REN Remote Enable message from the PC e REMOTE appears at the top center of the screen once the DL850E DL850EV is in remote mode All keys except the SHIFT CLEAR TRACE keys are disabled e The local mode settings are retained even when the DL850E DL850EV switches to remote mode Switching from Remote to Local Mode When the DL850E DL850EV is in Remote mode and you press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE the DL850E DL850EV switches to local mode These keys are disabled when local lockout see page 3 7 has been activated by a controller e The REMOTE indicator at the top center of the screen disappears once the DL850E DL850EV is in local mode e All keys are enabled e The settings in remote mode are retained even when the DL850E DL850EV switches to local mode Note You cannot use the GP IB interface simultaneously with other interfaces USB and Ethernet interfaces 3 4 IM DL850E 17EN 3 4 GP IB Interface Specifications GP IB Interface Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications Functional specifications Protocol Code Mode Address setup Clearing remote mode Functional Specif
68. EXPONENT CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit Function Sets or queries the unit prefix that is used during linear scaling when the display mode is set to Float for an installed 16 CH voltage input module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit AUTO NONE PICO NANO MICRo MILI KILO MEGA GIGA TERA CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit lt x1 gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT AUTO CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT gt CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT AUTO CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale GETMeasure Function Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an installed 16 CH voltage input module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale GETMeasure P1X P2xX lt x1 gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 5 62 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale MODE Function Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed 16 CH voltage input module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale MODE AXB OFF P12 CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale MODE lt x1 gt 1
69. Ethernet interface Chapter 2 USB Interface Describes the features and specifications of the USB interface Chapter 3 GP IB Interface Optional Describes the features and specifications of the GP IB interface Chapter 4 Programming Overview Describes command syntax and other programming information Chapter 5 Commands Describes every command individually Chapter 6 Status Reports Describes the status byte various registers and queues Appendix Provides reference material such as an ASCII character code table Index IM DL850E 17EN iii How to Use This Manual Conventions Used in This Manual Notes and Cautions The notes and cautions in this manual are categorized using the following symbols ATANIN eR Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences CAUTION Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user or damage to the instrument or user s data and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Note Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument Character Notations Hard Key Names and Soft Key Names in Bold Characters Indicate panel keys that are used in the procedure and soft keys and menu items that appear on the screen SHIFT Panel Key When SHIFT panel key appears in a procedural explana
70. Example TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel for AND triggers Syntax TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Example TRIGGER AND CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 LOW TRIGGER AND CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BITE gt TRIGGER AND CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 LOW TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel for AND triggers Syntax TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt Hannel lt x gt CONDition DONTcare GH LOW WLIn WLOut TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt Hannel lt x gt CONDition Example TRIGGER AND CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION HIGH TRIGGER AND CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION gt TRIGGER AND CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION HIGH Description Use this command on channels that have sub channels TRIGger ATRigger Function Queries all condition A settings Syntax TRIGger ATRigger TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel of condition A Syntax TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt DONTcare HIGH
71. FFT TYPE OFF PEAK MARKer CURSor FFT TYPE Example CURSOR FFT TYPE PEAK CURSOR FFT TYPE gt CURSOR FFT TYPE PEAK CURSor TY Function Queries all cursor settings for the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY CURSor TY DEGRee Function Queries all angle cursor settings for the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt Function Queries all angle difference D lt x gt settings for the angle cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt lt x gt 1 2 Example CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 STATE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 STATE 1 CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the angle difference D lt x gt between the angle cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt STATe lt x gt 1 2 CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 STATE ON CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 STATE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 STATE 1 puewwoy Example CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt VALue Function Queries the angle difference D lt x gt between the angle cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt VALue lt x gt 1 2 Example CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 VALUE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 VALUE 179 55000E 00 CURSor TY DEGRee DD Function Queries all angle difference Ad value settings The angle difference i
72. FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal LRIGht RANGe lt Frequency gt lt Frequency gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal LRIGht RANGe lt x gt 1 2 1 when the G2 option is not installed lt Frequency gt 0 Hz to the sampling rate 2 Hz FFT WAVEFORM HORIZONTAL LRIGHT RANGE 0 0000000E 00 500 00000E 03 FFT WAVEFORM HORIZONTAL LRIGHT RANGE gt FFT WAVEFORM1 HORIZONTAL LRIGHT RANGE 0 0000000E 00 500 00000E 03 Example FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal MODE Function Sets or queries the FFT analysis horizontal axis mode Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal MODE AUTO CSPan LRIGht FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal MODE lt x gt 1 2 1 when the G2 option is not installed FFT WAVEFORM1 HORIZONTAL MODE AUTO FFT WAVEFORM HORIZONTAL MODE gt FFT WAVEFORM1 HORIZONTAL MODE AUTO Example FFT WAVeform lt x gt MODE Function Sets or queries whether an FFT window is displayed Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt MODE lt Boolean gt gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt MODE lt x gt 1 2 FFT WAVEFORM1 MODE ON FFT WAVEFORM1 MODE gt FFT WAVEFORM1 MODE 0 Example Description lt x gt 2 is valid on models with the G2 option 5 86 IM DL850E 17EN 5 12 FFT Group FFT WAVeform lt x gt SOURce lt x gt Function Sets or queries an FFT window s FFT source channel Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt SOURce lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt NRf gt
73. LOW TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Example TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL9 BIT1 HIGH TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL9 BIT1 gt TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL9 BIT1 HIGH TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic channel of condition A Syntax TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt CONDition DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt CONDition CHAN lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL1 CONDITION HIGH TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL1 CONDITION gt TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL1 CONDITION HIGH Description Use this command on channels that do not have sub channels TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel of condition A Syntax TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt DONTcare HIGH TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Example TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 LOW TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 gt TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 LOW 5 142 IM DL850E 17EN 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets o
74. MATH GOUD scrinia arinin NEEE EEEE EAT 5 105 921 MEASUre Group zaic aE a a seb Eaa sect aAa 5 110 5 22 MON t r GrOUP s seras aas aan aae E ceded ane E e awed ede es 5 121 929 MTRIJJer Group espines enre E e eae sca gag E E EEE A Ei 5 123 5 224 REC all Group enina edd eee nie E ant EEA EAEE 5 124 5 29 SEARCH GROUP ercseiccisnts ei e ae a a EE a aa rE a i aeei 5 125 5 26 SNAP GOUD aae e a a eile ath hei ea ee 5 128 527 SO VAN GROUP siani iira aeei aaa Ea eE a EEEa A 5 129 528 STARC GMOUpsiscsintiaeiedin a ES a E EA eens 5 130 529 STATUS GUP aeaiaioii a a aaa e a ianea 5 131 S30 STOP GOUD ea e ati fe an eae A a ek sae ees 5 132 9 91 STORSGO P ersinnen ehna airiai a ioh enke sai aTe EO Ap Erao E 5 133 992 SS VOTO NM GOUD iresi ee pi tases cages Seas ee bc dna dane ps ade estes EE Ee E AEiG 5 134 5 33 WiMebase Groups sescceeccsoicesiceeein eeadhace picitenas EEE E ETE 5 139 D294 WIRIGGSE GROUP atip aie cco Sees Hee vee pst a a oes aa cack vest ctusaees 5 140 5 35 WAVeforin Group r s cincseaselicevincs as etecs eased olin dea navne aa aa aaa Ea Eaa aAA NEENA aad 5 151 50930 AY GOUD recae eare E e a E e a E e E E tabs 5 157 5 37 ZOOM Gioup iins eaa EE EEEE Na EEA 5 159 5 38 COMMON Command GrOUP seisear eaa aaoi aiaa 5 161 Status Reports 6 1 ADOUt Status RE POMS rinitni deers a ea ara A aa 6 1 6 2 Status BIE mee oiran a re eases Men ae eee eee ae en ees 6 3 6 3 Standard Event REGIStEM 22 lt 0 s scis ofc scceteeasdens
75. MODE Function Sets or queries a scale mode Syntax MATH lt x gt SCALe MODE AUTO MANual MATH lt x gt SCALe MODE MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 Example MATH1 SCALE MODE AUTO MATH1 SCALE MODE gt MATH1 SCALE MODE AUTO MATH lt x gt SCALe VALue Function Sets or queries a set of upper and lower limits for manual scaling Syntax MATH lt x gt SCALe VALue lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt SCALe VALue MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 MATH1 SCALE VALUE 1 1 MATH1 SCALE VALUE gt MATH1 SCALE VALUE 1 00000E 00 1 00000E 00 Example 5 108 IM DL850E 17EN 5 20 MATH Group MATH lt x gt SHIFt CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt TIME Function Sets or queries the amount of phase shift in the Shift computation when the internal clock is used Syntax MATH lt x gt SHIFt CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt TIME lt Time gt MATH lt x gt SHIFt CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt TIME lt Time gt MATH lt x gt SHIFt CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt TIME MATH lt x gt SHIFt CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt TIME MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt Time gt 0 s to 2592000 s 720 hours T Div x 5 Step 1 sample rate Example MATH1 SHIFT CHANNEL1 TIME 0 001 MATH1 SHIFT CHANNEL TIME gt MATH1 SHIFT CHANNELI1 TIME 1 000000000E 03 MATH lt x gt SOURce lt x gt Function Sets or quer
76. MODE lt x gt Function Sets or queries whether the specified zoom waveform is displayed Syntax ZOOM MODE lt x gt lt Boolean gt ZOOM MODE lt x gt ZOOM MODE1 ON ZOOM MODE1 gt ZOOM MODE1 1 Example ZOOM MOVE Function Sets or queries whether the movement of the zoom position to the latest position is enabled or disabled Syntax ZOOM MOVE lt x gt lt Boolean gt ZOOM MOVE lt x gt Example ZOOM MOVE1 ON ZOOM MODE1 gt ZOOM MODE1 1 ZOOM POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries the zoom position of the specified zoom waveform Syntax ZOOM POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt gt ZOOM POSition lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 sets the target zoom box lt NRf gt 5 to 5 div Example ZOOM POS1 2 ZOOM POS1 gt ZOOM POS1 2 000000000000 ZOOM TDIV lt x gt Function Sets or queries the T DIV value of the specified zoom waveform Syntax ZOOM TDIV lt x gt lt Time gt HOUR1 HOUR2 HOUR3 HOUR4 HOURS HOUR6 HOUR7 HOURS HOURS HOUR10 HOUR12 DAY1 DAY2 DAY3 ZOOM TDIV lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 sets the target zoom box lt Time gt the same as the T Div setting ZOOM TDIV1 100us ZOOM TDIV1 gt ZOOM TDIV1 100 0E 06 Description Use this command when the DL850E DL850EV is using the internal clock When the DL850E DL850EV is using an external clock use the ZOOM MAG lt x gt command to set the magnification Example ZOOM WLAYout
77. Only communication error messages are listed here For details on other error messages see the user s manual IM DL850E 02EN e Communication syntax errors 100 to 199 e Communication execution errors 200 to 299 e Device specific and other errors 300 to 399 Listed below e Communication query errors 400 to 499 e System errors communication 300 and 399 Communication Syntax Errors 100 to 199 Code Message Corrective Action Page 102 Syntax error A syntax error not covered by error codes 100 to 199 Chapters 4 and 5 103 Invalid separator Separate data values with a comma 4 1 104 Data type error See page 4 6 and 4 7 and use the correct data type for each 4 6 and parameter 4 7 105 GET not allowed GET is not supported as a response to an interface message 3 8 108 Parameter not allowed Check the number of data values 4 6 and chapter 5 109 Missing parameter Be sure to include all necessary data values 4 6 and chapter 5 111 Header separator error Use a comma to separate each header from its data 4 1 112 Program mnemonic too long Check the command length Chapter 5 113 Undefined header Check the header Chapter 5 114 Header suffix out of range Check the header Chapter 5 120 Numeric data error A value must be specified where the syntax contains lt NRf gt 4 6 123 Exponent too large Where the syntax contains lt NR3 gt make the exponent that follows 4 6 and E smal
78. P2Y s lt NRf gt 9 9999E 25 to 1E 25 0 1E 25 to 9 9999E 25 Example CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE P1X 1 00000E 00 CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE P1X gt CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE P1X 1 00000E 00 CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale SHUNt Function Executes shunt calibration Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale SHUNt lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale UNIT Function Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale UNIT lt x gt 1 to 16 lt String gt Up to 4 characters Example CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE UNIT UU CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE UNIT gt CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE UNIT UU CHANnel lt x gt STRain RANGe Function Sets or queries the measurement range of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain RANGe lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain RANGe lt NRf gt 0 25 0 5 1 2 5 5 10 when the unit is mV or V 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 20000 when the unit is uSTR Example CHANNEL11 STRAIN RANGE 20000 CHANNEL11 STRAIN RANGE gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN RANGE 20000 CHANnel lt x gt STRain SCALe Function Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain SCALe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain SCALe lt NRf gt 15 0000 to 15 0000 when
79. PARameter ITEM lt x gt Function Queries all settings for the specified waveform parameter for parameter determination Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 16 GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt CAUSe Function Queries whether the specified waveform parameter for parameter determination is the cause of a NO GO judgment Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt CAUSe lt x gt 1 to 16 Example GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 CAUSE gt GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 CAUSE 1 Description When the parameter is the cause of a NO GO result the DL850E DL850EV returns 1 Otherwise the DL850E DL850EV returns 0 GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt LOGic BIT Function Sets or queries the bit when the specified waveform parameter s source waveform for parameter determination is set to 720230 logic module Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt LOGic BIT lt NR gt GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt LOGic BIT lt NRf gt 1 to 8 lt x gt 1 to 16 Example GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM LOGIC BIT 2 GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM LOGIC BIT gt GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM LOGIC BIT 2 Description The default value is 1 e This can be used on models with firmware puewwog version 2 10 and later GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt MODE Function Sets or queries the specified waveform parameter s reference condition for parameter determination Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt M
80. SETup Sets or queries whether stop prediction is turned on for an installed 5 46 STOPpredict frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup TUNit Sets or queries the time unit when measuring velocity of an installed 5 47 frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ UNIT Sets or queries the pulse integration unit of an installed frequency module 5 47 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ UPULse Sets or queries the unit pulse setting of an installed frequency module 5 47 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ VUNit Sets or queries the velocity unit of an installed frequency module 5 47 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ Sets or queries the Value Div setting of an installed frequency module 5 47 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ ZOOM Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed frequency module 5 47 CHANnel lt x gt LABel Sets or queries the waveform label of a channel 5 47 CHANnel lt x gt LIN Queries all settings of a module that can monitor LIN busses 5 47 CHANnel lt x gt LIN PORT Queries all settings of each port of a module that can monitor LIN busses 5 47 CHANnel lt x gt LIN PORT BRATe Sets or queries the bit rate of the specified LIN bus signal port 5 47 CHANnel lt x gt LIN FRAMe lt x2 gt Queries all settings of the specified LIN bus signal frame 5 48 5 4 IM DL850E 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Co
81. SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 WIDTH 2 Syntax Example TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt WWIDth Function Sets or queries the width for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt WWIDth lt Voltage gt lt NRf gt lt Current gt TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt WWIDth CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL1 WWIDTH 0 5 TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL1 WWIDTH gt TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL1 WWIDTH TRIGger TGTime Function Queries all T gt Time trigger settings Syntax TRIGger TGTime 5 148 IM DL850E 17EN 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger TGTime TIME Function Sets or queries the pulse width for T gt Time triggers Syntax TRIGger TGTime TIME lt Time gt TRIGger TGTime TIME lt Time gt 10ns to 10s Example TRIGGER TGTIME TIME 0 001 TRIGGER TGTIME TIME gt TRIGGER TGTIME TIME 1 00000000E 03 TRIGger TiMer Function Queries all time trigger settings Syntax TRIGger TIMer TRIGger TIMer DATE Function Sets or queries the date for time triggers Syntax TRIGger TIMer DATE lt String gt TRIGger TIMer DATE lt String gt YYYY MM DD YYYY 2000 to 2099 Example TRIGGER TIMER DATE 2010 01 01 TRIGGER TIMER DATE gt TRIGGER TIMER DATE 2010 01 01 TRIGger TIMer INTerval Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the trigger interval for time triggers TRIGger TIMer INTerval SEC10
82. STATE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DY2 STATE 1 Example CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt VALue Function Queries the AY value between the FFT cursors marker cursors Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt VALue lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DY2 VALUE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DY2 VALUE 3 9750000E 00 Example IM DL850E 17EN 5 69 puewwoy 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F Function Queries all frequency axis settings of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F STATe Function Sets or queries whether the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor is displayed Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F STATe lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 F STATE ON CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 F STATE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 F STATE 1 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F VALue Function Queries the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F VALue lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 F VALUE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 F VALUE 100 00000E 03 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt POSition Function Sets or queries the position of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MA
83. Sets bit 3 EES of the status byte to 1 or 0 Error queue Sets bit 2 EAV of the status byte to 1 or 0 Enable Registers The following registers are used to mask a bit so that the bit will not affect the status byte even when it is set to 1 Service request enable register Masks bits of the status byte Standard event register Masks bits in the standard event register Extended event register Masks bits in the extended event register Reading and Writing to Registers For example you can use the ESE command to set the standard event enable register bits to ones and zeros You can use the ESE command to query whether the standard event enable register bits are ones or zeros For details on commands see chapter 5 IM DL850E 17EN 6 2 Status Byte Status Byte RQS 7 6 ESBIMAVIEES EAV 1 0 MSS e Bits 0 and 7 Not used always zero e Bit 1 Reserved e Bit 2 EAV Error Available This bit is 1 when the error queue is not empty In other words this bit is set to 1 when an error occurs For details see page 6 6 e Bit 3 EES Extend Event Summary Bit This bit is 1 when the logical AND of the extended event register and its corresponding event register is 1 In other words this bit is set to 1 when a certain event takes place inside the instrument For details see page 6 5 e Bit 4 MAV Message Available This bit is 1 when the output queue is not empty In other words this bit
84. Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a marker cursor on the X Y 5 79 display is displayed CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y VALue Queries the Y axis value of a marker cursor on the X Y display 5 79 CURSor XY TYPE Sets or queries the cursor type on the X Y display 5 79 CURSor XY VERTical Queries all V cursor settings for the X Y display 5 79 CURSor XY VERTical DX Queries all AX axis settings AX is between the V cursors on the X Y display 5 79 CURSor XY VERTical DX STATe Sets or queries whether the AX axis value between the V cursors on the X Y 5 79 display is displayed CURSor XY VERTical DX VALue Queries the AX axis value between the V cursors on the X Y display 5 80 CURSor XY VERTical POSition lt x gt Sets or queries a V cursor position on the X Y display 5 80 CURSor XY VERTical TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the V 5 80 cursors on the X Y display CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt Queries all X axis value settings for a V cursor on the X Y display 5 80 CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt STATe Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a V cursor on the X Y display is 5 80 displayed CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt VALue Queries the X axis value of a V cursor on the X Y display 5 80 DISPlay Group DISPlay Queries all display settings 5 81 DISPlay ACCumulate Queries all accumulated waveform display settings 5 81 DISPlay ACCumulate MODE Sets or queries the accumulated wavefo
85. Uni Line Messages e IFC Interface Clear Clears the talker and listener functions Stops data transmission if it is in progress e REN Remote Enable Switches between remote and local modes IDY Identify is not supported Responses to Multi Line Messages Address commands e GTL Go To Local Switches to local mode e SDC Selected Device Clear e Clears the program message command being received and the output queue see page 6 6 e Discards OPC and OPC commands that are being executed e Immediately aborts WAI and COMMunicate WAIT PPC Parallel Poll Configure GET Group Execute Trigger and TCT Take Control are not supported Responses to Multi Line Messages Universal commands e LLO Local Lockout Disables the CLEAR TRACE key on the front panel to prohibit switching to the local mode e DCL Device Clear Performs the same operation as SDC e SPE Serial Poll Enable Sets the talker function on all devices on the bus to serial polling mode The controller will poll each device in order e SPD Serial Poll Disable Clears the talker function s serial poll mode on all devices on the bus PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure is not supported What Are Interface Messages Interface messages are commands that a controller transmits They are also referred to as interface commands or bus commands They are classified as follows Uni line Messages Uni line messages are sent over a single control line The
86. VERTICAL DY STATE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL DY STATE 1 Example CURSor TY VERTical DY VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of V cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical DY VALue CURSor TY VERTical JUMP Function Moves the specified vertical cursor to the center of the specified zoom window Syntax CURSor TY VERTical JUMP Cl_21 Cl_Z 2 C2_21 C2_22 CURSor TY VERTical PERDt Function Queries all 1 AT value settings 1 AT is between the V cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical PERDt CURSor TY VERTical PERDt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the 1 AT value between the V cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY VERTical PERDt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY VERTical PERDt STATe CURSOR TY VERTICAL PERDT STATE ON CURSOR TY VERTICAL PERDT STATE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL PERDT STATE 1 Example CURSor TY VERTical PERDt VALue Function Queries the 1 AT value between the V cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical PERDt VALue CURSOR TY VERTICAL PERDT VALUE 250 00000E 00 Description If the source waveform is being measured in the frequency domain NAN is returned Example CURSor TY VERTical POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries a V cursor position on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor TY VERTical POSition
87. VOLTAGE VARIABLE gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE VARIABLE 0 On the DL850E DL850EV the menu title is V Scale OFF corresponds to the DIV setting and ON corresponds to the SPAN setting 5 64 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VDIV Function Sets or queries the V div setting of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VDIV lt Voltage gt lt Current gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VDIV lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Voltage gt 10mV div to 20V div 720210 when the probe attenuation is 1 1 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE VDIV 50 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE VDIV gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE VDIV 50 Example Description List of Selectable Ranges and Initial Values per Voltage Module Type 1 1 probe attenuation Type Selectable TO of Selectable Range of yP Range of VDIV py the Offset 701250 55 5mV to20V 5V 701251 1mVto20V 5V 701260 67 20 mV to 200 V 5V 701261 62 SmVto20V 5V 701265 O1mVto10V 5V 701275 SmVto10V 5V 720210 10mVto20V 5V 720220 200mVto2V 2V 720221 1mVto2V 200 mV The VDIV setting x 5 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VGAin Function Sets or queries the gain adjustment of a voltage measurement module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VGAin lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VGAin lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE VGAIN 1 01 CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE VGAIN gt
88. WINDOW TYPE HANNING Description The setting is the same for Window 1 and Window 2 5 88 IM DL850E 17EN 5 13 FILE Group The commands in this group deal with USB storage media the internal hard disk and external hard disks You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the FILE key on the front panel FILE Function Queries all storage media settings Syntax gt FILE FILE COPY ABORt Function Aborts file copying Syntax FILE COPY ABORt Example FILE COPY ABORT FILE COPY CDIRectory Function Changes the file copy destination directory Syntax FILE COPY CDIRectory lt String gt lt String gt Directory name Example FILE COPY CDIRECTORY NO_1 Description lt String gt specifies a relative path FILE COPY EXECute Function Executes file copying This is an overlap command Syntax FILE COPY EXECute lt String gt lt String gt The file name including its extension Example FILE COPY EXECUTE DATA PNG FILE COPY PATH Function Queries the file copy destination directory Example FILE COPY PATH gt FILE COPY PATH PATH USB UTIL FILE DELete Function Deletes files This is an overlap command Syntax FILE DELete lt String gt Example FILE DELETE CASE1 WDF Description e Use the FILE DIRectory DRIVe command to select the target medium Use the FILE DIRectory CDIRectory command to selec
89. XY VERTical DX Function Queries all AX axis settings AX is between the V cursors on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY VERTical DX CURSor XY VERTical DX STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AX axis value between the V cursors on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor XY VERTical Dx STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor XY VERTical DX STATe Example CURSOR XY VERTICAL DX STATE ON CURSOR XY VERTICAL DX STATE gt CURSOR XY VERTICAL DX STATE 1 IM DL850E 17EN 5 79 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor XY VERTical DX VALue Function Queries the AX axis value between the V cursors on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY VERTical DX VALue CURSOR XY VERTICAL DX VALUE gt CURSOR XY VERTICAL DX VALUE 300 00000E 00 Example CURSor XY VERTical POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries a V cursor position on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY VERTical POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor XY VERTical POSition lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 CURSOR XY VERTICAL POSITION1 3 CURSOR XY VERTICAL POSITION1 gt CURSOR XY VERTICAL POSITION1 3 00 Description You can query cursor position information for cursors XY1 to XY8 Use the CURSor XY VERTical TRACe command to specify the waveform that you want to query Example CURSor XY VERTical TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the V cursors on the X Y display Syntax
90. XY1Integ XY2Integ MEASURE XY1 XYLINTEG STATE ON MEASURE XY1 XYLINTEG STATE gt MEASURE XY1 XY1LINTEG STATE 1 Example MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt VALue Function Queries the measured value of a waveform parameter Syntax MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt VALue lt NRf gt XY lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to 48000 lt Parameter gt XY 1Integ XY2Integ Description This command returns NAN if the value cannot be measured Parameters cannot be measured if the measurement has not been performed or if the measurement was performed but computations were not performed because the specified range exceeded 10 Mpoint The lt NRf gt is used to specify which iteration of statistical processing to query the parameter value from This command returns NAN Not A Number if the specified value does not exist e For non cyclic statistical processing lt NRf gt can be omitted If you omit lt NRf gt the most recent history parameter value will be queried If you include lt NRf gt the history parameter value of the waveform lt NRf gt times before the newest history waveform will be queried e After cyclic statistical processing has been completed lt NRf gt can be omitted If you omit lt NRf gt the parameter value within the cycle that was measured last will be queried If you include lt NRf gt the parameter value within the cycle that was measured lt NRf gt times afte
91. after decimation that are used on the dot display Syntax DISPlay DECimation lt NRf gt DISPlay DECimation lt NRf gt 2000 to 100000 Example DISPLAY DECIMATION 2000 DISPLAY DECIMATION gt DISPLAY DECIMATION 2000 DISPlay DMMode Function Sets the display mode of the digital monitor display Syntax DISPlay DMMode DGRoup PGRoup HGRoup DISPlay DMMode DGRoup Display Group PGRoup PowerGroup HGRoup HarmonicGroup Example DISPLAY DMMODE DGROUP Description This command is valid on models with the G5 option DISPlay ESIZe Extra window Size Function Sets or queries the size of the extra window Syntax DISPlay ESIZe lt NRf gt AUTO DISPlay ESIZe lt NRf gt 0 to 8 Example DISPLAY ESIZE AUTO DISPLAY ESIZE gt DISPLAY ESIZE AUTO DISPlay FORMat Function Sets or queries the display format the number of divisions in the vertical direction Syntax DISPlay FORMat lt NRf gt DISPlay FORMat lt NRf gt 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 Example DISPLAY FORMAT 4 DISPLAY FORMAT gt DISPLAY FORMAT 4 DISPlay GRATicule Function Sets or queries the grid type Syntax DISPlay GRATicule CROSshair FRAMe GRID DISPlay GRATicule Example DISPLAY GRATICULE GRID DISPLAY GRATICULE gt DISPLAY GRATICULE GRID DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt Function Queries all display group settings Syntax DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt DISPlay GROup lt x1l gt ACLear
92. an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion SAVE TRIGger ACTion SAVE CDIRectory Function Changes the current directory on the storage medium that waveform data is saved to as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion SAVE CDIRectory lt String gt Example TRIGGER ACTION SAVE CDIRECTORY NO_1 TRIGger ACTion SAVE DRIVe Function Sets the storage medium that waveform data is saved to as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion SAVE DRIVe HD lt NRf gt NETWork SD USB lt NRf gt Example TRIGGER ACTION SAVE DRIVE SD TRIGger ACTion SAVE MODE Function Sets or queries whether waveform data is saved to the storage medium as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion SAVE MODE lt Boolean gt TRIGger ACTion SAVE MODE Example TRIGGER ACTION SAVE MODE ON TRIGGER ACTION SAVE MODE gt TRIGGER ACTION SAVE MODE 1 TRIGger ACTion SAVE PATH Function Queries the path on the storage medium that waveform data is saved to as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion SAVE PATH Example TRIGger ACTion SAVE PATH gt TRIG ACT SAVE PATH Path HD 1 20090506 TRIGger ACTion SAVE TYPE o Function Sets or queries the type of data to save when S waveform data is saved to the storage medium 3 as an action A Syntax TRIGger ACTion SAVE TYPE ASCii BINary FLOat TRIGger ACTion SAVE TYPE Example TRIGGER ACTION SAVE TYPE BINARY TRIGGER ACTION SAVE TYPE gt TRIGGER ACTION SAVE TYPE BINARY
93. change the status byte based on bit 0 in the extended event register The STATus EESR command is used to clear the extended event register The SRE 8 command is used to generate service ESE 1 EESR SRE 8 TRIGger ESR MAIAJZAQ Bulwwesboig gt requests based only on the changes in the extended event register bits The WAVeform SEND command is not executed until a service request is generated Using the COMMunicate WAIT command The COMMunicate WAIT command is used to wait for a specific event to occur Example STATus FILTerl FALL STATus ESR TRIGger ODE SINGle lt PMT gt Read the response to STATus E ESR COMMunicate WAIT 1 WAVeform SEND lt PMT gt For a description of STATus FILTerl FALL and STATus EESR see the previous section about the extended event register The COMMunicate WAIT 1 command specifies that the program will wait for bit O in the extended event register to be set to 1 WAVe form SEND is not executed until bit O in the extended event register becomes 1 IM DL850E 17EN 4 9 Chapter 5 5 1 Commands List of Commands Command Function Page ACQuire Group ACQuire Queries all waveform acquisition settings 5 28 ACQuire AVERage
94. displayed waveform in the specified group display of the 5 capture window 33 CAPTure MCMode Main Capture Sets or queries the main capture mode during dual capture 5 33 Mode CAPTure MODE Sets or queries whether the dual capture mode is enabled 5 34 CAPTure RLENgth Sets or queries the dual capture length 5 34 CAPTure TDIV Sets or queries the dual capture T DIV setting 5 34 CAPTure WINDow Queries all dual capture display window settings 5 34 CAPTure WINDow CAPNum Sets or queries the number of the waveform that is displayed in the dual 5 34 capture window CAPTure WINDow MAG Sets or queries the dual capture window zoom factor as a time 5 34 CAPTure WINDow MODE Sets or queries whether the dual capture window is turned on 5 34 CAPTure WINDow POSition Sets or queries the dual capture window horizontal position 5 34 HANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt Queries all vertical axis settings of a channel 5 35 CHANnel lt x gt ACCL Queries all the settings of an installed acceleration voltage module 5 35 CHANnel lt x gt ACCL BIAS Sets or queries whether the bias current supply to the acceleration sensors 5 35 of an installed acceleration voltage module is on CHANnel lt x gt ACCL BWIDth Sets or queries the filter when the input coupling of an installed acceleration 5 35 voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL COUPL ing Sets o
95. each bit in decimal format For example specifying ESE 251 will cause the standard enable register to be set to 11111011 In this case bit 2 of the standard event register is disabled This means that bit 5 ESB of the status byte register is not set to 1 even if a query error occurs The default value is ESE 0 all bits disabled Aquery using ESE will not clear the contents of the standard event enable register For information about the standard event enable register see page 6 3 ESR Function Syntax Example Description IDN Function Syntax Example Description OPC Function Syntax Example Description OPC Function Syntax Example Description Queries and clears the standard event register ESR ESR gt 32 This command returns a sum of the values of each bit in decimal format e When an SRQ is sent you can check what types of events have occurred e For example if a value of 32 is returned this indicates that the standard event register is set to 00100000 This means that the SRQ occurred due to a command syntax error e A query using ESR will clear the contents of the standard event register e For information about the standard event register see page 6 3 Queries the DL850E DL850EV model TDN IDN gt YOKOGAWA DL850E 0 F0 10 This command returns a string in the following format lt Manufacturer gt lt Model gt lt Serial no gt lt Firmware
96. for the specified determination pattern for waveform zone 5 96 determination GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt CAUSe Queries whether the specified determination pattern for waveform zone 5 96 determination is the cause of a NO GO judgment GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt MODE Sets or queries the specified determination pattern s reference condition for 5 96 waveform zone determination GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt TRACe Sets or queries the specified determination pattern s determination waveform 5 97 for waveform zone determination GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt ZONE Sets or queries the specified determination pattern s source waveform zone 5 97 data for waveform zone determination HCOPy Group HCOPy Queries all screen capture data output settings 5 98 HCOPy COMMent Sets or queries the screen comment 5 98 HCOPy DIRection Sets or queries the data output destination 5 98 IM DL850E 17EN spuewwoy 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page HCOPy EXECute Executes data output 5 98 HCOPy NETPrint Queries all network printer output settings 5 98 gt HCOPy NETPrint TONE Sets or queries whether data will be printed in color from the network printer 5 98 HCOPy NETPrint TYPE Sets or queries the network printer output command type
97. gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay MEASure Description This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay MEASure COUNt Function Sets or queries the edge detection count of the source waveform used to measure the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay MEASure COUNt lt NRf gt MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay MEASure COUNt lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to 9 Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY MEASURE COUNT 2 MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY MEASURE COUNT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY MEASURE COUNT 2 Description e The default value is 1 This command is valid only on logic module channels This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay MEASure SLOPe Function Sets or queries the edge polarity of the source waveform used to measure the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay MEASure SLOPe RISE FALL MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay MEASure SLOPe lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1to8 Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY MEASURE SLOPE FALL MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY MEASURE SLOPE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY MEASURE SLOPE FALL Description The defau
98. gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Sets or queries the scaling factor the value per bit of the specified 5 49 FACTor subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Sets or queries the scaling factor the offset value of the specified 5 49 O OFFSet subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses S CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Sets or queries the display range the upper and lower limits of the specified 5 49 3 SCALe subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses 2 CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified subchannel of a module 5 49 2 POSition that can monitor LIN busses CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Sets or queries the data unit of the specified subchannel of a module that 5 50 UNIT can monitor LIN busses CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Sets or queries the specified bit label that is used when the data type is logic 5 50 BLABel lt x3 gt for the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Sets or queries the label of the specified subchannel of a module that can 5 50 LABel monitor LIN busses CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of LIN logic waveforms 5 50 ZOOM CHANnel lt x gt LOGic Queries all settings of an installed logic input module 5 50 CHANnel lt x gt LOGic Queries
99. is performed when the condition is met 5 93 and the settings for the condition itself GONogo ACTion BUZZer Sets or queries whether a beep is sounded when the condition is met 5 93 GONogo ACTion FOLDer Sets or queries whether a folder is created with the date when waveform 5 93 data and screen captures are saved to a storage medium when the condition is met GONogo ACTion HCOPy HardCOPY Sets or queries whether a screen capture is printed from the built in printer 5 93 when the condition is met GONogo ACTion IMAGe Queries all settings for the screen capture that is saved when the condition is 5 93 met 5 14 IM DL850E 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page GONogo ACTion IMAGe CDIRectory Sets the current directory where the screen capture is saved to when the 5 93 condition is met GONogo ACTion IMAGe DRIVe Sets or queries the medium that the screen capture is saved to when the 5 93 condition is met GONogo ACTion IMAGe MODE Sets or queries whether a screen capture is saved when the condition is met 5 94 GONogo ACTion IMAGe PATH Queries the path on the storage medium that a screen capture is saved to 5 94 when the condition is met GONogo ACTion MAIL Queries all settings for sending e mail when the condition is met 5 94 GONogo ACTion MAIL
100. is valid on models with the C20 option SYSTem IRIG MODulation Function Sets or queries the IRIG modulation type for synchronizing the time through IRIG signals Syntax SYSTem IRIG MODulation AM PWCode SYSTem IRIG MODulation Example SYSTEM IRIG MODULATION AM SYSTEM IRIG MODULATION gt SYSTEM IRIG MODULATION AM Description This command is valid on models with the C20 option SYSTem IRIG STATe Function Queries the sync signal reception state when using IRIG for time synchronization Syntax SYSTem IRIG STATe LOCK Normal reception UNLock No reception Stable Normal reception synchronized within 10 ppm Example SYSTEM IRIG STATE gt SYSTEM IRIG STATE LOCK Description This command is valid on models with the C20 option SYSTem INPut OGADJust Offset Gain Adjust Function Sets or queries whether the input DC offset gain adjustment feature is used Syntax SYSTem INPut OGADjust lt Boolean gt SYSTem INPut OGADjJust Example SYSTEM INPUT OGADJUST gt SYSTEM INPUT OGADJUST 1 SYSTem KEYProtect Function Queries all key lock settings Syntax SYSTem KEYProtect SYSTem KEYProtect EPASsword Enter password Function Enters the password to release the key lock Syntax SYSTem KEYProtect EPASsword lt String gt lt String gt Up to 8 characters Example SYSTEM KEYPROTECT EPASSWORD ABC Description This command is valid when the keys are locked a password is requir
101. logic module channels This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence SOURce Function Syntax Example Sets or queries whether to set the reference for measuring the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel to a trigger point or toa waveform MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence SOURce TRACe TRIGger MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence SOURce lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE SOURCE TRACE MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE SOURCE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE SOURCE TRACE Description e The default value is TRACe e This command is valid only on logic module channels e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence TRACe Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the reference waveform trace used to measure the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence TRACe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x3 gt MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence TRACe lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 lt x3 gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE TRACE 1 MEASURE CHANNEL1
102. lt x gt ACCL BWIDth FULL AUTO lt Frequency gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL BWIDth lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Frequency gt 4kHz 400Hz 40Hz Example CHANNEL1 ACCL BWIDTH FULL CHANNEL1 ACCL BWIDTH gt CHANNEL1 ACCL BWIDTH FULL CHANnel lt x gt ACCL COUPling Function Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed acceleration voltage module CHANnel lt x gt ACCL COUPling AC DC ACCL GND CHANnel lt x gt ACCL COUPLling lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL1 ACCL COUPLING ACCL CHANNEL1 ACCL COUPLING gt CHANNEL1 ACCL COUPLING ACCL Syntax Example CHANnel lt x gt ACCL GAIN Function Syntax Example CHANnel lt x gt ACCL POSition Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the gain when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL GAIN lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL GAIN lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 CHANNEL1 ACCL GAIN 1 0 CHANNEL1 ACCL GAIN gt CHANNEL1 ACCL GAIN 1 0 Sets or queries the vertical position when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL POSition lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL POSition lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 5 00 to 5 00 div in 0 01 div steps CHANNEL1 ACCL POSITION 0 00 CHANNEL1 ACCL POSITION
103. lt x2 gt VDIV lt x1 gt 1 to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid lt x2 gt 1 to 16 lt Voltage gt 200mV to 2V Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH voltage input module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt ZOOM Function Syntax Description Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt ZOOM lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt ZOOM lt x1 gt 1 to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid lt x2 gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 1 0 111 0 125 0 143 0 167 0 2 0 25 0 33 0 4 0 5 0 556 0 625 0 667 0 714 0 8 0 833 1 1 11 1 25 1 33 1 43 1 67 2 2 22 2 5 3 33 4 5 6 67 8 10 12 5 16 7 20 25 40 50 100 Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH voltage input module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VARiable Function Syntax Example Description Sets or queries how the vertical scale is set for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VARiable lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VARiable lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE VARIABLE 0 CHANNEL1
104. marker cursor on the T Y 5 75 STATe display is displayed CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X Queries the X axis value of a marker cursor on the T Y display 5 75 VALue CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y Queries all Y axis settings for a marker cursor on the T Y display 5 75 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a marker cursor on the T Y 5 75 STATe display is displayed CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y Queries the Y axis value of a marker cursor on the T Y display 5 75 VALue CURSor TY TYPE Sets or queries the cursor type on the T Y display 5 75 CURSor TY VERTical Queries all V cursor settings for the T Y display 5 75 CURSor TY VERTical DX Queries all AX value settings AX is between the V cursors on the T Y 5 75 display CURSor TY VERTical DX STATe Sets or queries whether the AX value between the V cursors on the T Y 5 76 display is displayed CURSor TY VERTical DX VALue Queries the AX value between the V cursors on the T Y display 5 76 CURSor TY VERTical DY Queries all Y axis value settings for V cursors on the T Y display 5 76 CURSor TY VERTical DY STATe Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for V cursors on the T Y display is 5 76 displayed CURSor TY VERTical DY VALue Queries the Y axis value of V cursors on the T Y display 5 76 CURSor TY VERTical JUMP Moves the specified vertical cursor to the center of the specified zoom 5 76 window CURSor
105. measurements the selectable range is the current measurement range setting Values do not take linear scaling information into consideration The trigger s selectable range of Au7Fe temperatures is 0 to 280 K 273 to 7 C TRIGger SIMPle LOGic Function Queries all simple trigger logic trigger settings Syntax TRIGger SIMPle LOGic TRIGger SIMPle LOGic BIT Function Sets or queries the bit that sets the trigger slope Syntax TRIGger SIMPle LOGic BIT lt NRf gt TRIGger SIMPle LOGic BIT lt NRf gt 1 to 8 Example TRIGGER SIMPLE LOGIC BIT 2 TRIGGER SIMPLE LOGIC BIT gt TRIGGER SIMPLE LOGIC BIT 2 TRIGger SIMPle LOGic SLOPe Function Sets or queries the slope for logic triggers Syntax TRIGger SIMPle LOGic SLOPe FALL RISE TRIGger SIMPle LOGic SLOPe TRIGGER SIMPLE LOGIC SLOPE FALL TRIGGER SIMPLE LOGIC SLOPE gt TRIGGER SIMPLE LOGIC SLOPE FALL Example TRIGger SIMPle SLOPe o Function Sets or queries the trigger slope of the channel S specified by TRIGger SIMPle SOURce for simple 3 triggers A Syntax TRIGger SIMPle SLOPe RISE FALL BISLope TRIGger SIMPle SLOPe TRIGGER SIMPLE SLOPE RISE TRIGGER SIMPLE SLOPE gt TRIGGER SIMPLE SLOPE RISE Example Description You cannot use this command to set the setting when the trigger zone is EXTernal LINE or TIME TRIGger SIMPle SOURce Function Sets or queries t
106. medium as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion FOLDer lt Boolean gt Example TRIGGER ACTION FOLDER ON TRIGGER ACTION FOLDER gt TRIGGER ACTION FOLDER 1 TRIGger ACTion HCOPy Function Sets or queries whether an screen capture is printed from the built in printer as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion HCOPy lt Boolean gt TRIGger ACTion HCOPy Example TRIGGER ACTION HCOPY ON TRIGGER ACTION HCOPY gt TRIGGER ACTION HCOPY 1 TRIGger ACTion IMAGe Function Queries all settings for saving screen captures as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion IMAGe TRIGger ACTion IMAGe CDIRectory Function Sets or queries the current directory on the storage medium where screen captures are saved to as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion IMAGe CDIRectory lt String gt TRIGger ACTion IMAGe CDIRectory Example TRIGGER ACTION IMAGE CDIRECTORY NO_1 TRIGGER ACTION IMAGE CDIRECTORY gt TRIGGER ACTION IMAGE CDIRECTORY NO_1 TRIGger ACTion IMAGe DRIVe Function Sets the storage medium that screen captures are saved to as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion IMAGe DRIVe HD lt NRf gt NETWork SD USB lt NRf gt Example TRIGGER ACTION IMAG DRIVE SD TRIGger ACTion IMAGe MODE Function Sets or queries whether a screen capture is saved to the storage medium as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion IMAGe MODE lt Boolean gt TRIGger ACTion IMAGe Example TRIGGER ACTIO
107. module IM DL850E 17EN 5 157 5 36 XY Group XY WINDow lt x gt Function Queries all settings related to the specified XY window Syntax XY WINDow lt x gt XY WINDow lt x gt MODE Function Sets or queries whether the specified XY window is displayed Syntax XY WINDow lt x gt MODE lt Boolean gt XY WINDow lt x gt MODE lt x gt 1 2 Example XY WINDOW1 MODE ON XY WINDOW1 MODE gt XY WINDOW1 MODE 1 XY WAVeform lt x1 gt XTRace Function Sets or queries the channel that is assigned to the specified XY waveform s X axis Syntax XY WAVeform lt x1 gt XTRace lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x2 gt XY WAVeform lt x1 gt XTRace lt x1 gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 to 60 sub channel lt x2 gt 1 to 8 Example XY WAVEFORM1 XTRACE 1 XY WAVEFORM1 XTRACE gt XY WAVEFORM1 XTRACE 1 Description You cannot select the channel of a logic module 5 158 IM DL850E 17EN 5 37 ZOOM Group The commands in this group deal with the zoomed display You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the ZOOM key on the front panel If the selectable range of the time axis is lt NRf gt 5 to Sdiv the selectable range varies depending on settings such as the record length For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions under Notes about Cursor Measurement in chapter 9 of IM DL850E 01EN ZOOM Function Syntax Queries all
108. num port CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT LONLy Sets or queries the Listen Only setting for an installed module that can 5 37 perform CAN bus signal monitoring port CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT SJW Sync Sets or queries the resynchronization jump width also referred to as the 5 38 jump width sync jump width CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT SPOint Sets or queries the sample point for each bit of a CAN bus signal port 5 38 CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT TERMinator Sets or queries whether the 124 Q terminator between CAN_H and CAN_L 5 38 on the CAN bus line is ON or OFF CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Queries all the settings of a sub channel on an installed module that can 5 38 perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the byte count of a sub channel on an installed module that 5 38 BCOunt Byte Count can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the bit length of a sub channel on an installed module that 5 38 BICount Bit Count can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries a bit label of a sub channel on an installed module that can 5 39 O BLABel lt x gt perform CAN bus signal monitoring when the sub channel s data type is S logic 3 CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the endianness used to save to intern
109. or greater year lt NRf gt 1 to 12 month lt NRf gt 1 to 31 day lt NRf gt 0 to 23 hour lt NRf gt 0 to 59 minute lt NRf gt 0 to 59 Second lt NRf gt 0 to 999999 microsecond SEARCH TIME TIME 2010 1 1 0 0 0 0 SEARCH TIME TIME gt SEARCH TIME TIME 2010 1 1 0 0 0 0 The initial value is the reference time of the waveform that is displayed when you open the menu If there are no history waveforms or if the menu is not open the initial value is 00 00 00 00 on January 1 2010 puewwog Function Sets or queries the window that search results will be displayed in Syntax SEARch TWINdow Z1 22 SEARch TWINdow Example SEARCH TWINDOW Z1 SEARCH TWINDOW gt SEARCH TWINDOW Z1 SEARcCh TYPE Function Sets or queries the search type Syntax SEARch TYPE EDGE EVENt LSTate MMAX TIME SEARch TYPE Example SEARCH TYPE EDGE SEARCH TYPE gt SEARCH TYPE EDGE IM DL850E 17EN 5 127 5 26 SNAP Group The command in this group is used to take snapshots You can execute the same operation that you can by using the SNAPSHOT key on the front panel SNAP Function Takes a snapshot Syntax SNAP Example SNAP 5 128 IM DL850E 17EN 5 27 SSTart Group The commands in this group deal with executing the single start operation These commands set the trigger mode to Single and start waveform acquisition SSTart Function Executes the singl
110. or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for an installed 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale AVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale AVALue lt x1 gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE AVALUE 25 CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE AVALUE gt CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 The coefficient cannot be set to 0 IM DL850E 17EN 5 61 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale BVALue Function Sets or queries the offset value B that is used during linear scaling for an installed 16 CH voltage input module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale BVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale BVALue lt x1 gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 0 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE BVALUE 25 CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE BVALUE gt CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype Function Queries all the linear scaling display mode settings of an installed 16 C
111. or queries whether time information is included when saving data in ASCII format or CSV format Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii MEASure TINFormation lt Boolean gt FILE SAVE ASCii MEASure TINFormation Example FILE SAVE ASCII TINFORMATION ON FILE SAVE ASCII TINFORMATION gt FILE SAVE ASCII TINFORMATION 1 IM DL850E 17EN 5 91 puewwoy 5 13 FILE Group FILE SAVE BINary COMPression Function Sets or queries whether waveform data is compressed during saving Syntax FILE SAVE BINary COMPression lt Boolean gt gt FILE SAVE BINary COMPression Example FILE SAVE BINARY COMPRESSION ON FILE SAVE BINARY COMPRESSION gt FILE SAVE BINARY COMPRESSION 1 Description This command is valid when you have set the waveform to save to the full range of waveforms on the main screen Data can only be saved in binary format FILE SAVE COMMent Function Sets or queries the comment that will be saved Syntax FILE SAVE COMMent lt String gt FILE SAVE COMMent lt String gt Up to 120 characters Example FILE SAVE COMMENT WAVEFORM 1 FILE SAVE COMMENT gt FILE SAVE COMMENT WAVEFORM 1 Description You can only use the characters and symbols on the keyboard that appears on the DL850E DL850EV screen Q is 1EH and p is 1FH expressed in ASCII code FILE SAVE FFT FINFormation Function Sets or queries whether frequency information is included when FFT waveforms ar
112. related to the marker cursor measurement items for the 5 74 T Y display CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt Queries all AX value settings AX is between the marker cursors on the T Y 5 74 display CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt Sets or queries whether the AX value between the marker cursors on the T Y 5 74 STATe display is displayed CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt Queries the AX value between the marker cursors on the T Y display 5 74 VALue CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt Queries all AY value settings AY is between the marker cursors on the T Y 5 74 display CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt Sets or queries whether the AY value between the marker cursors on the T Y 5 74 STATe display is displayed CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt Queries the AY value between the marker cursors on the T Y display 5 74 VALue CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt JUMP Moves the specified marker cursor to the center of the specified zoom 5 75 window CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Sets or queries a marker cursor position on the T Y display 5 75 POSition CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the 5 75 marker cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X Queries all X axis settings for a marker cursor on the T Y display 5 75 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a
113. settings for automated measurement of XY waveform parameters Syntax MEASure XY lt x gt MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt Function Queries all the settings of a waveform parameter measurement item Syntax MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt XY lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt Parameter gt XY 1Integ XY2Integ MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt COUNt Function Queries the count of measured values for cyclic statistical processing of a waveform parameter Syntax MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt COUNt lt Parameter gt XY 1Integ XY2Integ MEASURE XY1 XYLINTEG COUNT gt MEASURE XY1 XYLINTEG COUNT 1 Example MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation Function Queries a cyclic statistical processing value of a waveform parameter Syntax MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation lt Parameter gt XY1Integ XY2Integ MEASURE XY1 XYLINTEG MAXIMUM gt MEASURE XY1 XYLINTEG MAXIMUM NAN Description This command returns NAN for any statistics that cannot be processed Example MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the specified waveform s waveform parameter measurement item is ON or OFF Syntax MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt STATe lt Boolean gt MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt STATe lt Parameter gt
114. shot output settings of an installed module that can 5 36 perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut DATA lt x gt Sets or queries the data frame value used by an installed module that can 5 36 perform CAN bus signal monitoring when it performs one shot output CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut DLC Data Sets or queries the byte size of the data section of the data frame used for 5 36 Length Code one shot output CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut EXECute Executes one shot output on an installed module that can perform CAN bus 5 37 One Shot Out signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut FRAMe Sets or queries the format data or remote of the frame used for one shot 5 37 output CHANnel lt x gt CAN 0SOut MFORmat Sets or queries the message format standard or extended of the frame 5 37 Message Format used for one shot output IM DL850E 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CHANnel lt x gt CAN O0SOut MID Sets or queries the message ID of the frame used for one shot output 5 37 Message ID CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT Queries all the port settings of an installed module that can perform CAN bus 5 37 signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BRATe Sets or queries the bitrate of a CAN bus signal port 5 37 CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BSNum Bit Sets or queries the number of sample points for each bit of a CAN bus signal 5 37 sample
115. the decimal place that is used during linear scaling when the display mode is set to Float for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum lt NRf gt AUTO CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Syntax DISPlaytype DECimalnum lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 to 3 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM AUTO CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM AUTO Example CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype MODE Function Sets or queries the display mode that is used during linear scaling for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype MODE EXPonent FLOating CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype MODE lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE EXPONENT CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE EXPONENT Example CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit Function Sets or queries the unit prefix that is used during linear scaling when the display mode is set to Float for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit AUTO NONE PICO NANO
116. the specified 5 133 location in the internal memory STORe SETup lt x gt DATE Queries the date and time of the setup data that is stored to the specified 5 133 location in the internal memory STORe SETup lt x gt EXECute Saves setup data to the specified location in the internal memory 5 133 SYSTem Group SYSTem Queries all system settings 5 134 SYSTem ACQSoft Sets or queries whether connection from the Acquisition Software is 5 134 forbidden or permitted IM DL850E 17EN 5 21 spuewwoy 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page SYSTem CHANnel lt x gt SNUMber Queries the instrument number of the specified channel 5 134 lt Serial Number gt SYSTem CLICk Sets or queries whether click sounds are produced 5 134 SYSTem CLOCk Queries all date time settings 5 134 SYSTem CLOCk DATE Sets or queries the date 5 134 SYSTem CLOCk FORMat Sets or queries the date format 5 134 SYSTem CLOCk MODE Sets or queries whether the date and time are displayed 5 135 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP Queries all SNTP settings 5 135 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP EXECute Uses SNTP to set the date and time 5 135 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime Sets or queries the time difference from GMT when SNTP is being used 5 135 SYSTem CLOCk TIME Sets or queries the time 5 135 SYSTem CLOCk TYPE Sets or queries whether the date and time are set ma
117. the unit is mV or V 30000 to 30000 when the unit is STR 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 during linear scaling Example CHANNEL5 STRAIN SCALE 5000 5000 CHANNELS STRAIN SCALE gt CHANNEL5 STRAIN SCALE 5 000000E 03 5 000000E 03 CHANnel lt x gt STRain UNIT Function Sets or queries the unit of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain UNIT MV USTR CHANnel lt x gt STRain UNIT Example CHANNEL11 STRAIN UNIT USTR CHANNEL11 STRAIN UNIT gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN UNIT USTR CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature Function Queries all the settings of a module if the module in the specified channel can measure temperature Syntax CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BURNout Function Sets or queries whether burnout will be detected when temperature measurements are performed Syntax CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BURNout lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BURNout lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE BURNOUT ON CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE BURNOUT gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE BURNOUT 1 5 54 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BWIDth Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the bandwidth limit that is used when temperature measurements are performed CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BWIDth AUTO FULL lt Frequency gt CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BWIDth lt x gt 1 to 16 For t
118. to 720 in steps of 1 CURSOR TY DEGREE RVALUE 360 CURSOR TY DEGREE RVALUE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE RVALUE 360 Example CURSor TY DEGRee TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the angle cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee TRACe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt ALL CURSor TY DEGRee TRACe lt NRf gt 1 to 60 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to 60 only when it is necessary to specify the sub channel CURSOR TY DEGREE TRACE 1 CURSOR TY DEGREE TRACE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE TRACE 1 Example CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt Function Queries all measured value settings for an angle cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 5 72 IM DL850E 17EN 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the measured value of an angle cursor on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt STATe lt x gt 1 2 CURSOR TY DEGREE Y1 STATE 1 CURSOR TY DEGREE Y1 STATE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE Y1 STATE 1 Example CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt VALue Function Queries the measured value of an angle cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt VALue lt x gt 1 2 Example CURSOR T
119. upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt NR gt lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe lt x1 gt 1 to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid lt x2 gt 1 to 16 lt Voltage gt and lt NRf gt The selectable range varies depending on the range setting Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH voltage input module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt VARiable Function Sets or queries how the vertical scale is set for an installed 16 CH voltage input module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt VARiable lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt VARiable lt x1 gt 1 to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid lt x2 gt 1 to 16 Description Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH voltage input module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt VDIV Function Syntax Description Sets or queries the V DIV setting of an installed 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt VDIV lt Voltage gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel
120. waveform used to measure the delay between channels for the specified waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence SLOPe RISE FALL EFASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence SLOPe Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE SLOPE RIS MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE SLOPE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE SLOPE RISE Ss Gl MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence SOURcCe Function Sets or queries whether to set the reference point for measuring the delay between channels for a waveform to a trigger point or to a waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence SOURce TRACe TRIGger MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence SOURce MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE SOURCE TRACE MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE SOURCE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE SOURCE TRACE Example MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence TRACe Function Sets or queries the reference waveform trace used to measure the delay between channels for a waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence TRACe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x
121. x gt 1 to 60 sub channel MONITOR LATCH ASEND CHANNEL1 gt The response format is the same as the MONitor ASENd CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt command Description The data that is present at the time when you Example execute the latch command is sent If the latch command has not been executed an undefined value is returned MONitor LATCh EXECute Function Latches the monitor data Syntax MONitor LATCh EXECute MONitor LATCh SEND ALL CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Sends numeric monitor data Syntax MONitor LATCh SEND ALL CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel MON LATCh SEND CHAN1 gt 9 9 digit number of bytes data byte Example sequence Description The data that is present at the time when you execute the latch command is sent MONitor OFFSet CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Queries the offset that is used when the specified channel s numeric monitor data is converted to a physical value Syntax MONitor OFFSet CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel MONITOR OFFSET CHANNEL1 gt MONITOR OFFSET CHANNEL1 0 0000000E 00 Example MONitor RANGe CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Queries the range that is used whe
122. x gt VALue Queries the Y axis value measured value of a V cursor on the T Y display CURSor TY VERTical Y lt x gt VALue lt x gt 1 2 CURSOR TY VERTICAL Y2 VALUE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL Y2 VALUE 333 33333E 03 e When the Internal Clock Is Being Used as the Time Base When measurements are performed in the time domain this queries the time When measurements are performed in the frequency domain this queries the frequency e If you have set the waveform that you want to measure to ALL all the measured values from the channels sub channels and Math channels of all the installed modules will be returned e NAN will be returned for any unused channels and channels that do not have modules installed in their corresponding slots For modules that have sub channels the measured values of all sub channels will be returned NAN will be returned for any sub channels whose input is turned off WAIT While the DL850E DL850EV is waiting for the specified CURSor command to finish it will wait the time specified by the CURSor WAIT timeout value until it begins processing the subsequent command CURSor WAIT lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 36000 timeout value in units of 100 msec CURSOR WAIT 100 gt CURSOR WAIT 1 If the CURSor command that is being processed finishes within the specified timeout this command will return 0 1 is returned if the CURSor command does not finish within the specified
123. 00 00000E 00 Example CURSor TY HORizontal POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries a horizontal cursor position on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor TY HORizontal POSition lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 5 to 5 in steps of 1 100 Example CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL POSITION2 3 CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL POSITION2 gt CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL POSITION2 3 00 CURSor TY HORizontal TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the horizontal cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt lt NR gt CURSor TY HORizontal TRACe lt NRf gt 1 to 16 lt x gt 1t08 lt NRf gt 1 to 60 only when it is necessary to specify the sub channel CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL TRACE 1 CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL TRACE gt CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL TRACE 1 puewwoy Example CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt Function Queries all Y axis settings of the horizontal cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a horizontal cursor on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY HORi zontal Y lt x gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt STATe lt x gt 1 2 CURSOR TY HORI
124. 1 3 CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL POSITION1 gt CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL POSITION1 3 00 Description You can query cursor position information for cursors XY1 to XY8 Use the CURSor XY HORizontal TRACe command to specify the waveform that you want to query CURSor XY HORizontal TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the H cursors on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal TRACe XY1 XY2 XY3 XY4 XY5 XY6 XY7 XY8 CURSor XY HORizontal TRACe Example CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL TRACE XY2 CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL TRACE gt CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL TRACE XY2 CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt Function Queries all Y axis value settings for an H cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for an H cursor on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt STATe lt x gt 1 2 Example CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL Y1 STATE ON CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL Y1 STATE gt CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL Y1 STATE 1 CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of an H cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt VALue lt x gt 1 2 Example CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL Y1 VALUE gt CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL Y1 VALUE 150 00000
125. 10 and later INITialize UNDO Function Undoes the setting initialization Syntax INITialize UNDO Description The cleared history data will not be restored IM DL850E 17EN 5 103 puewwoy 5 19 LSTart Group The commands in this group deal with starting the log operation These commands set the trigger mode to On Start and start waveform acquisition LSTart Log STart Function Starts waveform acquisition immediately Syntax LSTart LSTart Function Starts waveform acquisition immediately and waits for acquisition to complete Syntax LSTart Example LSTart gt 0 Description When acquisition is complete this command returns 0 5 104 IM DL850E 17EN 5 20 MATH Group The commands in this group deal with computations You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the MATH key on the front panel If the selectable range of the time axis is lt NRf gt 5 to Sdiv the selectable range varies depending on settings such as the record length For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions under Notes about Cursor Measurement in chapter 9 of IM DL850E 01EN MATH lt x gt Function Queries all computation settings Syntax MATH lt x gt lt x gt 1to8 MATH lt x gt AVERage Function Queries all averaging computation settings Syntax MATH lt x gt AVERage lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify Descript
126. 122 ASENd command MTRigger Group MTRigger Manually triggers the DL850E DL850EV 5 123 RECall Group RECall SETup lt x gt EXECute Recalls setup data from an internal memory area 5 124 SEARch Group SEARch Queries all search settings 5 125 SEARch ABORt Aborts the search 5 125 SEARch EDGE Queries all edge search settings 5 125 SEARCh EDGE COUNt Sets or queries the edge search count 5 125 SEARch EDGE HYSTeresis Sets or queries the edge search determination level hysteresis 5 125 SEARch EDGE LEVEL Sets or queries the edge search determination level 5 125 SEARch EDGE LOGic BIT lt x gt Sets or queries the edge polarity of the specified bit for when the edge 5 125 search is performed on logic traces SEARch EDGE SLOPe Sets or queries the edge polarity for when the edge search is performed on 5 125 traces other than logic traces SEARch EDGE SOURce Sets or queries the trace to perform the edge search on 5 125 SEARch EPOint End POint Sets or queries the search end position 5 125 SEARch EXECute Executes the search This is an overlap command 5 126 SEARCh EVENt Queries all event search settings 5 126 SEARch EVENt COUNt Sets or queries the event search event number 5 126 SEARch EVENt SOURce Sets or queries the event search source event 5 126 5 20 IM DL850E 17EN 5 1 List of Command
127. 14 LIN SCHANNEL1 LABLE CH14 1 CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt ZOOM Function Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of LIN logic waveforms Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt ZOOM lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt ZOOM lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 0 1 0 111 0 125 0 143 0 167 0 2 0 25 0 33 0 4 0 5 0 556 0 625 0 667 0 714 0 8 0 833 1 1 11 1 25 1 33 1 43 1 67 2 2 22 2 5 3 33 Example CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 Z00M 2 CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 ZOOM gt CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 Z00M 2 Description This command is valid when the data type is logic CHANnel lt x gt LOGic Function Queries all settings of an installed logic input module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 Function Queries all settings of each bit of an installed logic input module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 CELimination Function Sets or queries the chattering elimination for the specified bit of the specified logic channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 CELimination OFF lt Time gt CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 CELimination lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Time gt 5ms 10ms 20ms 50ms 100ms Example CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT8 CELIMINATION 0 01 CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT8 CELIMINATION gt CHANNEL15 LOGIC
128. 15 devices including the controller can be connected on a single bus When connecting multiple devices you must assign a unique address to each device Use cables that are 2 m or shorter in length to connect devices Keep the total length of the cables under 20 m When devices are communicating have at least two thirds of the devices on the bus turned on To connect multiple devices use a star or daisy chain configuration as shown below Loop and parallel configurations are not allowed IM DL850E 17EN 3 2 Connecting GP IB Cables Optional CAUTION Be sure to turn off the PC and the DL850E DL850EV when connecting or removing communication cables Otherwise erroneous operation may result or the internal circuitry may break IM DL850E 17EN 3 3 Ieuondo aejs9 U gi dD el 3 3 GP IB Interface Features GP IB Interface Features Listener Capabilities e Allows you to specify the same DL850E DL850EV settings that you can using the front panel keys You cannot turn the power on and off or change communication settings e Receives output requests for measured and computed data panel setting data and error codes e Receives status report commands and other commands Talker Capabilities The DL850E DL850EV can transmit measured and computed data The DL850E DL850EV can transmit panel setting data and the status byte The DL850E
129. 4 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 1 to 8 when ValueType is set to Logic 2 to 32 when ValueType is set to Unsigned or Signed CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 BICOUNT 16 CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 BICOUNT gt CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 BICOUNT 16 Example 5 48 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt BORDer Byte Order Function Sets or queries the endian mode that is used to save data to internal memory for the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt BORDer BIG LITTle CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt BORDer lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 Example CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL BORDER LITTLE CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 BORDER gt CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 BORDER LITTLE CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt VTYPe Value Type Function Sets or queries the data type of the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt VTYPe UNSigned SIGNed LOGic CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt VTYPe lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 Example CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL VTYPE UNSIGNED CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 VTYPE gt CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 VTYPE UNSIGNED CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt FACTor Function Sets or queries the scaling factor th
130. 5 143 TRIGger BGTime Queries all B gt Time trigger settings 5 143 TRIGger BGTime TIME Sets or queries the pulse width for B gt Time triggers 5 143 TRIGger BLTime Queries all B lt Time trigger settings 5 143 TRIGger BLTime TIME Sets or queries the pulse width for B lt Time triggers 5 143 TRIGger BTOut Queries all B TimeOut trigger settings 5 143 TRIGger BTOut TIME Sets or queries the pulse width for B TimeOut triggers 5 143 TRIGger BTRigger Queries all condition B settings 5 143 TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel of 5 144 BIT lt x gt condition B TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic 5 144 CONDition channel of condition B TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of 5 144 SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt the specified logic channel of condition B TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic 5 144 SCHannel lt x gt CONDition channel of condition B TRIGger BTRigger CONDition Sets or queries the achievement condition of condition B 5 144 TRIGger DELay Sets or queries the delay 5 144 TRIGger EOA Queries all EdgeOnA settings 5 144 TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specifie
131. 5 85 FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal Sets or queries the center value of the horizontal axis for FFT analysis 5 86 CSPan CENTer FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal Sets or queries the span value of the horizontal axis for FFT analysis 5 86 CSPan SPAN gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal Queries all the settings for the left and right ends of the horizontal axis for 5 86 LRIGht FFT analysis FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal Sets or queries the range for the left and right ends of the horizontal axis for 5 86 LRIGht RANGe FFT analysis FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal Sets or queries the FFT analysis horizontal axis mode 5 86 MODE FFT WAVeform lt x gt MODE Sets or queries whether an FFT window is displayed 5 86 FFT WAVeform lt x gt SOURce lt x gt Sets or queries an FFT window s FFT source channel 5 87 FFT WAVeform lt x gt STYPe Sub Sets or queries an FFT window s analysis sub type 5 87 Type gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt TYPE Sets or queries an FFT window s analysis type 5 87 gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt UNIT Sets or queries a unit string that is attached to FFT computation results 5 87 FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale Queries all FFT vertical scale settings 5 87 FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale CENTer Sets or queries the center value of an FFT window s vertical scale 5 87 FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale MODE Sets or queries an FFT windo
132. 5 ms Approx 30 s between Remote and Local Modes Switching from Local to Remote Mode The DL850E DL850EV switches to remote mode when it is in local mode and it receives a COMMunicate REMote ON command from the PC e REMOTE appears at the top center of the screen once the DL850E DL850EV is in remote mode All keys except the SHIFT CLEAR TRACE keys are disabled e The local mode settings are retained even when the DL850E DL850EV switches to remote mode Switching from Remote to Local Mode When the DL850E DL850EV is in Remote mode and you press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE the DL850E DL850EV switches to local mode However this does not work if the DL850E DL850EV has received a COMMunicate LOCKout ON command from the PC The DL850E DL850EV switches to local mode when it receives a COMMunicate REMote OFF command from the PC regardless of the local lockout state e The REMOTE indicator at the top center of the screen disappears once the DL850E DL850EV is in local mode e All keys are enabled The settings in remote mode are retained even when the DL850E DL850EV switches to local mode Note You cannot use the Ethernet interface at the same time as other interfaces GP IB and USB interfaces IM DL850E 17EN 1 2 Ethernet Interface Features and Specifications User Verification Function To connect the DL850E DL850EV to a network as an FTP server you have to enter a user name and password in the Ethernet com
133. 50EV is turned off and then back on You can determine whether the error queue is empty by checking bit 2 in the status byte EAV IM DL850E 17EN Appendix Appendix 1 ASCIl Character Codes The following table contains ASCII character codes 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 0 0 20 40 0 60 16 100 0 120 16 140 0 160 16 NUL DEL SP P p 0 0 10 16 20 32 30 48 40 64 50 80 60 96 70 112 1 GTL 21 LLO 41 1 61 17 101 1 121 17 141 1 161 17 SOH DC1 A Q a q 1 11 17 21 33 31 49 41 65 51 81 61 97171 113 2 22 42 2 62 18 102 2 122 18 142 2 162 18 STX DC2 B R b r 2 12 18 22 34 32 50 42 66 52 82 62 98 72 114 3 23 43 3 63 19 103 3 123 19 143 3 163 19 ETX DC3 C S c S 3 13 19 23 35 33 51 43 67 53 83 63 99 73 115 4 4 SDC 24 DCL 44 4 64 20 104 4 124 20 144 4 164 20 EOT DC4 D T d t 4 4 14 20 24 36 34 52 44 68 54 84 64 100 74 116 5 5 PPC 25 PPU 45 5 65 21 105 5 125 21 145 5 165 21 ENQ NAK E U e u 5 5 15 21 25 37 35 53 45 69 55 85 65 101 75 117 6 6 26 46 6 66 22 106 6 126 22 146 6 166 22 ACK SYN amp Fiv fv 6 6 16 22 26 38 36 54 46 70 56 86 66 102 76 118 7 27 47 7 67 23 107 7 127 23 147 7 167 23 BEL ETB G WwW g wW 7 17 23 27 39 37 55 47 71 57 87 67 103 77 119 8 0 GET 30 SPE 50 8 70 24 110 8 130 24 150 8 170 24 BS CAN H X h x 8 18 24 28 40 38 56 48 72 58 88 68 104 7
134. 7EN 5 41 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt ZOOM Function Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of CAN logic waveforms Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt ZOOM lt NR gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt ZOOM For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 lt NRf gt 0 1 0 111 0 125 0 143 0 167 0 2 0 25 0 33 0 4 0 5 0 556 0 625 0 667 0 714 0 8 0 833 1 1 11 1 25 1 33 1 43 1 67 2 2 22 2 5 3 33 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 ZOOM 1 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 ZOOM gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 Z00M 1 Example Description This command is valid when the data type is logic CHANnel lt x gt DISPlay Function Sets or queries whether the channel is displayed Syntax CHANnel lt x gt DISPlay lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt DISPlay lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL1 DISPLAY 1 CHANNEL1 DISPLAY gt CHANNEL1 DISPLAY 1 Description Error 241 Hardware missing will occur if there is no module installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel Example CHANnel lt x gt FREQ Function Queries all the settings of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut Function Queries all the input settings of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANne1l lt x gt FREQ INPut lt x gt 1 to 16
135. 8 120 9 1 TCT 31 SPD 51 9 71 25 111 9 131 25 151 91171 25 HT EM IY ily 9 19 25 29 41 39 57 49 73 59 89 69 105 79 121 A 2 32 52 10 72 26 112 10 132 26 152 10 172 26 LF SUB J z j fz A 10 1A 26 2A 42 3A 58 4A 74 5A 90 6A 106 7A 122 B 3 33 53 11173 27 113 11 133 27 153 11 173 27 VT ESC K iki B 11 1B 27 2B 43 3B 59 4B 75 5B 91 6B 107 7B 123 G 4 34 54 12 74 28 114 12 134 28 154 12 174 28 FF FS LIAJ I Cc 12 1C 28 2C 44 3C 60 4C 76 5C 92 6C 108 7C 124 D 5 35 55 13 75 29 115 13 135 29 155 13 175 29 CR GS M m l D 13 1D 29 2D 45 3D 61 4D 77 5D 93 6D 109 7D 125 E 6 36 56 14 76 30 116 14 136 30 156 14 176 30 SO RS N in E 14 1E 30 2E 46 3E 62 4E 78 5E 94 6E 110 7E 126 F 7 37 57 15 77 UNL 117 15 137 UNT 157 15 ee SI US O a O _ ruBouT F 15 1F 31 2F 47 3F 63 4F 79 SF 95 6F 111 7F 127 Address Universal Listener Talker Secondary command command address address command Exam ple Octal GP IB code Hexadecimal ASCII character code Decimal IM DL850E 17EN App 1 xipueddy a Appendix 2 Error Messages This section explains communication error messages e Messages can be displayed in English or Japanese on the DL850E DL850EV However when they are read from a PC or other similar device messages are displayed in English e If servicing is necessary to solve the problem indicated by a message contact your nearest YOKOGAWVA dealer e
136. A command group is a group of commands that have common compound headers arranged in a hierarchy Acommand group may contain sub groups Example Group of commands related to acquisition ACQuire AVERage COUNt ACQuire MODE ACQuire AVERage EWEight ACQuire CLOCK ACQuire RLENgth ACQuire COUNt Q When Concatenating Commands of the Same Group The DL850E DL850EV stores the hierarchical level of the command that is currently being executed and processes the next command on the assumption that it belongs to the same level Therefore the common header section can be omitted for commands that belong to the same group Example ACQuire MODE NORMal COUNt 1 lt PMT gt MAIAJZAQ Bulwwesboig gt When Concatenating Commands of Different Groups If the subsequent command does not belong to the same group place a colon in front of the header cannot be omitted Example ACQuire MODE NORMal DISPlay FORMat SINGle lt PMT gt When Concatenating Simple Headers If a simple header follows another command place a colon in front of the simple header cannot be omitted Example ACQuire MODE NORMal1 STARt lt PMT gt When Concatenating Common Commands Common commands that are defined in IEEE 488 2 1992 are independent of hierarchy There is no need to use a colon Example ACQuire MODE NORMal CLS COUNt 1 lt PMT gt When Separating Commands with lt PMT gt If you separate tw
137. AL PERCENT 20 50 80 MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL PERCENT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL PERCENT 20 0 50 0 80 0 MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal UNIT Function Sets or queries the distal mesial and proximal points as units Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal UNIT lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Current gt lt Current gt lt Current gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal UNIT lt Voltage gt lt Current gt and lt NRf gt The selectable range varies depending on settings such as the range and offset For details see the DL850E DL850EV User s Manual CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 The order is lt Proximal gt lt Mesial gt lt Distal gt Selectable range of the MEAS CHAN lt x gt DPR UNIT command e For lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt the selectable range is the measurement range and the resolution is the same as the resolution of the zoom method DIV SPAN that has been set by the V Scale of the vertical axis For Math channels 5 div Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL UNIT 10 0 10 MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL UNIT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL UNIT 10 0000E 00 0 00000E 00 10 0000E 00 Description You cann
138. ALE UNIT UU CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt OFFSet Function Syntax Description Sets or queries the offset voltage of an installed 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt OFFSet lt Voltage gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt OFFSet lt x1 gt 1 to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid lt x2 gt 1 to 16 lt Voltage gt The selectable range varies depending on the range setting Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH voltage input module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt POSition Function Syntax Description Sets or queries the vertical position for an installed 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt POSition lt NRf gt gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt POSition lt x1 gt 1 to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid lt x2 gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 5 00 to 5 00 div in 0 01 div steps Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH voltage input module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel IM DL850E 17EN 5 63 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe Function Syntax Description Sets or queries the
139. ALue Function Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale AVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale AVALue lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE LSCALE AVALUE gt CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 Description The coefficient cannot be set to 0 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale BVALue Function Sets or queries the offset value B that is used during linear scaling for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale BVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale BVALue lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 0 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE LSCALE BVALUE gt CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANnel1 lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype Function Queries all the linear scaling display mode settings of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype 5 58 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum Function Sets or queries
140. ANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel of condition B Syntax TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition CHAN lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel Example TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL2 CONDITION HIGH TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL2 CONDITION gt TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL2 CONDITION HIGH Description Use this command on channels that have sub channels TRIGger BTRigger CONDition Function Sets or queries the achievement condition of condition B Syntax TRIGger BTRigger CONDition ENTer EXIT TRIGger BTRigger CONDition Example TRIGGER BTRIGGER CONDITION ENTER TRIGGER BTRIGGER CONDITION gt TRIGGER BTRIGGER CONDITION ENTER Description This command is valid when the trigger type is ABN or ADB TRIGger DELay Function Sets or queries the delay Syntax TRIGger DELay lt Time gt TRIGger DELay lt Time gt 0 to 10s the resolution varies depending on the sample rate 1 sample rate x 1 10 The minimum resolution is 10 ns If the sample rate is higher than 10 MS s the resolution will be 10 ns TRIGGER DELAY 0 001 TRIGGER DELAY gt TRIGGER DELAY 1 0000000
141. ANnel lt x gt TEMPerature RJC Function Syntax Example Sets or queries whether an installed module that can measure temperature uses RJC when it performs temperature measurements CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature RJC lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature RJC lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE RJC 1 CHANNEL TEMPERATURE RJC gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE RJC 1 CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature SCALe Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen that are used when temperature measurements are performed CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature SCALe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature SCALe lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 5432 to 5432 in 0 1 steps CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCALE 1300 0 200 0 CHANNELS TEMPERATURE SCALE gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCALE 1300 0 200 0 CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt BURNout Function Syntax Example Description Sets or queries whether burnout will be detected when the 16 CH temperature voltage input module performs temperature measurements CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt BURNout lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt BURNout lt x gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 BURNOUT ON CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 BURNOUT
142. ATH1 FILTER1 BAND gt MATH1 FILTER1 BAND LPASS Description You can only specify the GAUSs parameter when the band is set to LPASs This command is valid on models with the G2 option Example MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt CUTof lt x gt Function Sets or queries a cutoff frequency of a digital filter Syntax MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt CUToff lt x gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt CUToff lt x gt MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify FiLTer lt x gt 1 2 CUToff lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 2 to 30 in 0 2 steps MATH1 FILTER1 CUTOFF1 10 0 MATH1 FILTER1 CUTOFF1 gt MATH1 FILTER1 CUTOFF1 10 0 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option Example IM DL850E 17EN 5 107 puewwoy 5 20 MATH Group gt MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt TYPE Function Sets or queries the type of a digital filter Syntax MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt TYPE GAUSs IIR SHARp MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt TYPE MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify FiLTer lt x gt 1 2 MATH1 FILTER1 TYPE GAUSS MATH1 FILTER1 TYPE gt MATH1 FILTER1 TYPE GAUSS Example Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt LABel Function Sets or queries a computed waveform label Syntax MATH lt x gt LABel lt String gt MATH lt x gt
143. AVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD MINIMUM gt WAVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD 1 Example WAVeform CAPTure SEND Function Queries specified capture waveform data Syntax WAVeform CAPTure SEND lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 5000 Example WAVeform CAPTure SEND Description lt NRf gt can be omitted If you specify lt NRf gt waveform data is queried lt NRf gt times in order starting from the record located at the record number specified by WAVeform CAPTure RECord lt NRf gt An error will occur if the waveform that WAVeform commands will be applied to is set as an event WAVeform CAPTure SRATe Function Queries the sample rate of the capture waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command Syntax WAVeform CAPTure SRATe WAVEFORM CAPTURE SRATE 1000 WAVEFORM CAPTURE SRATE gt WAVEFORM CAPTURE SRATE 1 0000000E 03 Description This command returns the sample rate of measured data Example An error will occur if the waveform that WAVeform commands will be applied to is set as an event WAVeform CAPTure STARt Function Sets or queries the start point to use when capturing waveform data Syntax WAVeform CAPTure STARt lt NRf gt WAVeform CAPTure STARt lt NRf gt 0 to the number of acquired points in the captured waveform 1 WAVEFORM CAPTURE START 0 WAVEFORM CAPTURE START gt WAVEFORM CAPTURE START 0 Example 5 152 IM DL850E 17EN 5 35 WAVeform G
144. AVEFORM OFFSET 0 0000000E 00 Description When you are using linear scaling this command returns a value that includes the scaling data If the source waveform is logic data this command returns 0 WAVeform RANGe Function Queries the measurement range used to convert the waveform data specified by the WAVeform TRACe command to physical values Syntax WAVeform RANGe Example WAVEFORM RANGE gt WAVEFORM RANGE 50 000000E 00 Description When you are using linear scaling this command returns a value that includes the scaling data If the source waveform is logic data this command returns 1 WAVeform RECord Function Sets or queries the main waveform record number that WAVeform commands will be applied to Syntax WAVeform RECord MINimum lt NRf gt WAVeform RECord lt NRf gt 0 to 4999 Example WAVEFORM RECORD 4 WAVEFORM RECORD gt WAVEFORM RECORD 4 Description Specify MINimum to specify the minimum record number The minimum record number is the record number of the oldest data WAVeform RECord MINimum Function Queries the minimum record number in the history memory for the main waveform Syntax WAVeform RECord MINimum Example WAVEFORM RECORD gt WAVEFORM RECORD 8 5 154 IM DL850E 17EN 5 35 WAVeform Group WAVeform SEND Function Queries the waveform data specified by the WaAVeform TRACe command the main waveform data Syntax WAVeform SEND lt NRf gt
145. All Clear Function Clears all the trace assignments of the specified display group Syntax DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt ACLear lt x1 gt 1to4 Example DISPLAY GROUP1 ACLEAR DISPlay GROUp lt x1 gt FORMat Function Sets or queries the display format the number of divisions in the vertical direction of the specified display group Syntax DISPlay GROUp lt x1 gt FORMat G1 lt NRf gt DISPlay GROUp lt x1 gt FORMat lt x1 gt 1 to 4 lt NRf gt 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 Example DISPLAY GROUP1 FORMAT 4 DISPLAY GROUP1 FORMAT gt DISPLAY GROUP1 FORMAT 4 Description When G1 is specified lt x1 gt cannot be set to 1 DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Function Queries all source waveform settings for a display group Syntax DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt SOURce Function Sets or queries the source that is assigned to the specified source waveform of the specified display group Syntax DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt SOURce OFF MATH lt x gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt SOURce lt x1 gt 1 to 4 lt x2 gt 1 to 64 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 sub channel s lt NRf gt 1 to 60 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 Example DISPLAY GROUP1 TRACE1 SOURCE 1 DISPLAY GROUP1 TRACE1 SOURCE gt DISPLAY GROUP1 TRACE1 SOURCE 1 DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Z
146. BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE TRACE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE TRACE 1 Description e The default value is 1 e This command is valid only on logic module channels e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later 5 112 IM DL850E 17EN 5 21 MEASure Group MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay STATe Function Syntax Example Description Sets or queries the display format of the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay STATe TIME OFF DEGRee MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay STATe lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY STATE TIME MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY STATE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY STATE TIME The default value is OFF This command is valid only on logic module channels This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay VALue Function Syntax Example Description Queries the delay measurement result of the specified bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay VALue lt NRf gt lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to the number of history entries Can be omitted MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY VALUE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY VALUE 0 000000E 00
147. BRIGHTNESS 3 SYSTem LCD MODE Function Sets or queries whether the backlight is on Syntax SYSTem LCD MODE lt Boolean gt SYSTem LCD MODE Example SYSTEM LCD MODE ON SYSTEM LCD MODE gt SYSTEM LCD MODE 1 SYSTem LOGic Function Queries all logic display settings Syntax SYSTem LOGic SYSTem LOGic BORDer Bit Order Function Sets or queries the bit order that is used when puewwoy you display logic module data as waveforms Syntax SYSTem LOGic BORDer LSBFirst MSBFirst SYSTem LOGic BORDer Example SYSTEM LOGIC BORDER LSBFIRST SYSTEM LOGIC BORDER gt SYSTEM LOGIC BORDER LSBFIRST Description This setting is applied to all channels that have modules installed in them SYSTem LOGic CORDer Cursor Order Function Sets or queries the bit order that is used when you use cursors to display logic module data as bits Syntax SYSTem LOGic CORDer LSBFirst MSBFirst SY STem LOGic CORDer Example SYSTEM LOGIC CORDER LSBFIRST SYSTEM LOGIC CORDER gt SYSTEM LOGIC CORDER LSBFIRST Description This setting is applied to all channels that have modules installed in them IM DL850E 17EN 5 137 5 32 SYSTem Group SYSTem LOGic NFORmat Numerical Format Function Sets or queries the numeric display format of logic module data Syntax SYSTem LOGic NFORmat BIT HEXadecimal SYSTem LOGic NFORmat Example SYSTEM LOGIC NFORMAT BIT SYSTEM LOGIC NFORMAT gt SYS
148. BWIDth Sets or queries the bandwidth limit that is used when temperature 5 55 measurements are performed CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed module that can 5 55 COUPling measure temperature CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature DUPeriod Sets or queries the data update period of the 16 CH temperature voltage 5 55 Data update period input module CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature RJC Sets or queries whether an installed module that can measure temperature 5 55 uses RJC when it performs temperature measurements CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature SCALe Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen that are used when 5 55 temperature measurements are performed CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature Sets or queries whether burnout will be detected when the 16 CH 5 55 SCHannel lt x2 gt BURNout temperature voltage input module performs temperature measurements CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature Sets or queries the input coupling setting of the 16 CH temperature voltage 5 55 SCHannel lt x2 gt COUPling input module CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature Sets or queries the label of the 16 CH temperature voltage input module 5 56 SCHannel lt x2 gt LABel CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature Sets or queries whether the 16 CH temperature voltage input module uses 5 56 SCHannel lt x2 gt RJC RJC when it performs temperature measurements CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature Sets or queries the upper and lower limits
149. CAL Executes calibration and queries the result 5 161 CLS Clears the standard event register extended event register and error queue 5 161 ESE Sets or queries the standard event enable register 5 161 ESR Queries and clears the standard event register 5 161 IDN Queries the DL850E DL850EV model 5 161 OPC Sets bit 0 the OPC bit of the standard event register to 1 upon the 5 161 completion of the specified overlap command OPC Returns ASCII code 1 when the specified overlap command is completed 5 161 OPT Queries the installed options 5 162 RST Initializes settings 5 162 SRE Sets or queries the service request enable register value 5 162 STB Queries the status byte register value 5 162 TST Performs a self test and queries the result The self test consists of tests of 5 162 each kind of internal memory WAI Holds the execution of the subsequent command until the specified overlap 5 162 command is completed IM DL850E 17EN 5 27 spuewwoy 5 2 ACQuire Group The commands in this group deal with waveform acquisition You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the ACQUIRE key on the front panel ACQuire Function Queries all waveform acquisition settings Syntax ACQuire ACQuire AVERage Function Queries all averaging settings Syntax ACQuire AVERage ACQuire AVERage COUNt Function Sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions to perform during averaging
150. CAPTURE BITDISP ON CAPTURE BITDISP gt CAPTURE BITDISP 1 Example CAPTure CAPNum MAXimum Function Queries the largest number of the captured waveforms Syntax CAPTure CAPNum MAXimum Description This command is valid when waveforms are acquired with the capture mode set to On Start CAPTure CAPNum MINimum Function Queries the smallest number of the captured waveforms Syntax CAPTure CAPNum MINimum Description This command is valid when waveforms are acquired with the capture mode set to Auto CAPTure FORMat Function Sets or queries the display format of the capture window Syntax CAPTure FORMat MAIN lt NRf gt CAPTure FORMat lt NRf gt 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 Example CAPTURE FORMAT MAIN CAPTURE FORMAT gt CAPTURE FORMAT MAIN CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt Function Queries all group display settings of the capture o window S Syntax CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt 3 3 2 CAPTure GROUp lt x1 gt FORMat Function Sets or queries the capture window display format of the specified display group Syntax CAPTure GROUp lt x1 gt FORMat MAIN lt NRf gt CAPTure GROUp lt x1 gt FORMat lt x1 gt 1 to 4 lt NRf gt 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 Example CAPTURE GROUP1 FORMAT MAIN CAPTURE GROUP1 FORMAT gt CAPTURE GROUP1 FORMAT MAIN CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Function Sets or queries the displayed waveform in the specified group displ
151. CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt UNIT Function Syntax Example Description Sets or queries the unit of data of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt UNIT For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 lt String gt Up to 8 characters CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 UNIT AAAA CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 UNIT gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 UNIT AAAA This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe command is set to UNSigned SIGNed or FLOat CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe Value Type Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the data type of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe UNSigned SIGNed LOGic UNSigned FLOat SIGNed LOGic on firmware versions 1 2 and later CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNELL VTYPE SIGNED CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 VTYPE gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 VTYPE SIGNED IM DL850E 1
152. COMMunicate Function Queries all communication settings Syntax COMMunicate COMMunicate HEADer Function Sets or queries whether headers are attached to query responses Syntax COMMunicate HEADer lt Boolean gt COMMunicate HEADer COMMUNICATE HEADER ON COMMUNICATE HEADER gt COMMUNICATE HEADER 1 Example COMMunicate LOCKout Function Sets or clears local lockout Syntax COMMunicate LOCKout lt Boolean gt COMMunicate LOCKout COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT ON COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT gt COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT 1 Description This command is designed for use in USB and Ethernet communications Example COMMunicate OPSE Function Sets or queries the overlap command that is used by the OPC OPC and WAI commands Syntax COMMunicate OPSE lt Register gt COMMunicate OPSE lt Register gt 0 to 65535 See the figure in the description of the COMM WAIT command COMMUNICATE OPSE 65535 COMMUNICATE OPSE gt COMMUNICATE OPSE 584 Description Bits fixed to 0 are not set to 1 so the response to the query only indicates 1 for bits 3 5 and 6 Example COMMunicate OPSR Function Queries the operation pending status register Syntax COMMunicate OPSR Example COMMunicate OPSR gt 0 COMMunicate OVERlap Function Sets or queries the commands that operate as overlap commands Syntax COMMunicate OVERlap lt Register gt COMMunicate OVERlap lt Register gt
153. CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the 5 70 FFT cursor marker cursor CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y Queries all Y axis settings of an FFT cursor marker cursor 5 70 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe Sets or queries whether the Y axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor is 5 70 displayed CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y Queries the Y axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor 5 70 VALue CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Queries all settings of an FFT cursor peak cursor 5 70 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F Queries all frequency axis settings of an FFT cursor peak cursor 5 70 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F STATe Sets or queries whether the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor peak 5 70 9 cursor is displayed 3 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F VALue Queries the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor peak cursor 5 71 3 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt RANGe Sets or queries the FFT peak cursor measurement range 5 71 a CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y Queries all Y axis settings of an FFT cursor peak cursor 5 71 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y STATe Sets or queries whether the Y axis value of an FFT cursor peak cursor is 5 71 displayed CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y VALue Queries the Y axis value of an FFT cursor peak cursor 5 71 CURSor FFT TYPE Sets or queries the FFT cursor type 5 71 CURSor TY Queries all cursor settings for the T Y display 5 71 CURS
154. Calibration This bit is 1 when calibration is in progress Bit 4 TST Testing This bit is 1 when a self test is in progress Bit 5 PRN Printing This bit is 1 when the internal printer is operating or when data is being transmitted to a network printer Bit 6 ACS Accessing This bit is 1 when a drive is being accessed Bit 7 MES Measuring This bit is 1 when automated measurement of waveform parameters is in progress Bit 8 HST History Search This bit is 1 when a history search is in progress Bit 10 NGO Go No Go This bit is 1 when a GO NO GO search is in progress Bit 11 SCH Search This bit is 1 when a search is in progress Bit 12 RUN Running This bit is 1 when a measurement is in progress Bit 14 AN Analysis This bit is 1 when an analysis is in progress The transition filter parameters detect changes in the specified condition register bits numeric suffixes 1 to 16 and overwrite the extended event register in the following ways RISE The specified extended event register bit is set to 1 when the corresponding condition register bit changes from 0 to 1 FALL The specified extended event register bit is set to 1 when the corresponding condition register bit changes from 1 to 0 BOTH The specified extended event register bit is set to 1 when the corresponding condition register bit changes from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 NEVer Always zero IM DL850E 17EN 6 5 sjioday snje s l Output and Error Qu
155. Cute Saves the screen capture data 5 102 MAGe FORMat Sets or queries the screen capture output format 5 102 MAGe SAVE Queries all file output settings 5 102 MAGe SAVE ANAMing Sets or queries the setting of the auto naming feature for saving files 5 102 MAGe SAVE CDIRectory Changes the output destination directory 5 102 MAGe SAVE DRIVe Sets the output destination medium 5 102 MAGe SAVE FRAMe Sets or queries whether a white frame is attached to the saved screen 5 102 capture s image MAGe SAVE NAME Sets or queries the name of the file that will be saved 5 102 MAGe SAVE PATH Queries the current directory 5 102 MAGe SEND Queries the screen capture data 5 102 MAGe TONE Sets or queries the color tone of the screen capture data that will be saved 5 102 INITialize Group INITialize EXECute Initializes the settings This is an overlap command 5 103 INITialize UNDO Undoes the setting initialization 5 103 5 16 IM DL850E 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page LSTart Group LSTart Log STart Starts waveform acquisition immediately 5 104 LSTart Starts waveform acquisition immediately and waits for acquisition to 5 104 complete MATH Group MATH lt x gt Queries all computation settings 5 105 MATH lt x gt AVERage Quer
156. DELay Description This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay COUNt Function Queries the statistics count of the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay COUNt lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY COUNT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY COUNT 10 Description This command is valid only on logic module channels e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation Function Queries the statistical value of the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY MEAN gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY MEAN 6 6666667E 06 Description This command is valid only on logic module channels A Example e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later 5 110 IM DL850E 17EN 5 21 MEASure Group MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay MEASure Function Queries all settings related to the source waveform used to measure the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel on a logic module Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1
157. DL850E DL850EV ScopeCorder Communication Interface TSER S MANUAL YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Meters amp Instruments Corporation IM DL850E 17EN 1st Edition Notes Thank you for purchasing the DL850E ScopeCorder or DL850EV ScopeCorder Vehicle Edition hereinafter DL850E DL850EV will refer to both of these products This Communication Interface User s Manual explains the following interface features and commands e Ethernet interface e USB interface e GP IB interface optional To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before operation Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises This manual is one of six DL850E DL850EV manuals Please read all manuals Manual Title Manual No Description DL850E DL850EV IM DL850E 01EN The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this manual This ScopeCorder manual explains all the DL850E DL850EV features other Features Guide than the communication interface features DL850E DL850EV IM DL850E 02EN The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this manual The ScopeCorder manual explains how to operate the DL850E DL850EV User s Manual DL850E DL850EV IM DL850E 03EN The manual explains the handling precautions and basic ScopeCorder operations of the DL850E DL850EV and provides an Getting Started Guide overview of its features DL850E DL850EV IM DL850E 17EN This manual The supplied CD contains the PDF file of ScopeCorde
158. E 00 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Function Queries all marker cursor settings for the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt POSition Function Sets or queries a marker cursor s time axis equivalent position on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt POSition lt NRf gt CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt POSition lt x gt 1 to 4 lt NRf gt 5 to 5div the resolution depends on the measurement length Example CURSOR XY MARKER M1 POSITION 3 CURSOR XY MARKER M1 POSITION gt CURSOR XY MARKER M1 POSITION 3 000000000000 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T Function Queries all time value settings for a marker cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T STATe Function Sets or queries whether the time value for a marker cursor on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T STATe lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR XY MARKER M1 T STATE ON CURSOR XY MARKER M1 T STATE gt CURSOR XY MARKER M1 T STATE 1 5 78 IM DL850E 17EN 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T VALue Function Queries the time value of a marker cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T VALue lt x gt 1to4 Example CURSOR XY MARKER M1 T VALUE
159. E 00 Description This command returns NAN if the value cannot be measured Parameters cannot be measured if the measurement has not been performed or if the measurement was performed but computations were not performed because the specified range exceeded 10 Mpoint The lt NRf gt at the end is used to specify which iteration of statistical processing to query the parameter value from This command returns NAN Not A Number if the specified value does not exist e For non cyclic statistical processing lt NRf gt can be omitted If you omit lt NRf gt the most recent history parameter value will be queried If you include lt NRf gt the history parameter value of the waveform lt NRf gt times before the newest history waveform will be queried After cyclic statistical processing has been completed lt NRf gt can be omitted If you omit lt NRf gt the parameter value within the cycle that was measured last will be queried If you include lt NRf gt the parameter value within the cycle that was measured lt NRf gt times after the measurement shown on the screen s left edge will be queried When you execute a normal measurement without cyclic statistical processing even if you include lt NRf gt in the command you cannot query the waveform parameters in the history memory Example MEASure CYCLe Function Queries all cycle statistics settings Syntax MEASure CYCLe MEASure CYCLe ABORt Func
160. E 03 Description When the DL850E DL850EV is using an external clock the delay is fixed to 0 Example TRIGger EOA Function Queries all EdgeOnA settings Syntax TRIGger EOA 5 144 IM DL850E 17EN 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel for EdgeOnA triggers Syntax TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt OFF FALL RISE TRIGger BOA CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt CHAN lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 BIT lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 Example TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL9 BIT1 RISE TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL9 BIT1 gt TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL9 BIT1 RISE TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic channel for EdgeOnA triggers Syntax TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt CONDition OFF FALL RISE TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt CONDition CHAN lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL3 CONDITION FALL TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL3 CONDITION gt TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL3 CONDITION FALL Description Use this command on channels that do not have sub channels TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel for EdgeOnA triggers Syntax TRIGger EOA C
161. E SOURCE 7 SEARch MAG lt x gt Function Sets or queries a zoom waveform magnification Syntax SEARch MAG lt x gt lt NRf gt SEARCh MAG lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 2 to 200000000 Example SEARCH MAG1 1000 SEARCH MAG1 gt SEARCH MAG1 1000 0 Description This command is valid when the DL850E DL850EV is using an external clock When the DL850E DL850EV is using the internal clock use the SEARch TDIV lt x gt command to set the magnification SEARch POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries the position of a zoom box Syntax SEARch POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt SEARch POSition lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 5 to 5 div Example SEARCH POSITION1 0 7219 SEARCH POSITION1 gt SEARCH POSITION1 0 721900000000 5 126 IM DL850E 17EN 5 25 SEARch Group SEARch SELect Function Sets the search point that is displayed on the zoom window and queries the zoom position of that search point Syntax SEARch SELect lt NRf gt MAXimum SEARCh SELect lt NRf gt 1 to 5000 Example SEARCH SELECT 4 SEARCH SELECT gt SEARCH SELECT 0 721900000000 Description The string NAN is returned if the search could not retrieve a position SEARch SELect MAXimum Function Queries the maximum save number which is the number that is attached to the last position that the search retrieved Syntax SEARch SELect MAXimum Example SEARCH SELECT
162. E measurement modules 5 6 IM DL850E 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage INVert Sets or queries whether the display is inverted ON or not OFF for an 5 58 installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed module that can perform 5 58 analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for 5 58 AVALue an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the offset value B that is used during linear scaling for an 5 58 BVALue installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Queries all the linear scaling display mode settings of an installed module 5 58 DISPlaytype that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the decimal place that is used during linear scaling when the 5 59 DISPlaytype DECimalnum display mode is set to Float for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the display mode that is used during linear scaling for an 5 59 DISPlaytype MODE installed module that can perform analog voltage meas
163. ELay REFerence COUNt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 9 Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE COUNT MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE COUNT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE COUNT 1 IM DL850E 17EN 5 115 puewwoy 5 21 MEASure Group MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence LOGic BIT Function Sets or queries the bit of the reference waveform trace used to measure the delay between channels for a waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence LOGic BIT lt NRf gt MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence LOGic BIT lt x gt 1 to 16 lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel lt x gt 1 to 8 Math lt NRf gt 1 to 8 MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE LOGIC BIT 1 MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE LOGIC BIT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE LOGIC BIT 1 Description e The default value is 1 e When the trace specified by the MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence TRACe command is a logic module specify the bit of that channel e This can be used on models with firmware Example version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence SLOPe Function Sets or queries the edge detection slope of the reference
164. EQ SETUP FUNCTION FREQUENCY CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup LRESet Function Sets or queries whether over limit reset is turned on for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup LRESet lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup LRESet Example CHANNELS FREQ SETUP LRESET ON CHANNELS FREQ SETUP LRESET gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP LRESET 1 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup MPULse Function Sets or queries whether the measurement pulse is positive or negative for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup MPULse POSitive NEGative CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup MPULse Example CHANNELS FREQ SETUP MPULSE POSITIVE CHANNELS FREQ SETUP MPULSE gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP MPULSE POSITIVE CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup PROTate Function Sets or queries the number of pulses per rotation of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup PROTate lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup PROTate lt NRf gt 1 to 99999 Example CHANNEL5S FREQ SETUP PROTATE 100 CHANNELS FREQ SETUP PROTATE gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP PROTATE 100 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup RESet Function Resets the pulse count of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup RESet Example CHANNEL5S FREQ SETUP RESET CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup STOPpredict Function Sets or queries whether stop prediction i
165. EXTENSION CSV FILE SAVE ASCII EXTENSION gt FILE SAVE ASCII EXTENSION CSV 5 90 IM DL850E 17EN 5 13 FILE Group FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat HISTory Function Sets or queries what waveforms the history memory feature will save for a specific type of data Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat HISTORY ONE ALL FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat HISTORY Example FILE SAVE BINARY HISTORY ALL FILE SAVE BINARY HISTORY gt FILE SAVE BINARY HISTORY ALL FILE SAVE ASCii INTerval Function Sets or queries the data removal interval that is used when saving data in ASCII format Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii INTerval lt NRf gt gt FILE SAVE ASCii INTerval lt NRf gt 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 Example FILE SAVE ASCII INTERVAL 5 LE SAVE ASCII INTERVAL gt FILE SAVE ASCII INTERVAL 5 FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat RANGe Function Sets or queries the save range for a specific type of data Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat RANGe MAIN Z1 Z2 CURSor FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat RANGe Example FILE SAVE BINARY RANGE CURSOR FILE SAVE BINARY RANGE gt FILE SAVE BINARY RANGE CURSOR FILE SAVE ASCii SCHannel Function Sets or queries the writing method of sub channel data when saving data in ASCII format Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii SCHannel SUPPlement SPACe FILE SAVE ASCii SCH
166. FILE Group FILE DIRectory MDIRectory Make Directory Function Creates a directory in the current directory Syntax FILE DIRectory MDIRectory lt String gt Example FILE DIRECTORY MDIRECTORY NO_1 Description lt String gt specifies a relative path gt FILE DIRectory PATH Function Queries the current directory Syntax FILE DIRectory PATH Example FILE DIRECTORY PATH gt FILR PATH Path HD 1 20090506 FILE LOAD BINary ABORt Function Aborts the loading of binary data Syntax FILE LOAD BINary ABORt Example FILE LOAD BINARY ABORt FILE LOAD BINary SETup SNAP EXECute Function Executes the loading of various types of data This is an overlap command Syntax FILE LOAD BINary SETup SNAP EXECute lt Filename gt Example FILE LOAD SETUP CASE1 Description Do not include the extension when you specify lt Filename gt FILE SAVE Function Queries all file name settings for saving files Syntax FILE SAVE FILE SAVE ANAMing Function Sets or queries the auto naming mode for saving files Syntax FILE SAVE ANAMing DATE NUMBering OFF FILE SAVE ANAMing Example FILE SAVE ANAMING DATE FILE SAVE ANAMING gt FILE SAVE ANAMING DATE Description DATE Date and time NUMBering Numbering OFF The file name that you saved with the FILE SAVE NAME command FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Function Queries all the settings relate
167. FT POINT 1000 FFT POINT gt FFT POINT 1000 Description The setting is the same for Window 1 and Window 2 FFT STARt Function Sets or queries the analysis source start point of the FFT windows Syntax FFT STARt lt NRf gt FFT STARt lt NRf gt 5 to 5 Example FFT START 5 FFT START gt FFT START 5 000000000000 Description The setting is the same for Window 1 and Window 2 FFT WAVeform lt x gt Function Queries all FFT window settings lt x gt 1 2 Description lt x gt 2 is valid on models with the G2 option FFT WAVeform lt x gt HAXis Function Sets or queries an FFT window s horizontal axis display method Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt HAXis LINear LOG gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt HAXis Example FFT WAVEFORM1 HAXIS LOG FFT WAVEFORM1 HAXIS gt FFT WAVEFORM1 HAXIS LOG FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal Function Queries all horizontal axis settings for FFT analysis Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal lt x gt 1 2 1 when the G2 option is not installed FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal CSPan Function Queries all center and span settings for the horizontal axis for FFT analysis Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal CSPan lt x gt 1 2 1 when the G2 option is not installed IM DL850E 17EN 5 85 puewwoy 5 12 FFT Group FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal CSPan CENTer Function Sets or queries the center value of the hori
168. H temperature voltage input module uses RJC when it performs temperature measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt RJC lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt RJC lt x gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 RJC 1 CHANNELS TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 RJC gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 RJC Description This command is valid when the input coupling is set to TC Error 113 Undefined header will occur if the input coupling is set to a setting other than TC CHANne1 lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe Function Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the scale that is displayed on the screen when the 16 CH temperature voltage input module performs temperature measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe lt x gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 5432 to 5432 in 0 1 steps Example CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 SCALE 1300 0 200 0 CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 SCALE gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 SCALE 1300 0 200 0 Description This command is valid when the input coupling is set to TC Error 113 Undefined header will occur if the input coupling is set to a setting other than TC CHANnel lt x1
169. H voltage input module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum Function Sets or queries the decimal place that is used during linear scaling when the display mode is set to Float for an installed 16 CH voltage input module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum lt NRf gt AUTO CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum lt x1 gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 to 3 Example CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM AUTO CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM AUTO CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype MODE Function Sets or queries the display mode that is used during linear scaling for an installed 16 CH voltage input module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype MODE EXPonent FLOating CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype MODE lt x1 gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE EXPONENT CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE
170. HANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt OFF FALL RISE TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt CHAN lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 BIT lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 Example TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION gt TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel for EdgeOnA triggers Syntax TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel CONDition OFF FALL RISE TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel CONDition CHAN lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel Example TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION gt TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE Description Use this command on channels that have sub channels o 3 TRIGger EOA CONDition 3 Function Sets or queries the achievement condition for A EdgeOnA triggers Syntax TRIGger EOA CONDition FALSe TRUE TRIGger EOA CONDition Example TRIGGER EOA CONDITION TRUE TRIGGER EOA CONDITION gt TRIGGER EOA CONDITION TRUE TRIGger HOLDoff Function Queries all hold off settings Syntax TRIGger HOLDoff TRIGger HOLDoff TIME Function Sets or queries the hold off time
171. Hz 701250 55 500kHz 701251 400Hz 4kHz 40kHz 701260 67 100Hz 1kHz 10kHz When the input 40Hz 400Hz 4kHz Couplings set taa setting other than 701261 TC When the input coupling is set to TC When the input 40Hz 400HZz 4kHz coupling is set to a AUTO setting other than 701262 TC When the input coupling is set to TC 2Hz 8Hz 30Hz 2Hz 8Hz 30Hz 701265 2Hz 8Hz 30Hz 40Hz 400Hz 4kHz AUTO 10kHz 20kHz 40kHz 720210 80kHz 160kHz 320kHz 640kHz 1 28MHz 2MHz 701275 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage COUPling Function Sets or queries the input coupling of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage COUPling AC DC GND ACRMS DCRMS TC ACCL CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage COUPling lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE COUPLING DC CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE COUPLING gt CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE COUPLING DC Description For 701250 701251 701255 or 720210 AC DC GND For 701260 or 701267 AC DC GND ACRMS DCRMS For 701261 or 701262 AC DC GND TC For 701265 DC GND TC For 701275 AC DC GND ACCL Example IM DL850E 17EN 5 57 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage DOCancel EXECute Function Executes DC offset canceling on a voltage measurement module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage DOCancel EXECute lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE DOCANCEL EXECU
172. IT Sets or queries the bit number of the starting position of a sub channel on an 5 41 Start BIT installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the display range values upper and lower limits of a sub 5 41 SCALe channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the unit of data of a sub channel on an installed module that 5 41 UNIT can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the data type of a sub channel on an installed module that 5 41 VTYPe Value Type can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of CAN logic waveforms 5 42 ZOOM CHANnel lt x gt DISPlay Sets or queries whether the channel is displayed 5 42 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ Queries all the settings of an installed frequency module 5 42 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut Queries all the input settings of an installed frequency module 5 42 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut BWIDth Sets or queries the input signal bandwidth limit of an installed frequency 5 42 module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut Sets or queries the input signal chattering elimination of an installed 5 42 CELimination frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut COUPling Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed frequenc
173. Lefont SMAL1 LARGe SYSTem SCALefont SYSTEM SCALEFONT SMALL SYSTEM SCALEFONT gt SYSTEM SCALEFONT SMALL Description Even if you specify LARGe with this command depending on the display conditions the SMALI font may be displayed Example SYSTem SOITem Scale On ITEM Function Sets or queries which scales are displayed Syntax SYSTem SOITem ALL TSCale SYSTem SOITem Example SYSTEM SOITEM ALL SYSTEM SOITEM gt SYSTEM SOITEM ALL SYSTem STORage MEDia Function Sets or queries the medium that you want to format Syntax SYSTem STORage MEDia HD SD UUSB LUSB SYSTem STORage MEDia Example SYSTEM STORAGE MEDIA SD SYSTEM STORAGE MEDIA gt SYSTEM STORAGE MEDIA SD Description HD SD SD memory card UUSB LUSB USB storage medium Internal hard disk SYSTem STORage FORMat EXECute Function Formats the specified medium This is an overlap command Syntax SYSTem STORage FORMat EXECute Example SYSTEM STORAGE FORMAT EXECUTE SYSTem TSYNchro Time Synchronization Function Sets or queries the time synchronization Syntax SYSTem TSYNchro IRIG OFF SYSTem TSYNchro SYSTEM TSYNCHRO IRIG SYSTEM TSYNCHRO gt SYSTEM TSYNCHRO IRIG Description This command is valid on models with the C20 Example option SYSTem USBKeyboard Function Sets or queries the USB keyboard type Syntax SYSTem USBKeyboard ENGLish JAPANese SYSTem USBKeyboard Examp
174. M DL850E 17EN MAIAJZAQ Hulwwesboig gt 4 5 Synchronization with the Controller Overlap Commands and Sequential Commands There are two types of commands overlap and sequential The execution of one overlap command can start before the execution of the previous overlap command is completed If you specify V div and send the next program message to query the result the DL850E DL850EV always returns the most recent setting 5 V in this case CHANnel1l VDIV 5V VDIV lt PMT gt This is because the next command is forced to wait until the processing of CHANne11 VDIV is completed This type of command is called a sequential command Let us assume you send the next program message when you want to load a file and query the V div value of the result FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASE1 CHANnel1 VDIV In this case CHANne1l1 VDIV is executed before the loading of the file is completed and the V div value that is returned is the value before the file is loaded Overlapping refers to the act of executing the next command before the processing of the current command is completed such as in the command FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASE1L Acommand that operates in this way is called an overlap command You can prevent overlapping by using the following methods Synchronizing to Overlap Commands e Using a WAI Command A WAI command holds the subsequent commands until the over
175. M lt x gt POSition lt x gt 1 to 4 lt NRf gt 5 to 5 Example CURSOR TY MARKER M1 POSITION 3 CURSOR TY MARKER M1 POSITION gt CURSOR TY MARKER M1 POSITION 3 000000000000 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the marker cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt TRACe OFF lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt TRACe lt NRf gt 1 to 16 lt x gt 1to8 lt NRf gt 1 to 60 only when it is necessary to specify the sub channel Example CURSOR TY MARKER M1 TRACE 1 CURSOR TY MARKER M1 TRACE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M1 TRACE 1 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X Function Queries all X axis settings for a marker cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe Function Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a marker cursor on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR TY MARKER M4 X STATE ON CURSOR TY MARKER M4 X STATE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M4 X STATE 1 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X VALue Function Queries the X axis value of a marker cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe lt x
176. MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt Queries the count of measured values for cyclic statistical processing of a 5 118 x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt COUNt waveform parameter MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x Queries a cyclic statistical processing value of a waveform parameter 5 118 gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt MAXimu m MEAN MINimum SDEViation MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt Sets or queries whether the specified waveform s waveform parameter 5 118 x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt STATe measurement item is ON or OFF MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt Queries the measured value of a waveform parameter 5 119 x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt VALue MEASure CYCLe Queries all cycle statistics settings 5 119 MEASure CYCLe ABORt Aborts cyclic statistical processing 5 119 MEASure CYCLe EXECute Executes cyclic statistical processing 5 119 MEASure CYCLe LOGic BIT Sets or queries the cycle trace bit of cycle statistics 5 119 MEASure CYCLe TRACe Sets or queries the cycle trace of cycle statistics 5 119 MEASure HISTory ABORt Aborts the statistical processing of history waveforms 5 119 MEASure HISTory EXECute Executes the statistical processing of history waveforms 5 119 MEASure MODE Sets or queries the measure mode 5 119 MEASure ONECycle Sets or queries whether one cycle mode is ON or OFF 5 120 MEASure TRANge Time Range Sets or quer
177. Mnemonics are not case sensitive Example CURSor can be written as cursor or Cursor The lower case characters can be omitted Example CURSor can be written as CURSO or CURS The question mark at the end of a header indicates that it is a query You cannot omit the question mark Example The shortest abbreviation for CURSor is CURS e If the lt x gt value at the end of a mnemonic is omitted it is interpreted as a 1 Example If you write CHAN for CHANnel lt x gt CHANne11 is specified e Parts of commands and parameters enclosed in square brackets can be omitted Example TRIGger SIMPle LEVel can be written as TRIG LEV However the last section enclosed in brackets cannot be omitted in an upper level query Example TRIGger and TRIGger SIMPle are different queries 4 4 IM DL850E 17EN 4 3 Response Response When the controller sends a query with a question mark the DL850E DL850EV returns a response message to the query The DL850E DL850EV returns response messages in one of the following two forms e Response Consisting of a Header and Data Responses that can be used as program messages without any changes are returned with command headers attached Example ACQUire MODE lt PMT gt gt ACQUire MODE NORMAL lt RMT gt e Response Only Consisting of Data Responses that cannot be used as program messages unless changes are made query only commands are returned without heade
178. N IMAGE MODE ON TRIGGER ACTION IMAGE MODE gt TRIGGER ACTION IMAGE MODE 1 TRIGger ACTion IMAGe PATH Function Queries the path on the storage medium where screen captures are saved to as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion IMAGe PATH Example TRIGger ACTion IMAGe PATH gt TRIG ACT IMAG PATH Path HD 1 20090506 TRIGger ACTion MAIL Function Queries all settings for sending e mail as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion MAIL 5 140 IM DL850E 17EN 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger ACTion MAIL COUNt Function Sets or queries the e mail transmission limit for when e mail is sent as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion MAIL COUNt lt NRf gt TRIGger ACTion MAIL COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 1000 Example TRIGGER ACTION MAIL COUNT 100 TRIGGER ACTION MAIL COUNT gt TRIGGER ACTION MAIL COUNT 100 TRIGger ACTion MATL MODE Function Sets or queries whether e mail is sent as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion MAIL MODE lt Boolean gt TRIGger ACTion MAIL MODE Example TRIGGER ACTION MAIL MODE ON TRIGGER ACTION MAIL MODE gt TRIGGER ACTION MAIL MODE 1 TRIGger ACTion MODE Function Sets or queries whether action is used Syntax TRIGger ACTion MODE lt Boolean gt TRIGger ACTion MODE Example TRIGGER ACTION MODE ON TRIGGER ACTION MODE gt TRIGGER ACTION MODE 1 TRIGger ACTion SAVE Function Queries all the settings related to saving data as
179. N SCHANNEL1 BLABEL1 AAA This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe command is set to LOGic CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BORDer Byte Order Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the endianness used to save to internal memory the data of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BORDer BIG LITTle CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BORDer For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BORDER BIG CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BORDER gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BORDER BIG CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt FACTor Function Syntax Example Description Sets or queries the scaling constant value per pit of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt FACTor lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt FACTor For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 FACTOR 5E15 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 FACTOR gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 FACTOR 5 00000E 15 This co
180. NIT UU Description In the default settings the unit string is blank FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale Function Queries all FFT vertical scale settings Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale CENTer Function Sets or queries the center value of an FFT window s vertical scale Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale Ter lt NRf gt FT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale CENTer lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 1E 30 to 1E 30 Example FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE CENTER 40 FFT WAVEFORM VSCALE CENTER gt FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE CENTER 40 0000E 00 Description lt x gt 2 is valid on models with the G2 option FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale MODE Vertical Scale Mode Function Sets or queries an FFT window s vertical scale mode Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale MODE AUTO MANual FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale MODE Example FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE MODE AUTO FFT WAVEFORM VSCALE MODE gt FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE MODE AUTO puewwoy FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale SENSitivity Function Sets or queries the sensitivity of an FFT window s vertical scale Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCALe ENSitivity lt NRf gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCALe SENSitivity lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 0 to 1E 30 Example FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE ENSITIVITY 20 0000E 00 FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE SENSITIVITY gt FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE SENSITIVITY 20 0000E 00 Description lt x gt
181. NPUT gt CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 INPUT 1 Example CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt ID Function Sets or queries the frame ID of the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt ID lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt ID lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 lt String gt 0 to 3F CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 ID 10 CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 ID gt CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 ID 10 Description Error 151 Invalid string data will occur if a string outside of the valid range is specified Example CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt SBIT Start Bit Function Sets or queries the start bit number of the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x gt SBIT lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x gt SBIT lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 0 to 63 CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 SBIT 0 CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 SBIT gt CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 SBIT 0 Example CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt BICount Bit Count Function Sets or queries the bit length of the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt BICount lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt BICount lt x gt 1
182. NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 0 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 P1Y or P2Y s lt NRf gt 9 9999E 25 to 1E 25 0 1E 25 to 9 9999E 25 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE P1X 1 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE P1X gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE P1X 1 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale UNIT Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale UNIT lt x gt 1 to 16 lt String gt Up to 4 characters CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE UNIT UU CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE UNIT gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE UNIT UU IM DL850E 17EN 5 59 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage OFFSet Function Sets or queries the offset voltage of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage OFFSet lt Voltage gt lt Current gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage OFFSet lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Voltage gt and lt Current gt The selectable range varies depending on the range setting Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE OFFSET 0 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE OFFSET gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE OFFSET 1 00000E 00 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage POSition Function Sets or queries the vertical position of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTa
183. NTcare lt Time DONTcare gt lt Frequency DONTcare lt Frequency DONTcare gt lt lt NRf gt DONTcare gt lt lt NRf gt DONTcare gt lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Parameter gt AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDth1 BWIDth2 DELay DUTYcycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWIDt h PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TY 1Integ TY2Integ GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt VALue Function Queries the measured value of the specified waveform parameter Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt VALue lt x gt 1 to 16 GONogo REMote Function Sets or queries the remote mode of GO NO GO determination Syntax GONogo REMote lt Boolean gt GONogo REMote Example GONOGO REMOTE ON GONOGO REMOTE gt GONOGO REMOTE 1 GONogo SEQuence Function Sets or queries the action mode of GO NO GO determination Syntax GONogo SEQuence CONTinue SING1le GONogo SEQuence GONOGO SEQUENCE CONTINUE GONOGO SEQUENCE gt GONOGO SEQUENCE CONTINUE Example GONogo TRANge Function Sets or queries the determination range of GO NO GO determination Syntax GONogo TRANge lt NRf gt lt NRf gt GONogo TRANge lt NRf gt 5 to 5 div Example GONOGO TRANGE 5 5 GONOGO TRANGE gt GONOGO TRANGE 5 000000000000 5 000000000000 GONogo WAIT Function Waits for the completion of GO NO GO determination by using a t
184. NUMber Zone Number Function Sets or queries the zone number that displays the specified source waveform of the specified display group Syntax DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt ZNUMber lt NRf gt DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt ZNUMber lt x1 gt 1 to 4 lt x2 gt 1 to 64 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Example DISPLAY GROUP1 TRACE1 ZNUMBER 1 DISPLAY GROUP1 TRACE1 ZNUMBER gt DISPLAY GROUP1 TRACE1 ZNUMBER 1 Description Regardless of the number of zones that have been set you can always specify a number from 1 to 16 with this command 5 82 IM DL850E 17EN 5 10 DISPlay Group DISPlay INTENsity Function Queries all intensity settings Syntax DISPlay INTENsity DISPlay INTENsity CURSor GRID MARK er Function Sets or queries the intensity of a display item Syntax DISPlay INTENsity CURSor GRID MARKer lt NRf gt DISPlay INTENsity CURSor GRID MARKer lt NRf gt 1 to 8 Example DISPLAY INTENSITY CURSOR 8 DISPLAY INTENSITY CURSOR gt DISPLAY INTENSITY CURSOR 8 DISPlay INTerpolate Function Sets or queries the waveform interpolation method Syntax DISPlay INTerpolate LINE OFF PULSe SINE DISPlay INTerpolate Example DISPLAY INTERPOLATE LINE DISPLAY INTERPOLATE gt DISPLAY INTERPOLATE LINE DISPlay LINDicator Level Indicator Function Sets or queries whether the right indicator on the TY wav
185. ODE OFF IN OUT GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt MODE lt x gt 1 to 16 Example GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 MODE IN GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 MODE gt GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 MODE IN GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TRACe Function Sets or queries the specified waveform parameter s source waveform for parameter determination Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TRACe MATH lt x gt lt NRf gt GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TRACe lt x gt 1 to 16 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Channel number Example GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 TRACE 1 GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 TRACE gt GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 TRACE 1 IM DL850E 17EN 5 95 5 14 GONogo Group GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE Function Queries for parameter determination the specified waveform parameter s measurement item and upper and lower limits Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE lt x gt 1 to 16 GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 TYPE gt GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 TYPE MAXIMUM 1 10000E 00 1 00000E 00 Example GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE lt Parameter gt Function Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the measurement item for the specified waveform parameter Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE lt Parameter gt lt Voltage DONTcare gt lt Voltage DONTcare gt lt Current DONTcare lt Current DONTcare gt lt Time DO
186. ONLy Boolean CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT LONLy For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT LONLY ON CHANNEL13 CAN PORT LONLY gt CHANNEL13 CAN PORT LONLY 1 IM DL850E 17EN 5 37 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT SJW Sync jump width Function Sets or queries the resynchronization jump width also referred to as the sync jump width Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT SJW lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT SUW For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 lt NRf gt 1 to 4 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT SJW 1 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT SJW gt CHANNEL13 CAN PORT SJW 1 Example Description When the sample point is set to 85 the DL850E DL850EV will not operate if lt NRf gt is set to 4 In this case the DL850E DL850EV will operate if lt NRf gt is set to 3 Even if you change the sample point setting the SUW setting does not change CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT SPOint Function Sets or queries the sample point for each bit of a CAN bus signal port Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT SPOint lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT SPOint For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 lt NRf gt 71 78 or 85 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT SPOINT 71 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT SPOINT gt CHANNEL13 CAN PORT SPOINT 71 Example Description This command is valid whe
187. OR VERBOSE gt MONITOR VERBOSE 1 Example 5 122 IM DL850E 17EN 5 23 MTRigger Group The command in this group deals with manual triggers MTRigger Function Manually triggers the DL850E DL850EV Syntax MTRigger Example MTRIGGER IM DL850E 17EN 5 123 puewwoy 5 24 RECall Group RECall SETup lt x gt EXECute Function Recalls setup data from an internal memory area Syntax RECall SETup lt x gt EXECute lt x gt 1to3 Example RECALL SETUP1 EXECUTE Description If you specify an area that does not contain setup data an error occurs 5 124 IM DL850E 17EN 5 25 SEARch Group The commands in this group deal with searching for and extracting patterns from acquired waveforms You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the SHIFT ZOOM keys on the front panel If the selectable range of the time axis is lt NRf gt 5 to Sdiv the selectable range varies depending on settings such as the record length For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions under Notes about Cursor Measurement in chapter 9 of IM DL850E 01EN SEARch Function Queries all search settings Syntax SEARch SEARch ABORt Function Aborts the search Syntax SEARch ABORt Example SEARCH ABORT SEARch EDGE Function Queries all edge search settings Syntax SEARch EDGE SEARch EDGE COUNt Function Sets or querie
188. ORt Example HISTORY ABORT HISTory CLEar Function Clears the data of all history waveforms Syntax HISTory CLEar Example HISTORY CLEAR HISTory DATE Function Queries the trigger date of the data at the specified record number Syntax HISTory DATE lt NRf gt MINimum lt NRf gt 0 to 4999 HIST DATE 1 gt HIST DATE 0001 2010 02 02 Description If you specify a record number that is lower than MINimum this command will return 5 Example HISTory DISPlay Function Sets or queries the history start and end numbers that will be displayed Syntax HISTory DISPlay lt NRf gt lt NRf gt HISTory DISPlay lt NRf gt 0 to 4999 HISTORY DISPLAY 1 2 HISTORY DISPLAY gt HISTORY DISPLAY 1 2 Description The settable values vary depending on the memory model and the acquisition conditions Example HISTory DMODe Display MODE Function Sets or queries the history waveform display mode Syntax HISTory DMODe ONE ALL AVE HISTory DMODe HISTORY DMODE ONE HISTORY DMODE gt HISTORY DMODE ONE Example HISTory EXECute Function Executes the history waveform search This is an overlap command Syntax HISTory EXECute HISTory PARameter Function Queries all history waveform parameter search settings Syntax HISTory PARameter HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt Function Queries all the specified parameter s settings for histo
189. P GMTTIME gt SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP GMTTIME 09 00 SYSTem CLOCk TIME Function Sets or queries the time Syntax SYSTem CLOCk TIME lt String gt SYSTem CLOCk TIME lt String gt HH MM SS HH can be set to a value from 0 to 23 Example SYSTEM CLOCK TIME 10 00 00 SYSTEM CLOCK TIME gt SYSTEM CLOCK TIME 10 00 00 SYSTem CLOCk TYPE Function Sets or queries whether the date and time are set manually or by using SNTP Syntax SYSTem CLOCk TYPE MANual SNTP SYSTem CLOCk TYPE Example SYSTEM CLOCK TYPE MANUAL SYSTEM CLOCK TYPE gt SYSTEM CLOCK TYPE MANUAL SYSTem CRMode Function Sets or queries the mode used to read vertical marker and degree cursor values Syntax SYSTem CRMode DISPlay ACQuisition SY STem CRMode SYSTEM CRMODE DISPLAY SYSTEM CRMODE gt SYSTEM CRMODE DISPLAY Description The default value is DISPlay Example SYSTem GPS Function Queries all GPS settings Syntax SYSTem GPS Description This command is valid on models with the C30 option SYSTem GPS GMTTime Function Sets or queries the time difference from GMT during GPS time synchronization Syntax SYSTem GPS GMTTime lt String gt SY STem GPS GMTTime Example SYSTEM GPS GMTTIME 9 00 SYSTEM GPS GMTTIME 10 45 SYSTEM GPS GMTTIME gt SYSTEM GPS GMTTIME 9 00 Description This command is valid on models with the C30 option puewwoy SYSTem GPS STATe Functio
190. PUT PULLUP 1 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut SLOPe Function Sets or queries the input slope of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut SLOPe FALL RISE CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut SLOPe lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT SLOPE RISE CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT SLOPE gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT SLOPE RISE CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut THReshold Function Sets or queries the threshold level of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut THReshold lt Voltage gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut THReshold lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Voltage gt 100 to 100V Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT THRESHOLD 0 00000E 00 CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT THRESHOLD gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT THRESHOLD 0 00000E 00 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut VRANge Function Sets or queries the voltage range of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut VRANge lt Voltage gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut VRANge lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Voltage gt 1 to 500V Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT VRANGE 10 CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT VRANGE gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT VRANGE 10 puewwoy CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale Function Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale AVALue Function Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A th
191. RIGger Example WAVEFORM CAPTURE TRIGGER gt WAVEFORM CAPTURE TRIGGER 5000 WAVeform DATaselect Function Queries whether to query the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command using ACQ data or PP data Syntax WAVeform DATaselect ACQData PPData WAVeform DATaselect Example WAVEFORM DATASELECT ACQDATA WAVEFORM DATASELECT gt WAVEFORM DATASELECT ACQDATA WAVeform END Function Sets or queries the end data point in the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command the main waveform Syntax WAVeform END lt NRf gt WAVeform END lt NRf gt 0 to 50100000000 WAVEFORM END 10000 WAVEFORM END gt WAVEFORM END 10000 Example Description You can query the total number of data points that have been acquired by using the WAVeform LENGth command WAVeform FORMat Function Sets or queries the transmission data format Syntax WAVeform FORMat ASCii BYTE WORD DWORd WAVeform FORMat Example WAVEFORM FORMAT ASCII WAVEFORM FORMAT gt WAVEFORM FORMAT ASCII Description The DWORd format setting is valid on a CAN bus monitor module when the bit length of the transmission data is greater than 17 WAVeform LENGth Function Queries the total number of data points in the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command the main waveform Syntax WAVeform LENGth Example WAVEFORM LENGTH gt WAVEFORM LENGTH 10010 Description The total number
192. RKer M lt x gt POSition lt NRf gt CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt POSition lt x gt 1 to 4 lt NRf gt 5 to 5 Example CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 POSITION 3 00 CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 POSITION gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 POSITION 3 00 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt TRACe OFF FFT1 FFT2 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt TRACe lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 TRACE FFT1 CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 TRACE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 TRACE FFT1 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y Function Queries all Y axis settings of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor is displayed Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe lt x gt 1to4 Example CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 Y STATE ON CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 Y STATE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 Y STATE 1 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y VALue lt x gt 1to4 Example CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 Y VALUE gt CURSOR
193. SEC15 SEC20 SEC30 SEC40 SEC50 MIN1 MIN2 MIN3 MIN4 MIN5 MIN6 MIN7 MIN8 MIN9 MIN10 MIN15 MIN20 MIN25 MIN30 MIN4O MIN45 MIN50 HOUR1 HOUR2 HOUR3 HOUR4 HOURS HOUR6 HOUR7 HOUR8 HOUR9 HOUR1O HOUR11 HOUR12 HOUR18 HOUR24 TRIGger TIMer INTerval TRIGGER TIMER INTERVAL HOUR1 TRIGGER TIMER INTERVAL gt TRIGGER TIMER INTERVAL HOUR1 TRIGger TIMer TIME Function Sets or queries the time for time triggers Syntax TRIGger TIMer TIME lt String gt TRIGger TIMer TIME lt String gt HH MM SS Example TRIGGER TIMER TIME 00 00 00 TRIGGER TIMER TIME TRIGGER TIMER TIME 00 00 00 gt TRIGger TITime Function Syntax Queries all T1 lt T lt T2 trigger settings TRIGger TITime TRIGger TITime TIME lt x gt Function Syntax Example TRIGger TLTime Sets or queries the pulse width for T1 lt T lt T2 triggers TRIGger TITime TIME lt x gt lt Time gt TRIGger TITime TIME lt x gt lt Time gt 10ns to 10s lt x gt 1 2 TRIGGER TITIME TIME1 0 001 TRIGGER TITIME TIME1 gt TRIGGER TITIME TIME1 1 00000000E 03 Function Queries all T lt Time trigger settings Syntax TRIGger TLTime O 3 TRIGger TLTime TIME 3 Function Sets or queries the pulse width for T lt Time a triggers Syntax TRIGger TLTime TIME lt Time gt TRIGger TLTime TIME lt Time gt 10n
194. SPlay TLABel Trace LABEL Sets or queries whether waveform labels are displayed 5 83 EVENt Group gt EVENt Queries all event waveform settings 5 84 EVENt MEVent EXECute Manually inserts an event 5 84 EVENt MEVent MODE Manual Event Sets or queries whether the event waveform s manual events are displayed 5 84 EVENt MEVent SLOPe Sets or queries the manual event external event terminal polarity 5 84 FFT Group FFT Queries all FFT settings 5 85 FFT AVERage Queries all FFT averaging settings 5 85 FFT AVERage COUNt Sets or queries the average count of linear averaging 5 85 FFT AVERage EWEight Sets or queries the attenuation constant of exponential averaging 5 85 9 FFT AVERage MODE Sets or queries the FFT averaging mode 5 85 3 FFT AVERage TYPE Sets or queries the averaging domain 5 85 3 FFT POINt Sets or queries the number of analysis source points of the FFT windows 5 85 a FFT STARt Sets or queries the analysis source start point of the FFT windows 5 85 n gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt Queries all FFT window settings 5 85 gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt HAXis Sets or queries an FFT window s horizontal axis display method 5 85 FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal Queries all horizontal axis settings for FFT analysis 5 85 FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal CSPan Queries all center and span settings for the horizontal axis for FFT analysis
195. Syntax TRIGger HOLDoff TIME lt Time gt TRIGger HOLDoff TIME lt Time gt 0 to 10s the resolution is 10 ns Example TRIGGER HOLDOFF TIME 0 001 TRIGGER HOLDOFF TIME gt TRIGGER HOLDOFF TIME 1 0000000E 03 TRIGger MODE Function Sets or queries the trigger mode Syntax TRIGger MODE AUTO ALEVel NORMal1 SINGle NSINgle ONSTart TRIGger MODE TRIGGER MODE AUTO TRIGGER MODE gt TRIGGER MODE AUTO Example IM DL850E 17EN 5 145 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger OR Function Queries all OR trigger settings Syntax TRIGger OR TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel for OR triggers Syntax TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt OFF FALL RISE TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Example TRIGGER OR CHANNEL9 BIT1 RISE TRIGGER OR CHANNEL9 BIT1 gt TRIGGER OR CHANNEL9 BIT1 RISE TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic channel for OR triggers Syntax TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt CONDition OFF FALL RISE WINIn WINOut TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt CONDition TRIGGER OR CHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE TRIGGER OR CHANNEL1 CONDITION gt TRIGGER OR CHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE Description Use this command on channels that do not have sub channels Example
196. T DIV value 5 139 3 TRIGger Group 3 TRIGger Queries all trigger settings 5 140 3 TRIGger ABN A gt B n Queries all A gt B n trigger settings 5 140 a TRIGger ABN COUNt Sets or queries the number of times condition B must be met for A gt B n 5 140 o triggers TRIGger ACTion Queries all action settings 5 140 TRIGger ACTion BUZZer Sets or queries whether a beep is sounded as an action 5 140 TRIGger ACTion FOLDer Sets or queries whether a folder is created with the date when waveform 5 140 data and screen captures are saved to a storage medium as an action TRIGger ACTion HCOPy Sets or queries whether an screen capture is printed from the built in printer 5 140 as an action TRIGger ACTion IMAGe Queries all settings for saving screen captures as an action 5 140 TRIGger ACTion IMAGe Sets or queries the current directory on the storage medium where screen 5 140 CDIRectory captures are saved to as an action TRIGger ACTion IMAGe DRIVe Sets the storage medium that screen captures are saved to as an action 5 140 TRIGger ACTion IMAGe MODE Sets or queries whether a screen capture is saved to the storage medium as 5 140 an action TRIGger ACTion IMAGe PATH Queries the path on the storage medium where screen captures are saved 5 140 to as an action TRIGger ACTion MAIL Queries all settings for sending e mail as an action 5 140 TRIGger ACTion MAIL COUNt Sets or queries the e mail transmission limit for when e mail is sent
197. TE Description This command is valid when any of the following modules is installed and the input coupling is set to DC 701250 HS10M12 701251 HS1M16 701255 NONISO_10M12 720210 HS100M12 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage DOCancel MODE Function Sets or queries the on off status of DC offset canceling of voltage measurement modules Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage DOCancel MODE lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage DOCancel MODE lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE DOCANCEL MODE 1 CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE DOCANCEL MODE gt CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE DOCANCEL MODE 1 Description This command is valid when any of the following modules is installed and the input coupling is set to DC 701250 HS10M12 701251 HS1M16 701255 NONISO_10M12 720210 HS100M12 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage INVert Function Sets or queries whether the display is inverted ON or not OFF for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage INVert lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage INVert lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE INVERT ON CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE INVERT gt CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE INVERT 1 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Function Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale AV
198. TEM LOGIC NFORMAT BIT Description This setting is applied to all channels that have modules installed in them SYSTem MLANguage Function Sets or queries the menu language Syntax SYSTem MLANguage CHINese ENGLish FRENch GERMan ITALian JAPANese KORean SPANish RUSSian SYSTem MLANguage Example SYSTEM MLANGUAGE ENGLISH SYSTEM MLANGUAGE gt SYSTEM MLANGUAGE ENGLISH SYSTem OVERview Function Displays the system information Syntax SYSTem OVERView Example SYSTEM OVERVIEW SYSTem PACTion Function Sets or queries whether the action mode will be enabled when the DL850E DL850EV turns on ON or not OFF Syntax SYSTem PACTion lt Boolean gt SYSTem PACTion Example SYSTEM PACTION ON SYSTEM PACTION gt SYSTEM PACTION 1 SYSTem PSTart Function Sets or queries whether waveform acquisition will be started when the DL850E DL850EV turns on ON or not OFF Syntax SYSTem PSTart lt Boolean gt SYSTem PSTart SYSTEM PSTART ON SYSTEM PSTART gt SYSTEM PSTART 1 Example SYSTem RCMode Remote Control Mode Function Sets or queries whether remote signals to stop measurements will be ignored ON or not OFF Syntax SYSTem RCMode lt Boolean gt SYSTem RCMode Example SYSTEM RCMODE ON SYSTEM RCMODE gt SYSTEM RCMODE 1 SYSTem SCALefont Function Sets or queries the font size that is used for waveform labels and scale values Syntax SYSTem SCA
199. TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel for OR triggers Syntax TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt OFF FALL RISE TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel for OR triggers Syntax TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition OFF FALL RISE WINIn WINOut TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition Example TRIGGER OR CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE TRIGGER OR CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION gt TRIGGER OR CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE Description Use this command on channels that have sub channels TRIGger OR EXTernal TYPE Function Sets or queries the type of external trigger that is used with OR triggers Syntax TRIGger OR EXTernal TYPE OFF FALL RISE TRIGger OR EXTernal TYPE Example TRIGGER OR EXTERNAL TYPE RISE TRIGGER OR EXTERNAL TYPE gt TRIGGER OR EXTERNAL TYPE RISE TRIGger OUT Function Queries all trigger output settings Syntax TRIGger OUT TRIGger OUT TIME Function Sets or queries the H pulse interval that is used when the trigger output termina
200. TY DEGRee DY VALue Example CURSOR TY DEGREE DY VALUE 0 0000000E 00 CURSor TY DEGRee JUMP Function Moves the specified angle cursor to the center of the specified zoom window Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee JUMP C1 Z1 C1_Z2 C2_21 C2_22 Example CURSOR TY DEGREE JUMP Cl _Z1 Description C1 and C2 are used to indicate Cursor1 and Cursor2 CURSor TY DEGRee POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries an angle cursor position on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor TY DEGRee POSition lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 5 to 5 the resolution depends on the measurement length CURSOR TY DEGREE POSITION1 1 CURSOR TY DEGREE POSITION1 gt CURSOR TY DEGREE POSITION1 1 000000000000 Example CURSor TY DEGRee REFerence lt x gt Function Sets or queries the angle reference start Ref1 or end Ref2 point on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee REFerence lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor TY DEGRee REFerence lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 5 to 5 the resolution depends on the measurement length CURSOR TY DEGREE REFERENCE1 1 CURSOR TY DEGREE REFERENCE1 gt CURSOR TY DEGREE REFERENCE1 1 000000000000 Example CURSor TY DEGRee RVALue Function Sets or queries an angle cursor s reference angle on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee RVALue lt NRf gt CURSor TY DEGRee RVALue lt NRf gt 1
201. TY VERTical PERDt Queries all 1 AT value settings 1 AT is between the V cursors on the T Y 5 76 display 5 10 IM DL850E 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CURSor TY VERTical PERDt Sets or queries whether the 1 AT value between the V cursors on the T Y 5 76 STATe display is displayed CURSor TY VERTical PERDt Queries the 1 AT value between the V cursors on the T Y display 5 76 VALue CURSor TY VERTical Sets or queries a V cursor position on the T Y display 5 76 POSition lt x gt CURSor TY VERTical TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the V 5 76 cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt Queries all X axis value settings for a V cursor on the T Y display 5 76 CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a V cursor on the T Y display is 5 77 STATe displayed CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt Queries the X axis value of a V cursor on the T Y display 5 77 VALue CURSor TY VERTical Y lt x gt Queries all Y axis value settings for a V cursor on the T Y display 5 77 CURSor TY VERTical Y lt x gt Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a V cursor on the T Y display is 5 77 STATe displayed CURSor TY VERTical Y lt x gt Queries the Y axis value measured value o
202. This command is valid only on logic module channels This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter gt Function Syntax Description Queries all settings related to the waveform parameter of the specified bit of the specified channel on a logic module MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter gt lt Parameter gt AVGFreq DUTYcycle FREQuency PERiod PNUMber This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter gt COUNt Function Syntax Example Queries the waveform parameter statistics count of the specified bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt xl1 gt BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter gt COUNt lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 lt Parameter gt AVGFreq DUTYcycle FREQuency PERiod PNUMber MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 FREQUENCY COUNT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 FREQUENCY COUNT 10 Description This command is valid only on logic module channels e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter gt MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation Function Syntax Example Queries the waveform parameter statistics value of the specified bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt lt Parame ter gt MAX
203. UMBER gt SYTEM CHANNEL1 SNUMBER 111111111 Description This command is invalid on the following modules 701250 High Speed 10 MS s 12 Bit Isolation Module 701251 High Speed High Resolution 1 MS s 16 Bit Isolation Module 701255 High Speed 10 MS s 12 Bit Non lsolation Module 701260 67 High Voltage 100 kS s 16 Bit Isolation Module with RMS 701261 Universal Voltage Temp Module 701262 Universal Voltage Temp Module with AAF 701265 Temperature High Precision Voltage Isolation Module 701270 Strain Module NDIS 701271 Strain Module DSUB Shunt CAL 701275 Acceleration Voltage Module with AAF 701280 Frequency Module 720210 High Speed 100 MS s 12 Bit Isolation Module 720220 16 CH Voltage Input Module 720230 Logic Input Module 720240 CAN Bus Monitor Module SYSTem CLICk Function Sets or queries whether click sounds are produced Syntax SYSTem CLICk lt Boolean gt SYSTem CLICk Example SYSTEM CLICK ON SYSTEM CLICK gt SYSTEM CLICK 1 SYSTem CLOCk Function Queries all date time settings Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SYSTem CLOCk DATE Function Sets or queries the date Syntax SYSTem CLOCk DATE lt String gt SYSTem CLOCk DATE lt String gt YYYY MM DD Specify the year according to the Gregorian calendar Yyyy 2000 to 2099 Example SYSTEM CLOCK DATE 2010 04 01 SYSTEM CLOCK DATE gt SYSTEM CLOCK DATE 2010 04 01 Description Regardless of the setting that you have made using th
204. UNT gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BCOUNT 8 Example CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BICount Bit Count Function Sets or queries the bit length of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BICount lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BICount For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 2 to 32 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BICOUNT 10 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BICOUNT gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BICOUNT 10 Example 5 38 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BLABel lt x gt Function Syntax Example Description Sets or queries a bit label of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring when the sub channel s data type is logic CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BLABel lt x gt lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BLABel lt x gt For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 BLABel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt String gt Up to 16 characters CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BLABEL1 AAA CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BLABEL1 gt CHANNEL13 CA
205. URSor XY MARKer M lt x gt POSition Sets or queries a marker cursor s time axis equivalent position on the X Y 5 78 display CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T Queries all time value settings for a marker cursor on the X Y display 5 78 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T STATe Sets or queries whether the time value for a marker cursor on the X Y display 5 78 is displayed CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T VALue Queries the time value of a marker cursor on the X Y display 5 79 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the 5 79 marker cursors on the X Y display CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X Queries all X axis value settings for a marker cursor on the X Y display 5 79 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a marker cursor on the X Y 5 79 display is displayed IM DL850E 17EN spuewwoy 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X VALue Queries the X axis value of a marker cursor on the X Y display 5 79 CURSor XY MARKer FORM Sets or queries the form of the marker cursors on the X Y display 5 79 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y Queries all Y axis value settings for a marker cursor on the X Y display 5 79 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe
206. Window Layout Function Sets or queries the window layout that is used when waveforms are zoomed Syntax ZOOM WLAYout VERTical SIDE ZOOM WLAYout Example ZOOM WLAY SIDE ZOOM WLAY gt ZOOM WLAY SIDE ZOOM Z2Target Function Sets or queries the source window of Z2 when both Z1 and Z2 are displayed Syntax ZOOM Z2Target MAIN Z1 ZOOM Z2Target Example ZOO0M Z2TARGET MAIN ZOOM Z2TARGET gt ZOOM Z2TARGET MAIN 5 160 IM DL850E 17EN 5 38 Common Command Group The commands in this group are defined in IEEE 488 2 1987 and are independent from the instrument s individual functions There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group CAL Function Syntax Example Description CLS Function Syntax Example Description ESE Function Syntax Example Description Executes calibration and queries the result CAL CAL gt 0 This command returns 0 if calibration is completed successfully and 1 otherwise Clears the standard event register extended event register and error queue CLS CLS Ifthe CLS command is located immediately after the program message terminator the output queue is also cleared e For information about each register and queue see chapter 6 Sets or queries the standard event enable register ESE lt NRf gt ESE lt NRf gt 0 to 255 ESE 251 ESE gt 251 e Specify the value as a sum of the values of
207. Word Data ASCII Data 1000 Approx 24 ms Approx 20 ms Approx 54 ms 10000 Approx 31 ms Approx 44 ms Approx 510 ms 100000 Approx 170 ms Approx 310 ms Approx 5 s 1000000 Approx 1600 ms Approx 3100 ms Approx 50 s IM DL850E 17EN 3 5 Ieuondo 2e u gl d9 el 3 5 Configuring the DL850E DL850EV GP IB Settings This section explains the settings listed below You must configure these settings when controlling the DL850E DL850EV remotely through a GP IB interface e Communication interface GP IB address UTILITY Remote Ctrl Menu Press UTILITY and then the Remote Ctrl soft key to display the following menu Remote Ctrl J lt Device 7 Set Device to GPIB Address HI Set the address 0 30 i Note Only use the selected communication interface If you send commands simultaneously from another communication interface that has not been selected the DL850E DL850EV will not execute the commands properly When the controller is communicating with the DL850E DL850EV or with other devices through GP IB do not change the address Each device that is connected by GP IB has its own unique address in the GP IB system This address is used to distinguish one device from other devices Therefore you must assign a unique address to the DL850E DL850EV when connecting it to a PC or other device 3 6 IM DL850E 17EN 3 6 Responses to Interface Messages Responses to Interface Messages Responses to
208. XY MARKer FORM Example CURSOR XY MARKER FORM LINE CURSOR XY MARKER FORM gt CURSOR XY MARKER FORM LINE Description lt x gt 1 to 4 however the setting is the same for cursors 1 to 4 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y Function Queries all Y axis value settings for a marker cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a marker cursor on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR XY MARKER M1 Y STATE ON CURSOR XY MARKER M1 Y STATE gt CURSOR XY MARKER M1 Y STATE 1 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of a marker cursor on O the X Y display S Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y VALue 3 o lt x gt 1 to4 5 Q Example CURSOR XY MARKER M1 Y VALUE gt CURSOR XY MARKER M1 Y VALUE 0 0000000E 00 CURSor XY TYPE Function Sets or queries the cursor type on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY TYPE OFF HORizontal VERTical MARKer HAVertical CURSor XY TYPE Example CURSOR XY TYPE MARKER CURSOR XY TYPE gt CURSOR XY TYPE MARKER CURSor XY VERTical Function Queries all V cursor settings for the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY VERTical CURSor
209. Y DEGREE Y1 VALUE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE Y1 VALUE 0 0000000E 00 Description If you have set the waveform that you want to measure to ALL all the measured values from the channels sub channels and Math channels of all the installed modules will be returned e NAN will be returned for any unused channels and channels that do not have modules installed in their corresponding slots e For modules that have sub channels the measured values of all sub channels will be returned NAN will be returned for any sub channels whose input is turned off CURSor TY HORizontal Function Queries all horizontal cursor settings for the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal CURSor TY HORizontal DY Function Queries all AY axis settings of the horizontal cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal DY CURSor TY HORizontal DY STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AY axis value between the horizontal cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal DY STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY HORizontal DY STATe CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL DY STATE ON CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL DY STATE gt CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL DY STATE 1 Example CURSor TY HORizontal DY VALue Function Queries the AY axis value of the horizontal cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal DY VALue CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL DY VALUE gt CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL DY VALUE 3
210. ZONTAL Y1 STATE ON CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL Y1 STATE gt CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL Y1 STATE 1 Example CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of a horizontal cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt VALue lt x gt 1 2 CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL Y1 VALUE gt CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL Y1 VALUE 150 00000E 00 Example IM DL850E 17EN 5 73 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor TY HVERtical DYDx Function Queries all settings related to the AY AX value which is a value between the vertical cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HVERtical DYDx CURSor TY HVERtical DYDx STATe Function Sets or queries the on off status of the AY AX value which is a value between the vertical cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HVERtical DYDx STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY HVERtical DYDx STATe Example CURSOR TY HVERTICAL DYDX STATE ON CURSOR TY HVERTICAL DYDX STATE gt CURSOR TY HVERTICAL DYDX STATE 1 CURSor TY HVERtical DYDx VALue Function Queries the AY AX value which is a value between the vertical cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HVERtical DYDx VALue CURSOR TY HVERTICAL DYDX VALUE 250 00000E 00 Example CURSor TY MARKer Function Queries all marker cursor settings for the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer CURSor TY MARKer FORM Function Sets or queries the f
211. a waveform MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Sets or queries the reference waveform trace used to measure the delay of 5 112 DELay REFerence TRACe the specified bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Sets or queries the display format of the delay of the specified bit of the 5 113 DELay STATe specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Queries the delay measurement result of the specified bit of the specified 5 113 DELay VALue channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt Queries all settings related to the waveform parameter of the specified bit of 5 113 BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter gt the specified channel on a logic module MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt Queries the waveform parameter statistics count of the specified bit of the 5 113 BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter gt COUNt specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt lt P Queries the waveform parameter statistics value of the specified bit of the 5 113 arameter gt MAXimum MEAN MINimum_ specified channel SDEViation MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt Sets or queries the on off state of the waveform parameter of the specified 5 114 BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter gt STATe bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt Queries the measured waveform parameter value of the specified bit of the 5 114 BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter gt VALue specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries whether all t
212. after the E can be omitted You cannot omit the minus sign e Ifa value outside the setting range is entered the value is adjusted to the closest value within the range e Ifa value has more significant digits than are available the value will be rounded lt Voltage gt lt Time gt lt Frequency gt lt Current gt lt Voltage gt lt Time gt lt Frequency gt and lt Current gt indicate decimal values that have physical significance A lt Multiplier gt or lt Unit gt can be attached to the lt NRf gt form that was described earlier The following types of expressions are possible Form Example lt NRf gt lt Multiplier gt lt Unit gt 5MV lt NRf gt lt Unit gt 5E 3V lt NRf gt lt Multiplier gt 5M lt NRf gt 5E 3 lt Multiplier gt lt Multipliers gt that you can use are indicated in the following table Symbol Word Multiplier EX Exa 1018 PE Peta 1015 T Tera 1012 G Giga 109 MA Mega 108 K Kilo 103 M Milli 103 U Micro 10 6 N Nano 10 9 P Pico 10 12 F Femto 10 16 A Atto 10 18 lt Unit gt lt Units gt that you can use are indicated in the following table Symbol Word Description V Volt Voltage S Second Time HZ Hertz Frequency MHZ Megahertz Frequency A Ampere Current e lt Multiplier gt and lt Unit gt are not case sensitive e U is used to indicate micro p e MA is used for Mega to distinguish it from Milli Megahertz which is expre
213. age Corrective Action Page 171 Missing Right Mathematical operations cannot be used 172 Invalid expression Mathematical operations cannot be used Chapter 5 178 Expression data not allowed Mathematical operations cannot be used Chapter 5 181 Invalid outside macro definition The DL850E DL850EV does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications Communication Execution Errors 200 to 299 Code Message Corrective Action Page 221 Setting conflict Check settings that are related to each other Chapter 5 222 Data out of range Check the ranges of the settings Chapter 5 223 Too much data Check data byte lengths Chapter 5 224 Illegal parameter value Check the ranges of the settings Chapter 5 225 OverFlow Keep program messages to 1024 bytes or less in length including lt PMT gt 4 2 226 Out Of Memory 241 Hardware missing Keep program messages to 1024 bytes or less in length including lt PMT gt Check that the specified options are all installed 4 2 260 Expression error Mathematical operations cannot be used 270 Macro error The DL850E DL850EV does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 272 Macro execution error The DL850E DL850EV does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 273 Illegal macro label The DL850E DL850EV does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 275 Macro definition too long The DL850E DL850EV does not sup
214. al memory the data 5 39 2 BORDer Byte Order of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal 2 monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the scaling constant value per pit of a sub channelonan 5 39 FACTor installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries whether a sub channel on an installed module that can 5 39 INPut perform CAN bus signal monitoring is ON or OFF CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the label of a sub channel on an installed module that can 5 39 LABel perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the message format of a sub channel on an installed module 5 40 MFORmat that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt MID_ Sets or queries the message ID of a sub channel on an installed module that 5 40 can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the scaling constant offset value of a sub channel on an 5 40 OFFSet installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the vertical position of a sub channel on an installed module 5 40 POSition that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt SB
215. all settings of each bit of an installed logic input module 5 50 BIT1 BIT8 CHANnel lt x gt LOGic Sets or queries the chattering elimination for the specified bit of the specified 5 50 BIT1 BIT8 CELimination logic channel CHANnel lt x gt LOGic Sets or queries whether the display of each bit is turned on for the specified 5 51 BIT1 BIT8 DISPlay logic channel CHANnel lt x gt LOGic Sets or queries the label of each bit for the specified logic channel 5 51 BIT1 BIT8 LABel CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BMAPping Sets or queries the bit display method of the specified logic channel 5 51 CHANnel lt x gt LOGic POSition Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified logic channel 5 51 CHANnel lt x gt LOGic ZOOM Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed module that can 5 51 perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt MODU1le Queries the module that is installed in the channel 5 51 CHANnel lt x gt STRain Queries all settings of an installed strain module 5 51 CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance Queries whether balancing will be performed on an installed strain module 5 51 CHANnel lt x1 gt STRain BALance Sets or queries the channels that balancing will be performed on for an 5 52 CHANne1l lt x2 gt installed strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance Executes strain balancing on an installed strain module 5 52 EXECute CHANnel lt x gt STRain BWIDth Set
216. ample AC DC GND AC e As with the header the COMMunicate VERBose command can be used to select whether to return the response in the full form or in the abbreviated form e The COMMunicate HEADer setting does not affect lt character data gt lt Boolean gt lt Boolean gt is data that indicates on or off The following types of expressions are possible Form Examples ON OFF lt NR gt ON OFF 1 0 e When lt Boolean gt is expressed in the lt NRf gt form OFF is selected if the rounded integer value is 0 and ON is selected for all other cases e Aresponse message is always returned with a 1 if the value is ON and with a 0 if the value is OFF lt String data gt lt String data gt is not a predefined character string like lt character data gt It can be any character string The character string must be enclosed in single quotation marks or double quotation marks Form Example lt String data gt ABC IEEER488 2 1987 applies to single quotation marks e Aresponse message is always enclosed in double quotation marks e lt String data gt is any character string Therefore the DL850E DL850EV assumes that the remaining program message units are part of the character string if no single or double quotation mark is encountered As a result no error is detected if a quotation mark is omitted lt Filename gt lt Filename gt is data that indicat
217. annel FILE SAVE ASCII SCHANNEL SPACE FILE SAVE ASCII SCHANNEL gt FILE SAVE ASCII SCHANNEL SPACE Example FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat STRace CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt Function Sets or queries the waveform that will be saved for a specific type of data Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat STRace CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Boolean gt FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat STRace CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt Example FILE SAVE BINARY STRACE CHANNEL1 ON FILE SAVE BINARY STRACE CHANNEL1 gt FILE SAVE BINARY STRACE CHANNEL1 1 Description When the Trace All setting is set to OFF the source waveforms of waveforms that are displayed and that have this setting set to ON will be saved You cannot specify waveforms by sub channel FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat TALL Trace All Function Sets or queries the selection method for the waveforms that will be saved for a specific type of data Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat TALL lt Boolean gt FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat TALL Example FILE SAVE BINARY TALL ON FILE SAVE BINARY TALL gt FILE SAVE BINARY TALL 1 Description ON All channels whose waveforms are displayed will be saved OFF The channels whose waveforms are displayed and whose waveforms are set to be saved will be saved FILE SAVE ASCii MEASure TINFormation Function Sets
218. annel lt x2 gt SCALe AUTO DEFault lt NRf gt lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 10 0000E 30 to 10 0000E 30 Example CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 SCALE 10 0 10 0 CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 SCALE gt CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 SCALE 1 000E 01 1 000E 01 Description This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt VTYPe command is set to UNSigned or SIGNed CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt POSition Function Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt POSition lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt POSition lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 5 00 to 5 00 div in steps of 0 01 div Example CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 POSITION 1 0 CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 POSITION gt CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 POSITION 1 0 IM DL850E 17EN 5 49 puewwog 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt UNIT Function Sets or queries the data unit of the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt UNIT lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 lt String gt Up to 16 characters Exampl
219. ared after it is read Clearing the Standard Event Register The standard event register is cleared when e The contents of the standard event register are read using the ESR command e A CLS command is received e The DL850E DL850EV is turned off and then back on 6 4 IM DL850E 17EN 6 4 Extended Event Register The extended event register receives information about changes in the condition register which indicates the DL850E DL850EV s internal condition The information is the result of edge detection performed by the transition filter FiLTer lt x gt gt 16 Condition register 15 STATus CONDition Transition filter 15 STATus FILTer lt x gt RISE FALL BOTH NEVer Extended event register STATus EESR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 5 3 2 1 0 o AN 0 RUN SCH NGO 0 HST MEs ACS PRN TST CAL TRG REC CAP yyy yy yy YY YY Py dy 14 13 12 1110 9 8 77 6 5 4 3 2 14 0 yy vy by YY YY ey 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 140 The condition register bits are described below Bit 0 CAP Capture This bit is 1 when waveform acquisition is in progress Bit 1 REC Record This bit is 1 when recording is in progress Bit 2 TRG Awaiting Trigger This bit is 1 when the DL850E DL850EV is waiting for a trigger Bit 3 CAL
220. as an 5 141 action TRIGger ACTion MAIL MODE Sets or queries whether e mail is sent as an action 5 141 TRIGger ACTion MODE Sets or queries whether action is used 5 141 TRIGger ACTion SAVE Queries all the settings related to saving data as an action 5 141 TRIGger ACTion SAVE CDIRectory Changes the current directory on the storage medium that waveform datais 5 141 saved to as an action TRIGger ACTion SAVE DRIVe Sets the storage medium that waveform data is saved to as an action 5 141 TRIGger ACTion SAVE MODE Sets or queries whether waveform data is saved to the storage medium as 5 141 an action TRIGger ACTion SAVE PATH Queries the path on the storage medium that waveform data is saved toas 5 141 an action TRIGger ACTion SAVE TYPE Sets or queries the type of data to save when waveform data is saved to the 5 141 storage medium as an action TRIGger ADB A Delay B Queries all A Delay B trigger settings 5 141 TRIGger ADB DELay Sets or queries the delay time for condition B for A Delay B triggers 5 141 TRIGger AND Queries all AND trigger settings 5 141 TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel for 5 142 AND triggers TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic 5 142 CONDition channel for AND triggers IM DL850E 17EN 5 23 5 1 List of Commands
221. at is used during linear scaling for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale AVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale AVALue lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE AVALUE gt CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 Description The coefficient cannot be set to 0 IM DL850E 17EN 5 43 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale BVALue Function Sets or queries the scaling coefficient B that is used during linear scaling for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale BVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale BVALue lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE BVALUE gt CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale GETMeasure Function Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale GETMeasure P1X P2x lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANnel1l FREQ LSCale GETMeasure P1X CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale MODE Function Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale MODE AXB OFF P12 CHANne1l lt x gt FREQ LSCale MODE
222. ata saving capture 5 32 data saving Screen Capture ccccececceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 102 data transfer rate Ethernet cccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 1 2 data transfer rate GP IB 3 5 data transfer rate USB data type CAN data type LIN ncn eteern ee need a DAG N O E EE DCL Device Clear seek GO AGIOCK rinn ennn T A deceleration prediction frequency ssssssssssessreessseese 5 45 delay tiQGEN aisir ninaa e E eE 5 144 determination level search cccceeccceeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeee 5 125 determination logic 7 determinato mMOd E searr vests sve ee eT E EREE 5 95 determination range GO NO GO seseeeeereeserreererrreree 5 96 determination range history 5 100 determinations number of 5 95 GiStal ennaa 5 117 distance per pulse frequency cccsceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeees 5 45 d alcaptutesiuusonin ao EN 5 32 dual capture length cccceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeaeees 5 34 E Page e mail transmission Capture ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 5 32 e mail transmission GO NO GO eee eee tee eeeeeeeee 5 94 edge polarity Search dada ian 5 125 endian CAN 5 endian LIN error messages SIMON UCU arate ee crccercave concn eiesccrestemtrem E EthermmetinternaC Esne aa i exponential averaging attenuation constant extended event register
223. ay of the capture window Syntax CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt lt Boolean gt CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt lt x1 gt 1to4 lt x2 gt 1 to 64 Example CAPTURE GROUP1 TRACE1 1 CAPTURE GROUP1 TRACE1 gt CAPTURE GROUP1 TRACE1 1 CAPTure MCMode Main Capture Mode Function Sets or queries the main capture mode during dual capture Syntax CAPTure MCMode AUTO ONSTart CAPTure MCMode CAPTURE MCMODE AUTO CAPTURE MCMODE gt CAPTURE MCMODE AUTO Example IM DL850E 17EN 5 33 5 5 CAPTure Group CAPTure MODE Function Sets or queries whether the dual capture mode is enabled Syntax CAPTure MODE lt Boolean gt CAPTure MODE CAPTure WINDow CAPNum Function Sets or queries the number of the waveform that is displayed in the dual capture window Syntax CAPTure WINDow CAPNum lt NRf gt MAXimum MINimum Example CAPTURE MODE ON CAPTure WINDow CAPNum CAPTURE MODE gt CAPTURE MODE 1 lt NRf gt 5000 to 5000 Example CAPTURE WINDOW CAPNUM 1 CAPTure RLENgth CAPTURE WINDOW CAPNUM gt Function Sets or queries the dual capture length CAPTURE WINDOW CAPNUM 1 Syntax CAPTure RLENgth lt NRf gt Description When the capture mode is set to Auto Current CAPTure RLENgth 1 2 Current The latest waveform 1 The lt NRf gt 5000 to 500000 waveform that was captured before the Current Step 5000 10000
224. ce request enable register is also set to 1 For example if an event occurs and the logical AND of a standard event register bit and its corresponding enable register bit is 1 then bit 5 ESB is set to 1 At this point if bit 5 of the service request enable register is 1 bit 6 MSS is set to 1 and the DL850E DL850EV requests service from the controller You can check what type of event occurred by reading the contents of the status byte Reading the Status Byte There are two ways to read the contents of the status byte e STB Query Bit 6 functions as MSS when a query is made using STB This causes the MSS to be read This query does not cause any of the status byte bits to be cleared after the status byte is read e Serial Polling Serial polling causes bit 6 to function as an RQS bit This causes the RQS to be read After the status byte is read only the RQS bit is cleared You cannot read the MSS bit when serial polling is used Clearing the Status Byte There is no way to clear all of the bits in the status byte The bits that are cleared vary for each operation as follows e STB Query None of the bits are cleared e Serial Polling Only the RQS bit is cleared e A CLS command is received When a CLS command is received the status byte itself is not cleared but the contents of the standard event register which affect the bits in the status byte are cleared As a result the corresponding status byte bits a
225. ce waveform slope that will be used to measure delay 5 115 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay between channels for a waveform MEASure SLOPe MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Queries all reference waveform settings used to measure the delay between 5 115 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay channels for the specified waveform REFerence 5 18 IM DL850E 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the edge detection count of the reference waveform used to 5 115 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay measure the delay between channels for the specified waveform REFerence COUNt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the bit of the reference waveform trace used to measure the 5 116 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay delay between channels for a waveform REFerence LOGic BIT MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the edge detection slope of the reference waveform used to 5 116 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay measure the delay between channels for the specified waveform REFerence SLOPe MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries whether to set the reference point for measuring the delay 5 116 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay between channels for a waveform to a
226. ch EDGE SLOPe Example SEARCH EDGE SLOPE RISE SEARCH EDGE SLOPE gt SEARCH EDGE SLOPE RISE SEARch EDGE SOURce Function Sets or queries the trace to perform the edge search on Syntax SEARch EDGE SOURce lt NRf gt lt NRf gt SEARch EDGE SOURce lt NRf gt 1 to 16 L lt NRf gt If the channel has sub channels this is the range of sub channel numbers Example SEARCH EDGE SOURCE 1 SEARCH EDGE SOURCE gt SEARCH EDGE SOURCE 1 Description If no module is installed you cannot select the edge search SEARch EPOint End POint Function Sets or queries the search end position Syntax SEARch EPOint lt NRf gt SEARch EPOint lt NRf gt 5 to 5div the resolution depends on the measurement length Example SEARCH EPOINT 3 SEARCH EPOINT gt SEARCH EPOINT 3 000000000000 IM DL850E 17EN 5 125 puewwoy 5 25 SEARch Group SEARch EXECute Function Executes the search This is an overlap command Syntax SEARch EXECute SEARch EVENt Function Queries all event search settings Syntax SEARch EVENt SEARch EVENt COUNt Function Sets or queries the event search event number Syntax SEARcCh EVENt COUNt lt NRf gt SEARch EVENt COUNt lt NRf gt 0 to 100 when you are searching for a manual event O is the last event 4999 to 0 when you are searching for an Auto mode capture event 0 to 4999 when you are searching for an OnSta
227. chronization channel for wave window triggers 5 150 WAVeform Group WAVeform Queries all waveform data output settings 5 151 WAVeform BITS Queries the bit length of the waveform data specified by the WAVeform 5 151 TRACe command WAVeform BYTeorder Sets or queries the transmission byte order for data formats that are 2 bytes 5 151 or longer WAVeform CAPTure Queries all capture data output settings 5 151 WAVeform CAPTure DATE Queries the year month and day of the trigger of the specified capture 5 151 waveform WAVeform CAPTure END Sets or queries the end point to use when capturing waveform data 5 151 WAVeform CAPTure LENGth Queries the number of data points in the captured waveform 5 152 WAVeform CAPTure RECord Sets or queries the record number to use when capturing waveform data 5 152 WAVeform CAPTure RECord Queries the largest record number of the captured waveform 5 152 MAXimum IM DL850E 17EN 5 25 spuewwoy 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page WAVeform CAPTure RECord Queries the smallest record number of the captured waveform 5 152 MINimum WAVeform CAPTure SEND Queries specified capture waveform data 5 152 WAVeform CAPTure SRATe Queries the sample rate of the capture waveform specified by the 5 152 WAVeform TRACe command WAVeform CAPTure STARt Set
228. computation settings 5 107 MATH lt x gt FFT POINt Sets or queries the number of FFT points 5 107 MATH lt x gt FFT WINDow Sets or queries the time window for FFT computations 5 107 MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt Queries all digital filter settings 5 107 MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt BAND Sets or queries a digital filter band 5 107 MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt CUToff lt x gt Sets or queries a cutoff frequency of a digital filter 5 107 MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt TYPE Sets or queries the type of a digital filter 5 108 MATH lt x gt LABel Sets or queries a computed waveform label 5 108 MATH lt x gt MODE Sets or queries whether the DL850E DL850EV is in computation mode 5 108 MATH lt x gt MREFerence Sets or queries the computation range 5 108 MATH lt x gt OPERation Sets or queries the computation type 5 108 MATH lt x gt SCALe Queries all scaling settings 5 108 MATH lt x gt SCALe MODE Sets or queries a scale mode 5 108 MATH lt x gt SCALe VALue Sets or queries a set of upper and lower limits for manual scaling 5 108 MATH lt x gt SHIFt CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the amount of phase shift in the Shift computation when the 5 109 SCHannel lt x gt TIME internal clock is used MATH lt x gt SOURce lt x gt Sets or queries a sub channel s computation type 5 109 MATH lt x gt UNIT Sets or queries a unit string that is attached to computation results 5 109 MEASure Group MEASure Queries all t
229. cription lt NRf gt lt Frequency gt lt Time gt The selectable range varies depending on the range setting See the DL850E DL850EV Features Guide for this information CHANnel lt x gt FREQ POSition Function Sets or queries the vertical position for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ POSition lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ POSition lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 5 00 to 5 00 div in 0 01 div steps Example CHANNELS FREQ POSITION 1 00 CHANNELS FREQ POSITION gt CHANNEL5 FREQ POSITION 0 00 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SCALe Function Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SCALe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt Frequency gt lt Frequency gt lt Time gt lt Time gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SCALe lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt lt Frequency gt lt Time gt The selectable range varies depending on the range setting Example CHANNELS FREQ SCALE 5000 5000 CHANNELS FREQ SCALE gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SCALE 5 000000E 03 5 000000E 03 5 44 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup Function Queries all the FV settings of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup CFRequency Function Sets or queries the center frequency of an installed frequency module Syn
230. cros the maximum length of block data that can be used for the macro definition and the process when recursion is used in macro definitions Macro functions are not supported Reply to the IDN query See section 5 38 Common Command Group Size of storage area for protected user data for PUD and PUD PUD and PUD are not supported The length of the RDT and RDT resource names RDT and RDT are not supported IM DL850E 17EN App 5 xipueddy a Appendix 3 About the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard 19 The change in the status due to RST LRN RCL and SAV RST and LRN See section 5 38 Common Command Group RCL and SAV These common commands are not supported 20 The extent of the self test using the TST command Performs the same internal memory test that is executed when the user presses UTILITY and then the Self Test soft key and executes the MEMORY test 21 The structure of the extended return status See chapter 6 22 Whether each command is processed in an overlapped manner or sequentially See section 4 5 Synchronization with the Controller and chapter 5 23 The description of the execution of each command See the explanations of each command s function in chapter 5 the features guide IM DL850E 01EN and the user s manual IM DL850E 02EN App 6 IM DL850E 17EN Index A Page abbreviated TON riscuri inaani 4 5 analysis source start point FFT e
231. d by a controller YOKOGAWA DL850 COPE COREY Side Panel UTILITY key page 3 5 Press this key to set the communication interface for remote control and the GP IB address Sanae 100 120 220 240 V AC Sanae VA MAX 50 60 Hz ANAON 2 GP IB port This port is for connecting the DL850E DL850EV to a controller such as a PC using a GP IB cable For details on how to connect the DL850 DL850V to a controller see page 3 2 IM DL850E 17EN 3 1 Ieuondo edejsa U gi dD el 3 2 Connecting GP IB Cables Optional GP IB Cable The DL850E DL850EV is equipped with an IEEE Std 488 1978 24 pin GP IB connector Use GP IB cables that comply with IEEE St d 488 1978 Connection Procedure Connect a GP IB cable as shown below Precautions to Be Taken When Connecting Probes Securely fasten the GP IB cable connector screws On the PC end use a GP IB board or card made by National Instruments For more details see section 3 4 The DL850E DL850EV may not operate properly if the DL850E DL850EV is connected to the PC through converters such as a GP IB to USB converter For more details contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Several cables can be used to connect multiple devices However no more than
232. d logic channel for 5 145 EdgeOnA triggers TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic 5 145 CONDition channel for EdgeOnA triggers TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of 5 145 SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt the specified logic channel for EdgeOnA triggers TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic 5 145 SCHannel lt x gt CONDition channel for EdgeOnA triggers TRIGger EOA CONDition Sets or queries the achievement condition for EdgeOnA triggers 5 145 TRIGger HOLDoff Queries all hold off settings 5 145 TRIGger HOLDoff TIME Sets or queries the hold off time 5 145 TRIGger MODE Sets or queries the trigger mode 5 145 TRIGger OR Queries all OR trigger settings 5 146 TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel for 5 146 OR triggers TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic 5 146 CONDition channel for OR triggers TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of 5 146 SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt the specified logic channel for OR triggers TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the speci
233. d to the saving of a specific type of file Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat ABORt Function Aborts the saving of a specific type of file Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat ABORt Example FILE SAVE ASCii ABORT FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat CRANge lt x gt Function Sets or queries the cursor position for when data is to be saved using a cursor range Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat CRANGe lt x gt lt NRf gt FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat CRANGe lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt Resolution depends on the measurement length FILE SAVE ASCii FFT DPOint Function Sets or queries the type of decimal point that is used when saving specified type Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii FFT DPOint POINt COMMa FILE SAVE ASCii FFT DPOint Example FILE SAVE ASCII DPOINT POINT FILE SAVE ASCII DPOINT gt FILE SAVE ASCII DPOINT POINT FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat MEASure SETup SNAP EXECute Function Executes the saving of a specific type of file This is an overlap command Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat MEASure SETup SNAP EXECute Example FILE SAVE SETUP EXECUTE FILE SAVE ASCii EXTension Function Sets or queries the file name extension that is used when saving data in ASCII format Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii EXTension CSV MATLab FILE SAVE ASCii EXTension Example FILE SAVE ASCII
234. dual messages Precautions to Be Taken when Exchanging Messages e If the controller sends a program message that does not contain a query the controller can send the next program message at any time e If the controller sends a program message that contains a query the controller must finish receiving the response message before it can send the next program message If the controller sends the next program message before receiving the response message in its entirety an error will occur A response message that is not received in its entirety will be discarded e If the controller tries to receive a response message when there is none an error will occur If the controller tries to receive a response message before the transmission of the program message is complete an error will occur e If the controller sends a program message containing multiple message units but the message contains incomplete units the DL850E DL850EV will try to execute the ones that are believed to be complete However these attempts may not always be successful In addition if such a message contains queries the DL850E DL850EV may not necessary return responses Deadlock The DL850E DL850EV can store at least 1024 bytes of messages in its transmit and receive buffers the number of available bytes varies depending on the operating conditions If both the transmit and receive buffers become full at the same time the DL850E DL850EV will no longer b
235. e ACQuire MODE NORMal COUNt 1 lt PMT gt Unit Unit lt PMT gt lt PMT gt is a program message terminator The following three terminators are available NL new line Same as LF line feed ASCII code OAH END The END message as defined by IEEE 488 1 The data byte that is sent with the END message is the last data byte of the program message NL with an END message attached NL is not included in the program message NL END Program Message Unit Syntax The program message unit syntax is as follows C lt Program data gt lt Program header gt ai Space lt Program Header gt The program header indicates the command type For details see page 4 3 lt Program Data gt Attach program data if there are conditions that are required to execute a command Separate the program data from the header with a space ASCII code 20H If there are multiple data values separate each data value with a comma For details see page 4 6 Example ACQuire MODE NORMal lt PMT gt a ee Header Data Response Message The response message syntax is as follows La lt Response message unit gt al lt RMT gt lt Response Message Unit gt A response message consists of one or more response message units each response message unit corresponds to one response Separate each response message unit with a semicolon For d
236. e CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 UNIT Unit CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 UNIT gt CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 UNIT Unit Description This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt VTYPe command is set to UNSigned or SIGNed CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt BLABel lt x3 gt Function Sets or queries the specified bit label that is used when the data type is logic for the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt BLABel lt x3 gt lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt BLABel lt x3 gt lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 lt x3 gt 1 to 8 lt String gt Up to 16 characters Example CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 BLABEL Bitl CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 BLABEL gt CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 BLABEL Bitl Description This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt VTYPe command is set to LOGIc CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt LABel Function Sets or queries the label of the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt LABel lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt LABel lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 lt String gt Up to 16 characters Example CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 LABLE CH14 1 CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 LABLE gt CHANNEL
237. e DL850E DL850EV to a controller such as a PC using an Ethernet cable For details on how to connect the DL850E DL850EV to a controller see nanna A IM DL850E 17EN 1 1 adej9 U JOUIOYIZ 1 2 Ethernet Interface Features and Specifications Ethernet Interface Features Reception Features Allows you to specify the same settings that you can using the front panel keys Receives output requests for measured and computed data panel setting data and error codes Transmission Features The DL850E DL850EV can transmit measured and computed data The DL850E DL850EV can transmit panel setting data and the status byte The DL850E DL850EV can transmit error codes when errors occur Ethernet Interface Specifications Number of ports 1 Electrical and mechanical specifications IEEE802 3 Data rate 100 Mbps max Communication protocol TCP IP Connector RJ 45 Port number 10001 tcp Data Transfer Rate Switching The following table contains approximations of how much time it takes for the DL850E DL850EV to transmit waveform data Model DL850E DL850EV Controller PC Pentium4 3 2 GHz OS Windows XP Network adapter Intel PRO 1000 GT Desktop Adapter Programming language Visual C Number of Data Points Byte Data Word Data ASCII Data 1000 Approx 1 ms Approx 1 ms Approx 30 ms 10000 Approx 1 ms Approx 2 ms Approx 300 ms 100000 Approx 10 ms Approx 11 ms Approx 3 s 1000000 Approx 100 ms Approx 12
238. e SYST CLOC FORM command this command returns responses in the format shown above SYSTem CLOCk FORMat Function Sets or queries the date format Syntax SYSTem CLOCk FORMat lt NRf gt SYSTem CLOCk FORMat lt NRf gt 1 to 4 Example SYSTEM CLOCK FORMAT 1 SYSTEM CLOCK FORMAT gt SYSTEM CLOCK FORMAT 1 Description This command specifies the display format of the date The communication response format of the date is fixed 1 Year month number day 2 Day month number year 3 Day month English abbreviation year last two digits 4 Day month English abbreviation year 5 134 IM DL850E 17EN 5 32 SYSTem Group SYSTem CLOCk MODE Function Sets or queries whether the date and time are displayed Syntax SYSTem CLOCk MODE lt Boolean gt SY STem CLOCk MODE Example SYSTEM CLOCK MODE ON SYSTEM CLOCK MODE gt SYSTEM CLOCK MODE 1 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP Function Queries all SNTP settings Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SNTP SYSTem CLOCk SNTP EXECute Function Uses SNTP to set the date and time Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SNTP EXECute Example SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP EXECUTE SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime Function Sets or queries the time difference from GMT when SNTP is being used Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime lt String gt SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime lt String gt HH MM 12 00 to 12 00 Example SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP GMTTIME 09 00 SYSTEM CLOCK SNT
239. e University of California 1st Edition December 2013 YMI All Rights Reserved Copyright 2013 Yokogawa Meters amp Instruments Corporation IM DL850E 17EN Trademarks e Microsoft Internet Explorer MS DOS Windows Windows NT and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated GIGAZoom ENGINE is a registered trademark of Yokogawa Electric Corporation e In this manual the and TM symbols do not accompany their respective registered trademark or trademark names e Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Revisions 1st Edition December 2013 About the USB Interface and Ethernet Interface To use the USB communication features your PC must have the following software e Communication library TMCTL e YOKOGAWA USB TMC driver dedicated USB driver e To use the Ethernet communication features your PC must have the following software Communication library TMCTL To download the library and driver listed above go to the following website and then browse to the download page http Awww yokogawa com ymi IM DL850E 17EN How to Use This Manual Structure of the Manual This manual contains six chapters and an appendix Chapter 1 Ethernet Interface Describes the features and specifications of the
240. e able to operate This condition is called a deadlock If this happens you can resume operation after you have discarded response messages Deadlock will not occur if the program message including the lt PMT gt is kept below 1024 bytes Program messages that do not contain queries never cause deadlocks 4 2 IM DL850E 17EN 4 2 Commands Commands There are three types of commands program headers that a controller may send to the DL850E DL850EV The commands differ in their program header formats Common Command Header Commands that are defined in IEEE 488 2 1987 are called common commands The header format of a common command is shown below Be sure to include an asterisk at the beginning of a common command oe m Or Common command example CLS Compound Header Other commands that are specific to the DL850E DL850EV are classified and arranged in a hierarchy according to their functions The compound header syntax is shown below Be sure to use a colon to specify a lower hierarchical level lt Mnemonic gt Compound header example ACQuire MODE Simple Header These commands are functionally independent and are not contained within a hierarchy The format of a simple header is shown below lt Mnemonic gt e Simple header example STARt Note A lt mnemonic gt is an alphanumeric character string When Concatenating Commands Command Groups
241. e ls Noale acses o leals La lol 0 0 CAL When bit 3 CAL 1 Calibration operation is incomplete When bit 5 PRN 1 Printer operation is incomplete When bit 6 ACS 1 Media access is incomplete 5 68 IM DL850E 17EN 5 9 CURSor Group The commands in this group deal with cursor measurements You can make the same settings and queries of settings and measured values that you can by using the CURSOR key on the front panel If the selectable range of the time axis is lt NRf gt 5 to 5Sdiv the selectable range varies depending on settings such as the record length For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions under Notes about Cursor Measurement in chapter 9 of IM DL850E 01EN CURSor Function Queries all cursor measurement settings Syntax CURSor CURSor FFT Function Queries all FFT cursor settings Syntax CURSor FFT CURSor FFT MARKer FORM Function Sets or queries the form of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer FORM LINE MARK CURSor FFT MARKer FORM Example CURSOR FFT MARKER FORM LINE CURSOR FFT MARKER FORM gt CURSOR FFT MARKER FORM LINE CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Function Queries all settings of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt Function Queries all AF display settings AF is between the FFT cursors marker cu
242. e omitted If it is omitted the measured values of the newest waveform in history memory are queried If you include lt NRf gt the measured value of the waveform lt NRf gt times before the newest history waveform will be queried MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal Function Queries all distal mesial and proximal settings Syntax MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal MODE Function Sets or queries the distal mesial and proximal point mode setting Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt DPRoximal MODE PERCent UNIT MEASure CHANnel lt x gt DPRoximal MODE Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL MODE PERCENT MEASURE CHANNEL DPROXIMAL MODE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL MODE PERCENT MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal PERCent Function Sets or queries the distal mesial and proximal points as percentages Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal PERCent lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal PERCent lt NRf gt 0 to 100 in 0 1 steps CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 The order is lt Proximal gt lt Mesial gt lt Distal gt Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIM
243. e saved in ASCII format Syntax gt FILE SAVE FFT FINFormation lt Boolean gt FILE SAVE FFT FINFormation Example FILE SAVE FFT FINFORMATION ON FILE SAVE FFT FINFORMATION gt FILE SAVE FFT FINFORMATION ON FILE SAVE MEASure UNIT Function Sets or queries whether the unit of measure is included in each cell when measured results are saved Syntax FILE SAVE MEASure UNIT lt Boolean gt gt FILE SAVE MEASure UNIT Example FILE SAVE MEASURE UNIT ON FILE SAVE MEASURE UNIT gt FILE SAVE MEASURE UNIT ON Description The default value is OFF FILE SAVE NAME Function Sets or queries the name of the file that will be saved Syntax FILE SAVE NAME lt Filename gt FILE SAVE NAME Example FILE SAVE NAME CASE1 FILE SAVE NAME gt FILE SAVE NAME CASEL 5 92 IM DL850E 17EN 5 14 GONogo Group The commands in this group deal with GO NO GO determination You can make the same settings and queries of settings and measured values that you can by using the SHIFT MEASURE keys on the front panel If the selectable range of the time axis is lt NRf gt 5 to 5Sdiv the selectable range varies depending on settings such as the record length For details see Notes about Cursor Measurement in chapter 9 of IM DL850E 01EN GONogo Function Queries all GO NO GO determination settings Syntax GONogo GONogo ACONdition Function Sets or queries the GO NO GO dete
244. e start operation Syntax SSTart Example SSTART SSTart lt NRf gt Function Executes the single start operation and waits for its completion by using a timeout valuer Syntax SSTart lt NRf gt Example SSTart 100 Description lt NRf gt 1 to 36000 timeout value in 100 ms steps start and wait 36000 to 1 timeout value in 100 ms steps wait without starting IM DL850E 17EN puewwoy 5 28 STARt Group The command in this group is used to start waveform acquisition You can execute the same operation that you can by using the START STOP key on the front panel STARt Function Starts waveform acquisition Syntax STRT Example START 5 130 IM DL850E 17EN 5 29 STATus Group The commands in this group are used to make settings and queries related to the status report There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group For information about status reports see chapter 6 STATus STATus QENable Function Queries all the settings for the communication Function Sets or queries whether messages other than status feature errors will be stored to the error queue ON or Syntax STATus not OFF Syntax STATus QENable lt Boolean gt STATus CONDition STATus QENable Function Queries the contents of the condition register Example STATUS QENABLE ON Syntax STATus CONDition STATUS QENABLE Example STATUS CONDITION gt 16 gt STATUS QENABLE 1 De
245. e that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring when it performs one shot output Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut DATA lt x gt lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN O0SOut DATA lt x gt For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 DATA lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt String gt 0 to FF Example CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT DATA1 FF CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT DATA1 gt CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT DATA1 FEF Description Error 151 Invalid string data will occur if an invalid string is specified CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut DLC Data Length Code Function Sets or queries the byte size of the data section of the data frame used for one shot output Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut DLC lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN O0SOut DLC For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 lt NRf gt 0 to 15 Example CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT DLC 15 CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT DLC gt CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT DLC 15 5 36 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut EXECute One Shot Out Function Executes one shot output on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN O0SOut EXECute For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 Example CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT EXECUTE CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut FRAMe Function Sets or queries the format data or re
246. e value per bit of the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt FACTor lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt FACTor lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 FACTOR 1 0 CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 FACTOR gt CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 FACTOR 1 000E 00 Description This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt VTYPe command is set to UNSigned or SIGNed CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt OFFSet Function Sets or queries the scaling factor the offset value of the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt OFFSet lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt OFFSet lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 OFFSET 1 0 CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 OFFSET gt CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 OFFSET 1 000E 00 Description This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt VTYPe command is set to UNSigned or SIGNed CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe Function Sets or queries the display range the upper and lower limits of the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCH
247. easurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an 5 44 GETMeasure installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale MODE Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed frequency module 5 44 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed 5 44 LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y frequency module CHANne1l lt x gt FREQ LSCale UNIT Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed frequency module 5 44 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ OFFSet Sets or queries the offset of an installed frequency module 5 44 CHANne1 lt x gt FREQ POSition Sets or queries the vertical position for an installed frequency module 5 44 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SCALe Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed 5 44 frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup Queries all the FV settings of an installed frequency module 5 45 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup Sets or queries the center frequency of an installed frequency module 5 45 CFRequency CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup Sets or queries whether deceleration prediction is turned on for an installed 5 45 DECeleration frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DPULse Sets or queries the distance per pulse of an installed frequency module 5 45 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Queries all the filter settings of an installed frequency module 5 45 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Queries all the pulse averaging
248. ed 16 CH voltage input module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt BWIDth Function Sets or queries the bandwidth limit of an installed 16 CH voltage input module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt BWIDth FULL lt Frequency gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt BWIDth CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Frequency gt 500Hz Description Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH voltage input module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel 5 60 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt COUPling Function Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed 16 CH voltage input module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt COUPling DC GND OFF CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt COUPling CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 Description Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH voltage input module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel You cannot use this command or menu operations to change the setting while measurements are being performed
249. ed to release the key lock and a password has been set SYSTem KEYProtect MODE Function Sets or queries whether the keys are locked Syntax SYSTem KEYProtect MODE lt Boolean gt SYSTem KEYProtect MODE Example SYSTEM KEYPROTECT MODE ON SYSTEM KEYPROTECT MODE gt SYSTEM KEYPROTECT MODE 1 Description The key lock status is retained even when the DL850E DL850EV is restarted SYSTem KEYProtect RTYPe Release TYPe Function Sets or queries how to release the key lock Syntax SYSTem KEYProtect RTYPe KEY PASSword SYSTem KEYProtect RTYPe Example SYSTEM KEYPROTECT RTYPE PASSWORD SYSTEM KEYPROTECT RTYPE gt SYSTEM KEYPROTECT RTYPE PASSWORD SYSTem KEYProtect SPASsword Set password Function Sets the password that is used to release the key lock Syntax SYSTem KEYProtect SPASsword lt String gt lt String gt Up to 8 characters Example SYSTEM KEYPROTECT SPASSWORD ABC Description Send the command SYSTem KEYProtect SPASsword to reset the password 5 136 IM DL850E 17EN 5 32 SYSTem Group SYSTem KEYProtect TYPE Function Sets or queries which keys will be locked Syntax SYSTem KEYProtect TYPE ALL ESTart SYSTem KEYProtect TYPE Example SYSTEM KEYPROTECT TYPE ESTART SYSTEM KEYPROTECT TYPE gt SYSTEM KEYPROTECT TYPE ESTART SYSTem KEYResponse Function Sets or queries the response time of the START STOP key Syntax SYSTem KEYResponse QUICK SEC1
250. eeeneeeeeeee timeout cursor timeout GO NO GO timeout measure F timeout Single Start iioii esanian aiias time search ime Of cscs sssscdsececancestiessescussencondsscansiesuencessencs time synchronization 3 tme Unt TREQUENCY irissen i Ea time WINDOW ssoi saiia reniir ra raei eraa trigger B TIME OU sirsiran E 5 143 EdQGe OnA e A A E A 5 144 enhanced ossein ie NEEE Era T 5 147 SIMPE riasin E a S 5 147 T lt T1 T2 lt T 5 149 T lt Time 5 149 T gt Time 5 148 TSU ST 2 etree tenes iroueentnarahagehterh tele 5 149 UUM Osc sa pom anestae acne NE 5 149 wave window 5 148 trigger date history 5 99 trigger position 5 146 trigger time NISLOY sarasini 5 101 Oo UNILCTBCH VOMAGC si ecciees cesscieeis cerseeeave terion eacnacs 5 63 unit acceleration 5 36 unit analog voltage 5 59 HUTTE GAIN atest ofa E N A T 5 41 UNIT MEQUONGY seisan 5 44 5 47 unit LIN UIE MATH oisean aati n Gaeta 5 109 rit SAIN este tececdesacebiS oc seocenetnaciec dines a aaa a 5 54 unit temperature eecececeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeaeeeseeeeeteneeeetes 5 57 Update Pomdies aaan upper level query ai USB Caples a e aa i nania USB WUD wacivi stored tastecuin tends AE USB interface USB keyboard USEK VETICAUON siccsicisscoeitaxeeoconcous sasacocemascenetcuennessenseseencanans V Page VIDIN ISCH VOlAGE erian naa ae VIDI analog Voltage ronssin Val
251. eeesteeeeeees Window1 and Window2 combined display window layOUt eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Z Page ZOOM factor CAP U E mussau aiii 5 34 ZOON POST OM saos ea e e EE 5 160 Index 4 IM DL850E 17EN
252. eform display is displayed Syntax DISPlay LINDicator lt Boolean gt DISPlay LINDicator Example DISPLAY LINDICATOR ON DISPLAY LINDICATOR gt DISPLAY LINDICATOR 1 DISPlay MAPPing Function Sets or queries the waveform mapping mode for when the display format is set to an option other than 1 Syntax DISPlay MAPPing AUTO USERdefine DISPlay MAPPing Example DISPLAY MAPPING USERDEFINE DISPLAY MAPPING gt DISPLAY MAPPING USERDEFINE DISPlay MODE EKEY Esc Key Function Switches the menu area display mode This command causes the DL850E DL850EV to perform the same action as if its front panel ESC key had been pressed Syntax DISPlay MODE EKEY Example DISPLAY MODE EKEY Description This command is invalid when the communication interface is GP IB DISPlay MODE SET Function Sets the menu area display mode Syntax DISPlay MODE SET lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 Numeric monitor display 2 Full screen waveform display 3 Channel information display Example DSIPLAY MODE SET 1 DISPlay SDGRoup Select Display Group Function Sets or queries the number of the display group that is displayed Syntax DISPlay SDGRoup lt NR gt DISPlay SDGRoup lt NRf gt 1 to 4 Example DISPLAY SDGROUP 1 DISPLAY SDGROUP gt DISPLAY SDGROUP 1 Description The ANALysis lt x gt parameter is valid on models with the G5 option puewwoy DISPlay SVALue Scale VALUE Function S
253. ent HINKjet HLASer Function Sets or queries the screen comment HCOPy NETPrint TYPE Syntax HCOPy COMMent lt String gt Example HCOPY NETPRINT TYPE EINKJET HCOPy COMMent HCOPY NETPRINT TYPE lt String gt Up to 26 characters gt HCOPY NETPRINT TYPE EINKJET Example HCOPY COMMENT ABC HCOPY COMMENT gt HCOPY COMMENT ABC HCOPy DIRection Function Sets or queries the data output destination Syntax HCOPy DIRection PRINter NETPrinter HCOPy DIRection Example HCOPY DIRECTION FILE HCOPY DIRECTION gt HCOPY DIRECTION FILE HCOPy EXECute Function Executes data output Syntax HCOPy EXECute HCOPy NETPrint Function Queries all network printer output settings Syntax HCOPy NETPrint HCOPy NETPrint TONE Function Sets or queries whether data will be printed in color from the network printer Syntax HCOPy NETPrint TONE lt Boolean gt HCOPy NETPrint TONE Example HCOPY NETPRINT TONE ON HCOPY NETPRINT TONE gt HCOPY NETPRINT TONE 1 5 98 IM DL850E 17EN 5 16 HiSTory Group The commands in this group deal with loading data from history waveforms You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the HISTORY key on the front panel HISTory Function Queries all of the settings for the history feature Syntax HISTory HISTory ABORt Function Aborts the history search Syntax HISTory AB
254. epsciebizaveseesaieteeacteeuidenestcorttsececachssepacecsbeenode 6 4 6 4 Extended Event REGISIEfsisicstsiays cea saint a aaa a nein avian 6 5 6 5 Output and Error QUEUE Sessanta sheeceaaceseccapaietotactzssssnieceaeaeney 6 6 Appendix 1 ASCII Character GOJ S vsisi ai aao eiai App 1 Appendix 2 Error M SSage cc cesccecceeeeeeeeececeeeeeaaeaeeeeceaaeaeceecgeeaaeceseseseaaeaeeeesaeenaeeeeeeeees App 2 Appendix 3 About the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard eee eeneeeeeeee center enneeseenaeeeeeeeees App 5 vi IM DL850E 17EN Chapter 1 Ethernet Interface 1 1 Component Names and Functions Front Panel SHIFT key and CLEAR TRACE key Press these keys to switch from remote mode in which settings and operations are performed through remote commands to local mode in which operations can be performed using the DL850E DL850EV keys These keys are disabled when local lockout see page 1 2 has been activated by a controller YOKOGAWA DL850 COPE CORE Side Panel Samet 400 120 220 240 V AC 200 Samet MAX 50 60 Hz UTILITY key page 1 5 Press this key to set the communication interface and timeout value for remote control and to set the user name and password for user authentication Ethernet port This port is for connecting th
255. er 5 95 CAUSe determination is the cause of a NO GO judgment GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt Sets or queries the bit when the specified waveform parameter s source 5 95 LOGic BIT waveform for parameter determination is set to 720230 logic module GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt MODE Sets or queries the specified waveform parameter s reference condition for 5 95 parameter determination GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TRACe Sets or queries the specified waveform parameter s source waveform for 5 95 parameter determination GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE Queries for parameter determination the specified waveform parameter s 5 96 measurement item and upper and lower limits GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the measurement item for the 5 96 TYPE lt Parameter gt specified waveform parameter GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt Queries the measured value of the specified waveform parameter 5 96 VALue GONogo REMote Sets or queries the remote mode of GO NO GO determination 5 96 GONogo SEQuence Sets or queries the action mode of GO NO GO determination 5 96 GONogo TRANge Sets or queries the determination range of GO NO GO determination 5 96 GONogo WAIT Waits for the completion of GO NO GO determination by using a timeout 5 96 value GONogo ZONE Queries all waveform zone determination settings 5 96 GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt Queries all settings
256. eries how to release the key lock 5 136 Release TYPe SYSTem KEYProtect SPASsword Sets the password that is used to release the key lock 5 136 Set password SYSTem KEYProtect TYPE Sets or queries which keys will be locked 5 137 SYSTem KEYResponse Sets or queries the response time of the START STOP key 5 137 SYSTem LANGuage Sets or queries the message language 5 137 SYSTem LCD Queries all LCD settings 5 137 SYSTem LCD AUTO Queries all the settings for the feature that automatically turns off the 5 137 backlight SYSTem LCD AUTO MODE Sets or queries whether the feature that automatically turns off the backlight 5 137 is on SYSTem LCD AUTO TIME Sets or queries the amount of time until the backlight is turned off 5 137 SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness Sets or queries the LCD brightness 5 137 SYSTem LCD MODE Sets or queries whether the backlight is on 5 137 SYSTem LOGic Queries all logic display settings 5 137 SYSTem LOGic BORDer Bit Order Sets or queries the bit order that is used when you display logic module data 5 137 as waveforms SYSTem LOGic CORDer Cursor Sets or queries the bit order that is used when you use cursors to display 5 137 Order logic module data as bits SYSTem LOGic NFORmat Numerical Sets or queries the numeric display format of logic module data 5 138 Format ee SYSTem MLANguage Sets or queries the menu language 5 138 SYSTem OVERView Displays the system information 5 138
257. es a file name The following types of expressions are possible Form Example lt NRf gt lt Character data gt lt String data gt 1 CASE CASE lt NRf gt is rounded to an 8 digit integer and converted to ASCII code The result is the file name example 1 becomes 00000001 Negative values are not allowed e The first 12 characters of lt character data gt or the first 16 characters of lt string data gt are the file name e Response messages are always expressed in the lt string data gt form e For information about the number of characters in a file name expressed in the lt string data form gt see the DL850E DL850EV User s Manual lt Block data gt lt Block data gt is any 8 bit data It is only used in response messages on the DL850E DL850EV The syntax is as follows Form Example N lt N digit decimal number gt 800000010ABCDEFGHIJ lt data byte sequence gt N Indicates that the data is lt block data gt N indicates the number of succeeding data bytes digits in ASCII code e lt N digit decimal number gt Indicates the number of bytes of data example 00000010 10 bytes lt Data byte sequence gt Expresses the actual data example ABCDEFGHIJ e Data is comprised of 8 bit values 0 to 255 This means that the ASCII code OAH which stands for NL can also be included in the data Hence care must be taken when programming the controller I
258. es the path on the storage medium that waveform data is saved to when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion SAVE PATH Example GONOGO ACTION SAVE PATH gt GONOGO ACTION SAVE PATH PATH USB UTIL 5 94 IM DL850E 17EN 5 14 GONogo Group GONogo ACTion SAVE TYPE Function Sets or queries the file format that waveforms are saved as on the storage medium when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion SAVE TYPE ASCii BINary FLOat GONogo ACTion SAVE TYPE Example GONOGO ACTION SAVE TYPE BINARY GONOGO ACTION SAVE TYPE gt GONOGO ACTION SAVE TYPE BINARY GONogo COUNt Function Queries the number of GO NO GO determinations that were performed Syntax GONogo COUNt Example GONOGO COUNT gt GONOGO COUNT 10 GONogo LOGic Function Sets or queries the GO NO GO determination logic Syntax GONogo LOGic AND OR GONogo LOGic Example GONOGO LOGIC AND GONOGO LOGIC gt GONOGO LOGIC AND GONogo MODE Function Sets or queries the GO NO GO determination mode Syntax GONogo MODE OFF PARameter ZONE GONogo MODE Example GONOGO MODE ZONE GONOGO MODE gt GONOGO MODE ZONE GONogo NGCount Function Queries the GO NO GO determination NO GO count Syntax GONogo NGCount Example GONOGO NGCOUNT gt GONOGO NGCOUNT 10 GONogo PARameter Function Queries all parameter determination settings Syntax GONogo PARameter GONogo
259. etails on the response message syntax see the next page Example ACQUIRE MODE NORMAL COUNT 1 lt RMT gt Unit Unit lt RMT gt RMT stands for response message terminator The response message terminator is NL END IM DL850E 17EN M JA AQ Bulwwesboig 4 1 Messages Response Message Unit Syntax The response message unit syntax is as follows lt Response data gt pi lt Response header gt Space lt Response Header gt A response header sometimes precedes the response data A space separates the data from the header For details see page 4 5 lt Response Data gt Response data contains the content of the response If there are multiple data values each data value is separated by a comma For details see page 4 5 Example 1 25E 02 lt RMT gt ACQUIRE MODE NORMAL lt RMT gt we a A J Data Header Data If there are multiple queries in a program message responses are returned in the same order that the queries were received in In most cases a single query returns a single response message unit but there are a few queries that return multiple units The first response message unit always corresponds to the first query but the nth response unit may not necessarily correspond to the nth query If you want to make sure that every response is retrieved divide the program messages into indivi
260. ets or queries whether scale values are displayed Syntax DISPlay SVALue lt Boolean gt DISPlay SVALue Example DISPLAY SVALUE ON DISPLAY SVALUE gt DISPLAY SVALUE 1 DISPlay TLABel Trace LABEL Function Sets or queries whether waveform labels are displayed Syntax DISPlay TLABel lt Boolean gt DISPlay TLABel Example DISPLAY TLABEL ON DISPLAY TLABEL gt DISPLAY TLABEL 1 IM DL850E 17EN 5 83 5 11 EVENt Group You can use the commands in this group to set data for and query data from events such as dual capture and external terminal input events EVENt Function Queries all event waveform settings Syntax gt EVENt EVENt MEVent EXECute Function Manually inserts an event Syntax EVENt MEVent EXECute EVENt MEVent MODE Manual Event Function Sets or queries whether the event waveform s manual events are displayed Syntax EVENt MEVent MODE lt Boolean gt EVENt MEVent MODE Example EVENT MEVENT MODE ON EVENT MEVENT MODE gt EVENT MEVENT MODE ON EVENt MEVent SLOPe Function Sets or queries the manual event external event terminal polarity Syntax EVENt MEVent SLOPe FALL RISE EVENt MEVent SLOPe Example EVENT MEVENT SLOPE RISE EVENT MEVENT SLOPE gt EVENT MEVENT SLOPE RISE 5 84 IM DL850E 17EN 5 12 FFT Group The commands in this group deal with FFT analysis You can make the same settings and queries that yo
261. etup cannot be executed during hard disk recording ASETup UNDO Function Undoes auto setup Syntax ASETup UNDO 5 30 IM DL850E 17EN 5 4 CALibrate Group The commands in this group deal with calibration You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the SHIFT SETUP keys on the front panel CALibrate Function Queries all calibration settings Syntax CALibrate CALibrate EXECute NSTart Function Executes calibration This command is different from the common command CAL in that this command does not return the results when the calibration is completed This is an overlap command Syntax CAL EXEC Description If NSTart is omitted measurement starts after the execution of calibration If NSTart is specified measurement does not start after the execution of calibration e Calibration cannot be executed during free run measurement e Calibration cannot be executed during hard disk recording CALibrate MODE Function Sets or queries the auto calibration mode Syntax CALibrate MODE AUTO OFF CALibrate MODE CALIBRATE MODE AUTO CALIBRATE MODE gt CALIBRATE MODE AUTO Example CALibrate SBOCancel CHANnel lt x gt Strain Balance amp Offset Cancel Function Sets or queries whether the specified channel is included in the balancing of all channels on strain modules or the DC offset canceling of all channels on voltage measurement
262. etween channels Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay COUNt Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY COUNT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY COUNT 3 MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation Function Queries a statistic of the delay between channels Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEAN gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEAN 6 6666667E 06 MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure Function Queries all the settings for a source waveform for measuring the delay between channels of a waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure COUNt Function Sets or queries the number of source waveforms at which delay between channels will be measured for a waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure COUNt lt NRf gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 9 Example MEASURE
263. eues Output Queue The output queue stores query response messages For example if you send a WAVeform SEND command which requests for the transmission of acquired data the data is stored in the output queue until it is read As shown below data is stored in order and read from the oldest message first The output queue is cleared when Anew message is received from the controller e A deadlock occurs see page 4 2 e A device clear command DCL or SDC is received e The DL850E DL850EV is turned off and then back on The CLS command does not clear the output queue You can determine whether the output queue is empty by checking bit 4 in the status byte MAV gt gt D2 gt D1 D1 D2 D1 Error Queue When an error occurs the error queue stores the error number and message For example if the DL850E DL850EV receives an incorrect program message from the controller the error number 113 and the error message Undefined header are stored in the error queue when the DL850E DL850EV displays the error message You can use the STATus ERRor query to read the contents of the error queue Like the output queue the messages in the error queue are read from the oldest one first If the error queue overflows the last message is replaced with the following message 350 Queue overflow The error queue is cleared when e A CLS command is received e The DL850E DL8
264. f a V cursor on the T Y display 5 77 VALue CURSor WAIT While the DL850E DL850EV is waiting for the specified CURSor command 5 77 to finish it will wait the time specified by the CURSor WAIT timeout value until it begins processing the subsequent command CURSor XY Queries all cursor settings for the X Y display 5 77 CURSor XY HORizontal Queries all H cursor settings for the X Y display 5 77 CURSOr XY HORizontal DY Queries all AY axis value settings The AY axis value is between the H 5 78 cursors on the X Y display CURSor XY HORizontal DY STATe Sets or queries whether the AY axis value between the H cursors on the X Y 5 78 display is displayed CURSor XY HORizontal DY VALue Queries the AY axis value between the H cursors on the X Y display 5 78 CURSor XY HORizontal Sets or queries H cursor positions on the X Y display 5 78 POSition lt x gt CURSor XY HORizontal TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the H 5 78 cursors on the X Y display CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt Queries all Y axis value settings for an H cursor on the X Y display 5 78 CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for an H cursor on the X Y display 5 78 STATe is displayed CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt Queries the Y axis value of an H cursor on the X Y display 5 78 VALue CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Queries all marker cursor settings for the X Y display 5 78 C
265. fied logic 5 146 SCHannel lt x gt CONDition channel for OR triggers TRIGger OR EXTernal TYPE Sets or queries the type of external trigger that is used with OR triggers 5 146 TRIGger OUT Queries all trigger output settings 5 146 TRIGger OUT TIME Sets or queries the H pulse interval that is used when the trigger output 5 146 terminal output type is 1 TRIGger OUT TYPE Sets or queries the trigger output terminal output type 5 146 TRIGger POSition Sets or queries the trigger position 5 146 TRIGger SCOunt Single N Sets the number of times the trigger is to be activated when the trigger mode 5 146 Count is Single N or queries the current setting TRIGger SIMPle Queries all simple trigger settings 5 147 IM DL850E 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page TRIGger SIMPle EXTernal Sets or queries the external trigger slope 5 147 SLOPe TRIGger SIMPle HYSTeresis Sets or queries the hysteresis for simple triggers 5 147 TRIGger SIMPle LEVel Sets or queries the trigger level of the channel specified by TRIGger SIMPle 5 147 SOURce for simple triggers TRIGger SIMPle LOGic Queries all simple trigger logic trigger settings 5 147 TRIGger SIMPle LOGic BIT Sets or queries the bit that set
266. following three terminators are available e IFC Interface Clear REN Remote Enable IDY Identify IM DL850E 17EN 3 7 Ieuondo 2e uU gl d9 el 3 6 Responses to Interface Messages Multi line Messages Multi line messages are sent over eight data lines The messages are grouped as follows Address Commands Some address commands are valid when a device is designated as a listener and some are valid when it is designated as a talker The following five commands are available Commands available to a device designated as a listener e GTL Go To Local e SDC Selected Device Clear e PPC Parallel Poll Configure e GET Group Execute Trigger Commands available to a device designated as a talker e TCT Take Control Universal Commands Universal commands are available to all devices regardless of their listener or talker designation The following five commands are available e LLO Local Lockout e DCL Device Clear e PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure e SPE Serial Poll Enable e SPD Serial Poll Disable There are other interface messages listener address talk address and secondary commands Interface Messages Multi line Messages Uni line Messages Address Universal commands commands IFC REN IDY GTL LLO SDC DCL PPC PPU GET SPE TCT SPD Listener Talker Secondary address address command
267. ge POSition lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage POSition lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 5 00 to 5 00 div in 0 01 div steps Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE POSITION 1 00 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE POSITION gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE POSITION 1 00 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage PROBe Function Sets or queries the probe type of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage PROBe lt NRf gt C10 C100 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage PROBe lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 10 100 1000 Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE PROBE 10 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE PROBE gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE PROBE 10 Description You cannot set or query the probe type for the 701261 701262 or 701265 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCALe Function Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCALe lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Current gt lt Current gt lt NR gt lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCALe lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Voltage gt lt Current gt and lt NRf gt The selectable range varies depending on the range setting Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE SCALE 250 250 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE SCALE gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE SCALE 250 000E 00 250 000E 00 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt Function Queries all settings of an install
268. gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence TRACe Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE TRACE 1 MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE TRACE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE TRACE 1 MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay STATe Function Sets or queries the display format of the delay parameters of the specified channel Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay STATe TIME OFF DEGRee MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay STATe MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY STATE TIME MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY STATE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY STATE TIME Example 5 116 IM DL850E 17EN 5 21 MEASure Group MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay VALue Function Queries a measured delay value of the specified waveform s parameter Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay VALue lt NRf gt Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY VALUE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY VALUE 0 0000000E 00 Description This command returns NAN if the value cannot be measured e lt NRf gt is used to specify which iteration of statistical processing to query the parameter value from This command returns NAN if the specified value does not exist lt NRf gt can b
269. gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR TY MARKER M4 X VALUE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M4 X VALUE 3 0000000E 03 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y Function Queries all Y axis settings for a marker cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a marker cursor on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR TY MARKER M4 Y STATE ON CURSOR TY MARKER M4 Y STATE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M4 Y STATE 1 puewwog CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of a marker cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR TY MARKER M4 Y VALUE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M4 Y VALUE 41 666667E 03 CURSor TY TYPE Function Sets or queries the cursor type on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY TYPE OFF HORizontal VERTical MARKer DEGRee HAVertical CURSor TY TYPE Example CURSOR TY TYPE MARKER CURSOR TY TYPE gt CURSOR TY TYPE MARKER CURSor TY VERTical Function Queries all V cursor settings for the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical CURSor TY VERTical DX Function Queries all AX value settings AX is between the V cursors on the T Y display Syn
270. gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP UPULSE 3 Example CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup VUNit Function Sets or queries the velocity unit of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup VUNit lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup VUNit lt String gt Up to 4 characters CHANNELS FREQ SETUP VUNIT m s CHANNELS FREQ SETUP VUNIT gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP VUNIT m s Example CHANnel lt x gt FREQ VDIV Function Sets or queries the Value Div setting of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ VDIV lt NRE gt lt Frequency gt lt Time gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ VDIV lt NRf gt lt Frequency gt lt Time gt See the DL850E DL850EV Features Guide for this information CHANNELS FREQ VDIV 20 CHANNELS FREQ VDIV gt CHANNEL5 FREQ VDIV 20 Example CHANnel lt x gt FREQ ZOOM Function Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ ZOOM lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ ZOOM lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 1 0 111 0 125 0 143 0 167 0 2 0 25 0 33 0 4 0 5 0 556 0 625 0 667 0 714 0 8 0 833 1 1 11 1 25 1 33 1 43 1 67 2 2 22 2 5 3 33 Example CHANNELS FREQ ZOOM 1 CHANNELS FREQ ZOOM gt CHANNEL5 FREQ ZOOM 1 CHANnel lt x gt LABel Function Sets or queries the waveform label of a channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LABel lt S
271. gt VALue lt NRf gt lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 lt Parameter gt AVGFreq DUTYcycle FREQuency PERiod PNUMber lt NRf gt 1 to the number of history entries MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 FREQUENCY VALUE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 FREQUENCY VALUE 50 00000E 00 Description This command is valid only on logic module channels e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later Example MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Sets or queries whether all the waveform parameters of the specified channel are ON or OFF Syntax MEBASure CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 16 lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 Description For channels that have sub channels use the MEAS CHAN SCH command MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt ALL Function Sets all the measurement items of the specified channel to ON or OFF Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt ALL lt Boolean gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt ALL lt Boolean gt lt x gt 1 to 16 lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 MEASURE CHANNEL1 ALL ON MEASURE CHANNEL7 SCHANNEL1 ALL ON Description For channels that have sub channels use the MEAS CHAN SCH ALL command Example MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CDEStination
272. gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt TYPE Function Sets or queries the type of thermocouple that is used when the 16 CH temperature voltage input module performs temperature measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt TYPE KIE J TILIUINIRI S B W Au7fe CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt TYPE lt x gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 TYPE K CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 TYPE gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 TYPE K Description This command is valid when the input coupling is set to TC Error 113 Undefined header will occur if the input coupling is set to a setting other than TC 5 56 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt UNIT Function Sets or queries the unit that is used when the 16 CH temperature voltage input module performs temperature measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt UNIT C F K CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature SCHannel lt x2 gt UNIT lt x gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 UNIT C CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 UNIT gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCHANNEL1 UNIT C Description This command is valid when the input coupling is set to TC Error 113 Undefined header will occur if the input coupling is set to a sett
273. he 701265 FULL lt Frequency gt lt Frequency gt 2 8 30 Hz For the 701261 FULL lt Frequency gt lt Frequency gt 2 8 30 Hz For the 701262 AUTO FULL lt Frequency gt lt Frequency gt 2 8 30 Hz CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE BWIDTH FULL CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE BWIDTH gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE BWIDTH FULL CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature COUPling Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed module that can measure temperature For the 701265 CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature COUPling DC TC GND For the 701261 or 701262 CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature COUPling AC DC TC GND lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature COUPling CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE COUPLING TC CHANNELS TEMPERATURE COUPLING gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE COUPLING TC CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature DUPeriod Data update period Function Syntax Example Description Sets or queries the data update period of the 16 CH temperature voltage input module CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature DUPeriod lt Time gt CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature DUPeriod lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Time gt 100ms 300ms 1s 3s CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE DUPERIOD 100ms CHANNELS TEMPERATURE DUPERIOD gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE DUPERIOD 1 000E 01 This command is valid when it is applied to a 16 CH temperature voltage input module CH
274. he scale setup mode when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration Syntax CHANnel lt x gt ACCL VARiable lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL VARiable lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 ACCL VARIABLE 0 CHANNEL1 ACCL VARIABLE gt CHANNEL1 ACCL VARIABLE 0 CHANnel lt x gt ACCL ZOOM Function Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration Syntax CHANnel lt x gt ACCL ZOOM lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL ZOOM lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 5 0 556 0 625 0 667 0 714 0 8 0 833 1 1 11 1 25 1 33 1 43 1 67 2 2 22 2 5 3 33 4 5 6 67 8 10 12 5 16 7 20 25 40 50 CHANNEL1 ACCL ZOOM 1 000 CHANNEL1 ACCL ZOOM gt CHANNEL1 ACCL Z00M 1 000 Example CHANnel lt x gt CAN Function Queries all the settings of an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut Function Queries all the one shot output settings of an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut DATA lt x gt Function Sets or queries the data frame value used by an installed modul
275. he settings for automated measurement of waveform 5 110 parameters MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Sets the specified bit of the specified channel to on or off at once 5 110 ALL MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Sets or queries whether the copy destination channel is on or off for when 5 110 CDEStination parameter measurement items are copied between channels and bits MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Copies the on off setting of the specified bit of the specified channel to 5 110 COPY another specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Queries all settings related to the delay of the specified bit of the specified 5 110 DELay channel on a logic module MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Queries the statistics count of the delay of the specified bit of the specified 5 110 DELay COUNt channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Queries the statistical value of the delay of the specified bit of the specified 5 110 DELay MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDE_ channel Viation IM DL850E 17EN spuewwoy 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Queries all settings related to the source waveform used to measure the 5 111 DELay MEASure delay of the specified bit of the spec
276. he source for simple triggers Syntax TRIGger SIMPle SOURce lt NRf gt lt NRf gt EXTernal LINE TIME TRIGger SIMPle SOURce lt NRf gt 1 to 16 L lt NRf gt If the channel has sub channels this is the range of sub channel numbers Example TRIGGER SIMPLE SOURCE 1 TRIGGER SIMPLE SOURCE gt TRIGGER SIMPLE SOURCE 1 TRIGger SOURce Function Queries all the settings of the trigger source for enhanced triggers Syntax TRIGger SOURce IM DL850E 17EN 5 147 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Queries all the settings of the specified channel s trigger source for enhanced triggers Syntax TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CENTer Function Sets or queries the window trigger center for enhanced triggers TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CENTer lt Voltage gt lt NRf gt lt Current gt TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CENTer CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CENTER 1 TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CENTER gt TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CENTER 1 00000E 00 Syntax Example TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt HYSTeresis Function Sets or queries the specified channel s hys
277. he specified LIN bus signal frame Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN FRAMe lt x2 gt DLENgth lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN FRAMe lt x2 gt DLENgth lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 64 lt NRf gt 1 to 8 CHANNEL14 LIN FRAME1 DLENGTH 8 CHANNEL14 LIN FRAME1 DLENGTH gt CHANNEL14 LIN FRAME1 DLENGTH 8 Example CHANnel lt x gt LIN FRAMe lt x2 gt CHECksum Function Sets or queries the checksum mode of the specified LIN bus signal frame Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN FRAMe lt x2 gt CHECksum CLASsic ENHanced CHANnel lt x gt LIN FRAMe lt x2 gt CHECksum lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 64 CHANNEL14 LIN FRAMEO CHECKSUM CLASSIC CHANNEL14 LIN FRAMEO CHECKSUM gt CHANNEL14 LIN FRAMEO CHECKSUM CLASSIC Example CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Function Queries all settings of the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt INPut Function Sets or queries the input on off setting of the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt INPut lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt INPut lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 60 CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 INPUT ON CHANNEL14 LIN SCHANNEL1 I
278. he waveform parameters of the specified 5 114 SCHannel lt x gt channel are ON or OFF MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets all the measurement items of the specified channel to ON or OFF 5 114 SCHannel lt x gt ALL MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries whether the copy destination channel is ON or OFF for when 5 114 SCHannel lt x gt CDEStination parameter measurement items are copied between channels CopyDestination MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Copies all the measurement item ON OFF settings from one specified 5 114 SCHannel lt x gt COPY channel to another specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Queries all delay settings 5 114 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Queries the statistics count of the delay between channels 5 115 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay COUNt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Queries a statistic of the delay between channels 5 115 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MA Ximum MEAN MINimum SDEViation MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Queries all the settings for a source waveform for measuring the delay 5 115 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay between channels of a waveform MEASure MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the number of source waveforms at which delay between 5 115 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay channels will be measured for a waveform MEASure COUNt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries a sour
279. ic Select from the available strings in braces Example Select the input coupling of CH1 gt CHANnel1 COUPling AC DC DC50 GND lt Boolean gt Indicates on and off Specify ON OFF ora value Example Turn on the CH1 display gt CHANnel1 DISPlay ON lt String data gt User defined string Example Comment attached to screen data output gt HCOPy COMMent ABCDEF Indicates a file name Example Save file name gt FILE SAVE WAVeform NAME CASE1 lt Filename gt lt Block data gt Data that contains 8 bit values Example Response to acquired waveform data gt 800000010ABCDEFGHIJ lt Decimal gt lt Decimal gt indicates a value expressed as a decimal number as shown in the table below Decimal values are written in the NR form as specified in ANSI X3 42 1975 Symbol Description Examples lt NR1 gt Integer 125 1 1000 lt NR2 gt Fixed point number 125 0 90 001 lt NR3 gt Floating point number 125 0E 0 9E 1 1E4 lt NRf gt Any form from lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt e The DL850E DL850EV can receive decimal values that are sent from the controller in any form from lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt This is expressed as lt NRf gt e The DL850E DL850EV returns a response to the controller in one of the forms from lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt depending on the query The same form is used regardless of the size of the value For the lt NR3 gt form the plus sign
280. ications IEEE St d 488 1978 See the table below IEEE S d 488 2 1992 ISO ASCII codes Addressable mode Press UTILITY and then the Remote Ctrl soft key Then set the network interface Device to GPIB and the address to a number from 0 to 30 Press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE to switch the DL850E DL850EV to local mode These keys are disabled when local lockout has been activated by a controller Function Subset Name Description Source handshaking SH1 Full source handshaking capability Acceptor handshaking AH1 Full acceptor handshaking capability Talker T6 Basic talker capability serial polling untalk on MLA My Listen Address and no talk only capability Listener L4 Basic listener capability unlisten on MTA My Talk Address and no listen only capability Service request SR1 Full service request capability Remote local RL1 Full remote local capability Parallel polling PPO No parallel poll capability Device clear DC1 Full device clear capability Device trigger DTO No device trigger capability Controller co No controller capability Electric characteristics E1 Open collector Data Transfer Rate The following table contains approximations of how much time it takes for the DL850E DL850EV to transmit waveform data Model DL850E DL850EV Controller PC Pentium 4 3 2 GHz GP IB GPIB USB B OS Windows XP Programming language Visual C Number of Data Points Byte Data
281. ies a sub channel s computation type Syntax MATH lt x gt SOURce lt x gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt MATH lt x gt SOURCe lt x gt MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 SOURCce lt x gt s lt x gt 1 2 Description You cannot use this command when no modules are installed MATH lt x gt UNIT Function Sets or queries a unit string that is attached to computation results Syntax MATH lt x gt UNIT lt String gt MATH lt x gt UNIT MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt String gt Up to 4 characters Example MATH1 UNIT UU MATH1 UNIT gt MATH1 UNIT UU IM DL850E 17EN 5 109 puewwoy 5 21 MEASure Group The commands in this group deal with the automated measurement of waveform parameters You can make the same settings and queries of settings and measured values that you can by using the MEASURE key on the front panel If the selectable range of the time axis is lt NRf gt 5 to 5Sdiv the selectable range varies depending on settings such as the record length For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions under Notes about Cursor Measurement in chapter 9 of IM DL850E 01EN MEASure Function Queries all the settings for automated measurement of waveform parameters Syntax MEASure MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt ALL Function Sets the specified bit of the specified channel to on or off at once Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 g
282. ies all averaging computation settings 5 105 MATH lt x gt AVERage CCOunt Sets or queries the cycle count of cycle averaging 5 105 MATH lt x gt AVERage COUNt Sets or queries the average count of linear averaging 5 105 MATH lt x gt AVERage EWEight Sets or queries the attenuation constant of exponential averaging 5 105 MATH lt x gt AVERage MODE Sets or queries the averaging mode 5 105 MATH lt x gt AVERage TYPE Sets or queries the averaging domain 5 105 MATH lt x gt BINary Queries all binary computation settings 5 105 MATH lt x gt BINary CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the threshold level of the specified channel for binary 5 106 SCHannel lt x gt THReshold computations MATH lt x gt CONStant lt x gt Sets or queries a constant for user defined computation 5 106 MATH lt x gt DEFine Sets or queries an expression for user defined computation 5 106 MATH lt x gt DISPlay Sets or queries whether computations will be performed 5 106 MATH lt x gt ESHift CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the amount of phase shift in the Shift computation when an 5 106 SCHannel lt x gt COUNt external clock is used MATH lt x gt EXPonential Queries all exponential window settings 5 106 MATH lt x gt EXPonential DRATe Sets or queries the exponential window s damping rate 5 107 MATH lt x gt EXPonential FORCe lt x gt Sets or queries the exponential window s FORCe1 or FORCez2 value 5 107 MATH lt x gt FFT Queries all FFT
283. ies the waveform parameter measurement range 5 120 MEASure WAIT Waits for the completion of measurement by using a timeout valuer 5 120 MEASure XY lt x gt Queries all the settings for automated measurement of XY waveform 5 120 parameters MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt Queries all the settings of a waveform parameter measurement item 5 120 MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt Queries the count of measured values for cyclic statistical processing of a 5 120 COUNt waveform parameter IM DL850E 17EN spuewwoy 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt M Queries a cyclic statistical processing value of a waveform parameter 5 120 AXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation 9 MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt Sets or queries whether the specified waveform s waveform parameter 5 120 STATe measurement item is ON or OFF MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt Queries the measured value of a waveform parameter 5 120 VALue MONitor Group MONitor ASENd Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of all channels 5 121 MONitor ASENd CHANnel lt x gt Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of the specified channel 5 121 SCHannel lt x gt MONitor BITS CHANnel lt x gt Queries the effective bit length of the specified channel s data 5 121 SCHannel lt x g
284. ified channel on a logic module MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Sets or queries the edge detection count of the source waveform used to 5 111 DELay MEASure COUNt measure the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Sets or queries the edge polarity of the source waveform used to measure 5 111 ELay MEASure SLOPe the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Queries all settings related to the reference waveform used to measure the 5 111 DELay REFerence delay of the specified bit of the specified channel on a logic module MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Sets or queries the edge detection count of the reference waveform used to 5 111 DELay REFerence COUNt measure the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Sets or queries the reference waveform bit used to measure the delay of the 5 112 DELay REFerence LOGic BIT specified bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Sets or queries the edge polarity of the reference waveform used to measure 5 112 DELay REFerence SLOPe the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt Sets or queries whether to set the reference for measuring the delay of the 5 112 DELay REFerence SOURce specified bit of the specified channel to a trigger point or to
285. iggers 5 149 TRIGger TIMer INTerval Sets or queries the trigger interval for time triggers 5 149 TRIGger TIMer TIME Sets or queries the time for time triggers 5 149 TRIGger TITime Queries all T1 lt T lt T2 trigger settings 5 149 TRIGger TITime TIME lt x gt Sets or queries the pulse width for T1 lt T lt T2 triggers 5 149 TRIGger TLTime Queries all T lt Time trigger settings 5 149 TRIGger TLTime TIME Sets or queries the pulse width for T lt Time triggers 5 149 TRIGger TOTime Queries all T lt T1 T2 lt T trigger settings 5 149 TRIGger TOTime TIME lt x gt Sets or queries the pulse width for T lt T1 T2 lt T triggers 5 149 TRIGger TYPE Sets or queries the trigger type 5 150 TRIGger WWINdow Queries all wave window trigger settings 5 150 TRIGger WWINdow CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified channel for wave window triggers 5 150 TRIGger WWINdow FREQuency Sets or queries the cycle frequency for wave window triggers 5 150 TRIGger WWINdow REFCycle Sets or queries the reference cycle for wave window triggers 5 150 TRIGger WWINdow SYNC Queries all synchronization channel settings for wave window triggers 5 150 TRIGger WWINdow SYNC Sets or queries the hysteresis of the synchronization channel for wave 5 150 HYSTeresis window triggers TRIGger WWINdow SYNC LEVel Sets or queries the level of the synchronization channel for wave window 5 150 triggers TRIGger WWINdow SYNC TRACe Sets or queries the syn
286. imeout value Syntax GONogo WAIT lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 864000 in units of 100 ms Example Setting the timeout value to 5 seconds GONOGO WAIT 50 gt 0 Description The DL850E DL850EV returns 0 if the operation finishes before the timer expires and returns 1 if the timer expires GONogo ZONE Function Queries all waveform zone determination settings Syntax GONogo ZONE GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt Function Queries all settings for the specified determination pattern for waveform zone determination Syntax GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt CAUSe Function Queries whether the specified determination pattern for waveform zone determination is the cause of a NO GO judgment Syntax GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt CAUSe lt x gt 1 to 16 GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 CAUSE gt GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 CAUSE 0 Description When the determination pattern is the cause of a NO GO result the DL850E DL850EV returns 1 Otherwise the DL850E DL850EV returns 0 Example GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt MODE Function Sets or queries the specified determination pattern s reference condition for waveform zone determination Syntax GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt MODE IN OUT OFF GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt MODE lt x gt 1 to 16 GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 MODE IN GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 MODE gt GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 MODE IN Example 5 96 IM
287. imum MEAN MINimum SDEViatio n lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 lt Parameter gt AVGFreq DUTYcycle FREQuency PERiod PNUMber MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 FREQUENCY MEAN gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 FREQUENCY MEAN 50 00000E 00 Description This command is valid only on logic module channels e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later IM DL850E 17EN 5 113 puewwoy 5 21 MEASure Group MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter gt STATe Function Sets or queries the on off state of the waveform parameter of the specified bit of the specified channel Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter gt STATe lt Boolean gt MEASure CHANnel lt xl1 gt BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter gt STATe lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 lt Parameter gt AVGFreq DUTYcycle FREQuency PERiod PNUMber MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 FREQUENCY STATE ON MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 FREQUENCY STATE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 FREQUENCY STATE ON Description The default value is OFF This command is valid only on logic module channels This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later Example MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter gt VALue Function Queries the measured waveform parameter value of the specified bit of the specified channel Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt lt Parameter
288. ing other than TC CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature TYPE Function Sets or queries the thermocouple type that is used when temperature measurements are performed Syntax CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature TYPE K E J T L U N R S B W Au7 e CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature TYPE lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNELS TEMPERATURE TYPE K CHANNELS TEMPERATURE TYPE gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE TYPE K Example CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature UNIT Function Sets or queries the unit that is used when temperature measurements are performed Syntax CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature UNIT C K CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature UNIT lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE UNIT C CHANNEL TEMPERATURE UNIT gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE UNIT C CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Function Queries all settings of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage BWIDth Function Sets or queries the bandwidth limit of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage BWIDth FULL lt Frequency gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage BWIDth lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE BWIDTH FULL CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE BWIDTH gt CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE BWIDTH FULL Example Description List of Frequency Settings per Voltage Module Type List of Frequency Type Settings Notes 500Hz 5k Hz 50k
289. ion This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt AVERage CCOunt Function Sets or queries the cycle count of cycle averaging Syntax MATH lt x gt AVERage CCOunt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt AVERage CCOunt lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify lt NRf gt 10 to 1800 Example MATH1 AVERAGE CCOUNT 720 MATH1 AVERAGE CCOUNT gt MATH1 AVERAGE CCOUNT 720 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt AVERage COUNt Function Sets or queries the average count of linear averaging Syntax MATH lt x gt AVERage COUNt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt AVERage COUNt lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify lt NRf gt 2 to 128 in 2n steps Example MATH1 AVERAGE COUNT 16 MATH1 AVERAGE COUNT gt MATH1 AVERAGE COUNT 16 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt AVERage EWEight Function Sets or queries the attenuation constant of exponential averaging Syntax MATH lt x gt AVERage EWEight lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt AVERage EWEight lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify lt NRf gt 2 to 256 in 2n steps Example MATH1 AVERAGE EWEIGHT 16 MATH1 AVERAGE EWEIGHT gt MATH1 AVERAGE EWEIGHT 16 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option
290. is set to 1 when there is data to be transmitted in response to a query For details see page 6 6 e Bit 5 ESB Event Summary Bit This bit is 1 when the logical AND of the standard event register and its corresponding event register is 1 In other words this bit is set to 1 when a certain event takes place inside the instrument For details see page 6 4 e Bit 6 RQS Request Service MSS Master Status Summary This bit is 1 when the logical AND of the status byte excluding bit 6 and the service request enable register is 1 In other words this bit is set to 1 when the instrument requests service from the controller RQS is set to 1 when the MSS bit changes from 0 to 1 and is cleared when serial polling is carried out or when the MSS bit changes to 0 Bit Masking To mask a bit in the status byte so that it does not trigger an SRQ set the corresponding bit of the service request enable register to zero For example to mask bit 2 EAV so that service is not requested when an error occurs set bit 2 of the service request enable register to 0 Do this using the SRE command To query whether each bit of the service request enable register is 1 or 0 use SRE For details on the SRE command see chapter 5 Status Byte Operation A service request is issued when bit 6 in the status byte becomes 1 Bit 6 is set to 1 when any other bit becomes 1 when the corresponding bit of the servi
291. ition mode of the source waveform Syntax WAVeform TYPE Example WAVEFORM TYPE gt WAVEFORM TYPE NORMAL Description This command returns AVERage ENVelope BAVerage or NORMal 5 156 IM DL850E 17EN 5 36 XY Group The commands in this group deal with the XY display You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the SHIFT DISPLAY X Y keys on the front panel 7 XY Function Queries all XY settings Syntax XY XY CDISplay Combine Display Function Sets or queries whether to combine the displays of Window1 and Window2 on the XY waveform display Syntax XY CDISplay lt Boolean gt XY CDISplay Example XY CDISPLAY ON XY CDISPLAY gt XY CDISPLAY 1 XY DOTConnect Function Sets or queries whether dot connect is ON or OFF for XY waveforms Syntax XY DOTConnect lt Boolean gt XY DOTConnect Example XY DOTCONNECT ON XY DOTCONNECT gt XY DOTCONNECT 1 XY DECimation Function Sets or queries the number of dots after decimation that XY waveforms use Syntax XY DECimation lt NRf gt XY DECimation lt NRf gt 2000 100000 Example XY DECIMATION 2000 XY DECIMATION gt XY DECIMATION 2000 XY MARKer Function Sets or queries whether XY pen markers are on Syntax XY MARKer lt Boolean gt XY MARKer Example XY MARKER ON XY MARKER gt XY MARKER 1 XY TCLear Trace Clear On Start Function Sets or queries whe
292. l output type is 1 Syntax TRIGger OUT TIME lt Time gt TRIGger OUT TIME lt Time gt 1ms 50ms 100ms 500ms Example TRIGGER OUT TIME 0 05 TRIGGER OUT TIME gt TRIGGER OUT TIME 50 000000E 03 TRIGger OUT TYPE Function Sets or queries the trigger output terminal output type Syntax TRIGger OUT TYPE lt NRf gt TRIGger OUT TYPE lt NRf gt 1 2 Example TRIGGER OUT TYPE 2 TRIGGER OUT TYPE gt TRIGGER OUT TYPE 2 Description The DL850E DL850EV generates H pulses for a fixed interval when it triggers This corresponds to the Pulse setting on the menu The DL850E DL850EV generates an L pulse when it triggers The L pulse is held during the post operation The DL850E DL850EV switches to an H pulse when the post operation finishes This corresponds to the Normal setting on the menu TRIGger POSition Function Sets or queries the trigger position Syntax TRIGger POSition lt NRf gt TRIGger POSition lt NRf gt 0 to 100 in 0 1 steps TRIGGER POSITION 50 TRIGGER POSITION gt TRIGGER POSITION 50 Example TRIGger SCOunt Single N Count Function Sets the number of times the trigger is to be activated when the trigger mode is Single N or queries the current setting Syntax TRIGger SCOunt lt NRf gt TRIGger SCOunt lt NRf gt 1 to 5000 Example TRIGGER SCOUNT 100 TRIGGER SCOUNT gt TRIGGER SCOUNT 100 5 146 IM DL850E 17EN 5 34 TRIGger Grou
293. lap command is completed Example COMMunicate OPSE H0040 FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASE1 WAI CHANnel1 VDIV lt PMT gt The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to select which command to apply WAT to Here it is applied to the media access command WAI is executed before CHANnel1 VDIV so CHANne1l1 VDIV is not executed until the file loading is completed Using the COMMunicate OVERlap command The COMMunicate OVERLap command enables or disables overlapping Example COMMunicate OVERlap HFFBF FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASE1 CHANnell1 VDIV lt PMT gt COMMunicate OVERlap HFFBF enables overlapping for commands other than media access Because overlapping of file loading is disabled FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASE1 operates in the same way as a sequential command Thus CHANne11 VDIV is not executed until file loading is completed Using the OPC Command The OPC command sets the OPC bit which is bit 0 in the standard event register see page 6 4 to 1 when the overlapping is completed Example COMMunicate OPSE H0040 ESE 1 ESR SRE 32 FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASEL OPC lt PMT gt Read the response to ESR Wait for a service request CHANnel1l VDIV lt PMT gt The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to select which command to apply OPC to Here it is applied to the media access command ESE 1 a
294. le SYSTEM USBKEYBOARD ENGLISH SYSTEM USBKEYBOARD gt SYSTEM USBKEYBOARD ENGLISH 5 138 IM DL850E 17EN 5 33 TiMebase Group The commands in this group deal with time bases You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the TIME DIV knob on the front panel TIMebase Function Queries all time base settings Syntax TIMebase TIMebase CHANnel lt x gt SRATe Function Queries the sample rate of the specified channel Syntax TIMebase CHANnel lt x gt SRATe TIMebase CHANnel lt x gt SRATe lt x gt 1 to 16 Example TIMEBASE CHANNEL1 SRATE gt TIMEBASE CHANNEL1 SRATE 1 0000000E 06 Description This command returns the current setting the reserved value for the next measurement Use the WAVeform CAPTure SRATe command to query the measured data puewwoy TIMebase SOURce Function Sets or queries the time base Syntax TIMebase SOURce EXTernal INTernal TIMebase SOURce Example TIMEBASE SOURCE INTERNAL TIMEBASE SOURCE gt TIMEBASE SOURCE INTERNAL TIMebase SRATe Function Sets or queries the sample rate Syntax TIMebase SRATE lt Frequency gt TIMebase SRATE lt Frequency gt 5Hz 10Hz 20Hz 50Hz 100Hz 20MHz 50MHz 100MHz Example TIMEBASE SRATE 500kHz TIMEBASE SRATE gt TIMEBASE SRATE 500 00000E 03 TIMebase TDIV Function Sets or queries the T DIV value Syntax TIMebase TDIV lt Time g
295. le HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM1 SOURCE 1 HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM1 SOURCE gt HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM1 SOURCE 1 HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE Function Queries for history waveform parameter searches the specified parameter s automatically measured item and upper and lower limits Syntax HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE lt x gt 1 to 4 HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE lt Parameter gt Function Sets or queries the specified parameter s upper and lower limits for history waveform parameter searches Syntax HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE lt Parameter gt lt Voltage DONTcare gt lt Voltage DONTcare gt lt Current DONTcare gt Current DONTcare gt Time DONTcare gt Time DONTcare gt lt lt lt lt Frequency DONTcare gt lt Frequency D lt ONTcare gt lt lt NRf gt DONTcare gt lt NRf gt DONTcare gt lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Parameter gt AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDth1 BWIDth2 DELay DUTYcycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWIDth PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TY 1Integ TY2Integ HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt VALue Function Queries the specified parameter s measured value for history waveform parameter searches Syntax HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE VALue lt x gt 1to4 Example
296. ler chapter 5 124 Too many digits Limit numeric values to 255 digits or less 4 6 and chapter 5 128 Numeric data not allowed Use a data type other than lt NRf gt 4 6 and chapter 5 131 Invalid suffix Check the units where the syntax contains lt Voltage gt lt Time gt or 4 6 lt Frequency gt 134 Suffix too long Check the units where the syntax contains lt Voltage gt lt Time gt or 4 6 lt Frequency gt 138 Suffix not allowed Units of measurement can only be used where the syntax contains 4 6 lt Voltage gt lt Time gt or lt Frequency gt 141 Invalid character data Be sure to select one of the listed choices when the syntax Chapters 4 contains and 5 144 Character data too long Check the spelling of the strings when the syntax contains Chapter 5 148 Character data not allowed Use a data type other than lt String gt Chapter 5 150 String data error Enclose parameters with single or double quotation marks where 4 7 the syntax contains lt String gt 151 Invalid string data The parameter is either too long or it contains an unusable Chapter 5 character 158 String data not allowed Use a data type other than lt String gt Chapter 5 161 Invalid block data lt Block data gt cannot be used 4 7 and chapter 5 168 Block data not allowed lt Block data gt cannot be used 4 7 and chapter 5 App 2 IM DL850E 17EN Appendix 2 Error Messages Code Mess
297. ll up EQUENCY iiir pulse frequency 3 PuUlSEnOtate sii ltteer cae a aeai pulse averaging frequency 2 ccecceceeeteeeteeeeeeteeeeeteee pulse count reset frequency s pulses per rotation frequency ccceeseeeeeeteeteeeeeeeee Q Page UCI Y i ic sateen ca eceprteae ctvarenwaence E 4 1 R FANGS eiae anona Aaaa N A ENEAS record lengt sorne aar Ee i REE NEEE reference condition history 2 reference condition parameter c ceseeeeeteeteee 5 95 reference condition waveform Zone ccceeeeeeeteeeees 5 96 A T A A E E 4 7 remote and local modes switching 0 05 1 2 2 2 3 4 remote or local temote LEMMING serisinin roarai eiaa 5 138 REN Remote Emable 2 06205 assuneteuy cae renin 3 7 ESPON SE ansni wee 4 5 response message wee 4 4 responses without headers wee 4 5 FESYVNCMOMIZALON JUMP See cesceaczas ceceasaeceeceeseei aE 5 38 RJC temperattire 2 cetera nee el 5 55 5 56 Index 2 IM DL850E 17EN S Page sample POINTS annsira Nenie EEN EEEREN 5 37 Sample Talens ae r E 5 139 save file name 5 92 scaling MATH 5 108 scaling coefficient 16CH voltage 5 61 scaling coefficient analog voltage cseeeeseeeteees 5 58 scaling coefficient frequency ccceceeeeeteeeeeeteeeeteees 5 43 scaling coefficient Strain ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeneees 5 52 scaling con
298. lt value is RISE e This command is valid only on logic module channels e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence Function Queries all settings related to the reference waveform used to measure the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel on a logic module Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence Description This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence COUNt Function Sets or queries the edge detection count of the reference waveform used to measure the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence COUNt lt NRf gt MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence COUNt lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to 9 Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE COUNT 2 MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE COUNT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE COUNT 2 Description e The default value is 1 e This command is valid only on logic module channels e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later IM DL850E 17EN 5 111 puewwoy 5 21 MEASure Group MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence LOGic BIT Function Syntax Example Sets or querie
299. lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 5 to 5 the resolution depends on the measurement length CURSOR TY VERTICAL POSITION2 4 CURSOR TY VERTICAL POSITION2 gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL POSITION2 4 000000000000 Example CURSor TY VERTical TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the V cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical TRACe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt ALL CURSor TY VERTical TRACe lt NRf gt 1 to 16 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to 60 only when it is necessary to specify the sub channel CURSOR TY VERTICAL TRACE 2 CURSOR TY VERTICAL TRACE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL TRACE 2 Example CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt Function Queries all X axis value settings for a V cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 5 76 IM DL850E 17EN 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a V cursor on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt STATe lt x gt 1 2 Example CURSOR TY VERTICAL X1 STATE 1 CURSOR TY VERTICAL X1 STATE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL X1 STATE 1 CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt VALue Function Queries the X axis value of a V cursor on the T Y display
300. lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE MODE AXB CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE MODE gt CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE MODE AXB CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y Function Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt x gt 1 to 16 P1X or P2X s lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 0 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 P1Y or P2Y s lt NRf gt 9 9999E 25 to 1E 25 0 1E 25 to 9 9999E 25 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE P1X 1 00000E 00 CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE P1X gt CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE P1X 1 00000E 00 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale UNIT Function Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale UNIT lt x gt 1 to 16 lt String gt Up to 4 characters Example CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE UNIT UU CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE UNIT gt CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE UNIT UU CHANnel lt x gt FREQ OFFSet Function Sets or queries the offset of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ OFFSet lt NRf gt lt Frequency gt lt Time gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ OFFSet lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL5 FREQ OFFSET 1 CHANNELS FREQ OFFSET gt CHANNEL5 FREQ OFFSET 0 000000E 00 Des
301. lt x gt EXPonential lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option 5 106 IM DL850E 17EN 5 20 MATH Group MATH lt x gt EXPonential DRATe Function Sets or queries the exponential window s damping rate Syntax MATH lt x gt EXPonential DRATe lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt EXPonential DRATe lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify lt NRf gt 1 to 100 MATH1 EXPONENTIAL DRATE 100 MATH1 EXPONENTIAL DRATE gt MATH1 EXPONENTIAL DRATE 100 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option Example MATH lt x gt EXPonential FORCe lt x gt Function Sets or queries the exponential window s FORCe1 or FORCez2 value Syntax MATH lt x gt EXPonential FORCe lt x gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt EXPonential FORCe lt x gt MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify FORCex lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 1 to 100 MATH1 EXPONENTIAL FORCE1 100 MATH1 EXPONENTIAL FORCE1 gt MATH1 EXPONENTIAL FORCE1 100 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 Example option MATH lt x gt FFT Function Queries all FFT computation settings Syntax MATH lt x gt FFT lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify MATH lt x gt FFT POINt F
302. mand returns NAN for any statistics that cannot be processed MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt STATe Function Syntax Example Sets or queries whether the specified waveform s waveform parameter measurement item is ON or OFF MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt STATe lt Parameter gt AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDth1 BWIDth2 DUTYcycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWIDth PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TY 1Integ TY2Integ MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK STATE ON MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK STATE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK STATE 1 5 118 IM DL850E 17EN 5 21 MEASure Group MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt VALue Function Queries the measured value of a waveform parameter Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt VALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 to 48000 lt Parameter gt AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDth1 BWIDth2 DUTY cycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWIDth PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TY 1Integ TY2Integ MEASURE CHANNEL PTOPEAK VALUE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK VALUE 30 516667
303. ments CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCALe Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed 5 60 module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Queries all settings of an installed 16 CH voltage input module 5 60 SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Sets or queries the bandwidth limit of an installed 16 CH voltage input 5 60 SCHannel lt x gt BWIDth module CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed 16 CH voltage input 5 61 SCHannel lt x gt COUPLling module CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Sets or queries whether the display is inverted ON or not OFF for an 5 61 SCHannel lt x gt INVert installed 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Sets or queries the label string of the specified sub channel for the specified 5 61 SCHannel lt x gt LABel 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed 16 CH voltage input 5 61 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for 5 61 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale AVALue an installed 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the offset value B that is used during linear scaling for an 5 62 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale BVALue installed 16 CH voltage input module CHANnel lt x1 gt
304. ming method 5 32 CAPTure ACTion SAVE CDIRectory Sets the current directory on the storage medium where the screen capture 5 32 is saved to as a capture action CAPTure ACTion SAVE MODE Sets or queries whether captured data is saved to a storage medium as a 5 32 capture action CAPTure ACTion SAVE NAME Sets or queries the file name that is used when captured data is saved toa 5 33 storage medium IM DL850E 17EN spuewwoy 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CAPTure ACTion SAVE TYPE Sets or queries the data format that is used when captured data is saved to 5 33 a storage medium CAPTure ANALysis lt x gt FORMat Sets or queries the capture window display format of display group P and H 5 33 number of divisions in the vertical direction CAPTure BITDisp Sets or queries whether captured event waveforms are displayed 5 33 CAPTure CAPNum MAXimum Queries the largest number of the captured waveforms 5 33 CAPTure CAPNum MINimum Queries the smallest number of the captured waveforms 5 33 CAPTure FORMat Sets or queries the display format of the capture window 5 33 CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt Queries all group display settings of the capture window 5 33 CAPTure GROUp lt x1 gt FORMat Sets or queries the capture window display format of the specified display 5 33 group CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Sets or queries the
305. mmand Function Page CHANnel lt x gt LIN FRAMe lt x2 gt Sets or queries the data length of the specified LIN bus signal frame 5 48 DLENgth CHANnel lt x gt LIN FRAMe lt x2 gt Sets or queries the checksum mode of the specified LIN bus signal frame 5 48 CHECksum CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Queries all settings of the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor 5 48 LIN busses CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Sets or queries the input on off setting of the specified subchannel of a 5 48 INPut module that can monitor LIN busses CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt ID_ Sets or queries the frame ID of the specified subchannel of a module that 5 48 can monitor LIN busses CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Sets or queries the start bit number of the specified subchannel of amodule 5 48 SBIT Start Bit that can monitor LIN busses CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Sets or queries the bit length of the specified subchannel of a module that 5 48 BICount Bit Count can monitor LIN busses CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Sets or queries the endian mode that is used to save data to internal memory 5 49 BORDer Byte Order for the specified subchannel of a module that can monitor LIN busses CHANnel lt x gt LIN SCHannel lt x2 gt Sets or queries the data type of the specified subchannel of a module that 5 49 VTYPe Value Type can monitor LIN busses CHANnel lt x
306. mmand is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe command is set to UNSigned or SIGNed CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt INPut Function Syntax Example Sets or queries whether a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring is ON or OFF CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt INPut lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt INPut For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 INPUT ON CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 INPUT gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 INPUT 1 CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt LABel Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the label of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt LABel lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt LABel For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 lt String gt Up to 16 characters CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 LABEL AAAA CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 LABEL gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 LABEL AAAA IM DL850E 17EN 5 39 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt MFORmat Function Syntax E
307. modules Syntax CALibrate SBOCancel CHANnel lt x gt lt Boolean gt CALibrate SBOCancel CHANnel lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 16 CALIBRATE SBOCANCEL CHANNEL12 ON CALIBRATE SBOCANCEL CHANNEL12 gt CALIBRATE SBOCANCEL CHANNEL12 1 Description This command is valid when any of the following modules is installed 701270 STRAIN_NDIS 701271 STRAIN_DSUB 701250 HS10M12 701251 HS1M16 701255 NONISO_10M12 720210 HS100M12 Example CALibrate SBOCancel EXECute Strain Balance amp Offset Cancel Function Executes the balancing of all channels on strain modules or the DC offset canceling of all channels on voltage measurement modules Syntax CALibrate SBOCancel EXECute Example CALIBRATE SBOCANCEL EXECUTE Description This command is valid when any of the following modules is installed 701270 STRAIN_NDIS 701271 STRAIN_DSUB 701250 HS10M12 701251 HS1M16 701255 NONISO_10M12 720210 HS100M12 IM DL850E 17EN 5 31 puewwoy 5 5 CAPTure Group The commands in this group deal with the dual capture feature You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the SHIFT ACQUIRE keys on the front panel CAPTure Function Queries all dual capture settings Syntax CAPTure CAPTure ACTion Function Queries all dual capture action settings Syntax CAPTure ACTion CAPTure ACTion BUZZer Function Sets or queries whether a beep is sounded as one of
308. mote of the frame used for one shot output Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut FRAMe DATA REMote CHANnel lt x gt CAN O0SOut FRAMe For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT FRAME DATA CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT FRAME gt CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT FRAME DATA Example CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MFORmat Message Format Function Sets or queries the message format standard or extended of the frame used for one shot output Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MFORmat EXTended STANdard CHANnel lt x gt CAN 0SOut MFORmat For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 Example CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT MFORMAT EXTENDED CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT MFORMAT gt CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT MFORMAT EXTENDED CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MID Message ID Function Sets or queries the message ID of the frame used for one shot output CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MID lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN 0SOut MID For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 e When the CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MFORmat command is set to STANdard lt String gt 0 to 7FF e When the CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MFORmat command is set to EXTended lt String gt 0 to 1 FFFFFFF CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT MID 7FF CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT MID gt CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT MID 7FE Syntax Example CHANne1l lt
309. munication interface settings To set the user name and password access the UTILITY menu the Network menu and then the FTP Server screen For details see section 17 3 Accessing the DL850E DL850EV from a PC FTP Server in the DL850E DL850EV User s Manual IM DL850E 02EN IM DL850E 17EN 1 3 adej9 U JOUIOYIZ 1 3 Connecting to the Ethernet Interface Connection Procedure Connect a UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair or STP Shielded Twisted Pair cable that is connected to a hub or other network device to the Ethernet port on the DL850E DL850EV side panel Hub or router that supports 1000BASE T 100BASE TX Controller PC or work station DL850E DL850EV Lococo ooo UTP or STP cable Network card straight cable Ethernet port RJ 45 modular jack Precautions to Be Taken When Connecting Probes To connect the DL850E DL850EV to a PC be sure to use straight cables and to connect through a hub or router Proper operation is not guaranteed for a one to one connection using a cross cable Use a network cable that conforms to the transfer speed of your network Note For details on how to connect the DL850E DL850EV to a network see section 17 1 Connecting the DL850E DL850EV to a Network in the DL850E DL850EV User s Manual IM DL850E 02EN IM DL850E 17EN 1 4 Configuring the DL850E DL850EV Ethernet Se
310. n 5 53 DISPlaytype MODE installed strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Sets or queries the unit prefix that is used during linear scaling when the 5 53 DISPlaytype SUBunit display mode is set to Float for an installed strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an 5 53 GETMeasure installed strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale MODE Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed strain module 5 53 CHANnel lt x gt STRain Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed 5 54 LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2yY strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale SHUNt Executes shunt calibration 5 54 CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale UNIT Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed strain module 5 54 CHANnel lt x gt STRain RANGe Sets or queries the measurement range of an installed strain module 5 54 CHANnel lt x gt STRain SCALe Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed strain 5 54 module CHANnel lt x gt STRain UNIT Sets or queries the unit of an installed strain module 5 54 CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature Queries all the settings of a module if the module in the specified channel 5 54 can measure temperature CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BURNout Sets or queries whether burnout will be detected when temperature 5 54 measurements are performed CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature
311. n Queries the GPS signal reception state when using GPS for time synchronization Syntax SYSTem GPS STATe LOCK Normal reception UNLock No reception Example SYSTEM GPS STATE gt SYSTEM GPS STATE LOCK Description This command is valid on models with the C30 option SYSTem HAFormat Horizontal Axis Format Function Sets or queries the horizontal axis display mode Syntax SYSTem HAFormat AUTO ABSolute RELative SYSTem HAFormat AUTO Auto ABSolute Absolute time RELative Relative time Example SYSTEM HAFORMAT AUTO SYSTEM HAFORMAT gt SYSTEM HAFORMAT AUTO Description This command is valid on models with the G5 option IM DL850E 17EN 5 135 5 32 SYSTem Group SYSTem IRIG Function Queries all IRIG settings Syntax SYSTem IRIG SYSTem IRIG FORMat Function Sets or queries the IRIG format for synchronizing the time through IRIG signals Syntax SYSTem IRIG FORMat A B SYSTem IRIG FORMat Example SYSTEM IRIG FORMAT A SYSTEM IRIG FORMAT gt SYSTEM IRIG FORMAT A Description This command is valid on models with the C20 option SYSTem IRIG IMPedance Function Sets or queries the input impedance for synchronizing the time through IRIG signals Syntax SYSTem IRIG IMPedance lt NRf gt SYSTem IRIG IMPedance lt NRf gt 50 or 5000 Example SYSTEM IRIG IMPEDANCE 50 SYSTEM IRIG IMPEDANCE gt SYSTEM IRIG IMPEDANCE 50 Description This command
312. n the CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BRATe command is set to MANual CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT TERMinator Function Sets or queries whether the 124 Q terminator between CAN_H and CAN_L on the CAN bus line is ON or OFF Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT TERMinator Boolean CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT TERMinator For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 Example CHANNEL13 CAN PORT TERMINATOR ON CHANNEL13 CAN PORT TERMINATOR gt CHANNEL13 CAN PORT TERMINATOR 1 CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Function Queries all the settings of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BCOunt Byte Count Function Sets or queries the byte count of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BCOunt AUTO lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BCOunt For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 lt NRf gt 1 to 8 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BCOUNT 8 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BCO
313. n the specified channel s numeric monitor data is converted to a physical value Syntax MONitor RANGe CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel Example MONITOR RANGE CHANNEL1 gt MONITOR RANGE CHANNEL1 5 0000000E 00 MONitor SEND ALL Function Sends the numeric monitor data in binary format Syntax MONitor SEND ALL Example MON SEND ALL gt 9 9 digit number of bytes data byte sequence Description e The number of output bytes for each channel is based on the value specified by the MONitor FORMat CHANnel lt x gt command e Channels whose input is off are not sent MONitor SEND CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Sends the numeric monitor data in binary format of the specified channel Syntax MONitor SEND CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 MON SEND CHAN1 gt 9 9 digit number of bytes data byte sequence Example Description The number of output bytes for each channel is based on the value specified by the MONitor FORMat CHANnel lt x gt command e Channels whose input is off are not sent MONitor VERBose Function Set whether to include labels and units in the response to the MONitor ASENd command Syntax MONitor VERBose lt Boolean gt MONitor VERBose MONITOR VERBOSE ON MONIT
314. nd SRE 32 indicate that a service request is only generated when the OPC bit is 1 ESR clears the standard event register In the example above CHANne11 VDIV is not executed until a service request is generated IM DL850E 17EN 4 5 Synchronization with the Controller e Using the OPC Query The OPC query generates a response when an overlapping operation is completed Example COMMunicate OPSE H0040 FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASE1 OPC lt PMT gt Read the response to OPC CHANnel1 VDIV lt PMT gt The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to select which command to apply OPC to Here it is applied to the media access command Because OPC does not generate a response until the overlapping operation is completed the file loading will have been completed by the time the response to OPC is read Note Most commands are sequential commands Overlap commands are indicated as such in chapter 5 All other commands are sequential commands Achieving Synchronization without Using Overlap Commands Even with sequential commands synchronization with non communication events such as triggers is sometimes required to correctly query the measured data For example if the following program message is transmitted to query waveform data acquired with the trigger mode set to single the WAVeform SEND command may be exec
315. ng operated on in bytes 5 89 gt FILE DIRectory MDIRectory Creates a directory in the current directory 5 90 Make Directory FILE DIRectory PATH Queries the current directory 5 90 FILE LOAD BINary ABORt Aborts the loading of binary data 5 90 FILE LOAD BINary SETup SNAP Executes the loading of various types of data This is an overlap command 5 90 EXECute FILE SAVE Queries all file name settings for saving files 5 90 FILE SAVE ANAMing Sets or queries the auto naming mode for saving files 5 90 FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Queries all the settings related to the saving of a specific type of file 5 90 9 FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Aborts the saving of a specific type of file 5 90 ABORt FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Sets or queries the cursor position for when data is to be saved using a 5 90 CRANge lt x gt cursor range FILE SAVE ASCii FFT DPOint Sets or queries the type of decimal point that is used when saving specified 5 90 type FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Executes the saving of a specific type of file This is an overlap command 5 90 MEASure SETup SNAP EXECute FILE SAVE ASCii EXTension Sets or queries the file name extension that is used when saving data in 5 90 ASCII format FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Sets or queries what waveforms the history memory feature will save fora 5 91 HISTory specific type of data FILE SAVE ASCii INTerval Sets or queries the data removal interval tha
316. ngle start operation 5 129 SSTart lt NRf gt Executes the single start operation and waits for its completion by using a 5 129 timeout valuer STARt Group STARt Starts waveform acquisition 5 130 STATus Group STATus Queries all the settings for the communication status feature 5 131 STATus CONDition Queries the contents of the condition register 5 131 STATus EESE Sets or queries the extended event enable register 5 131 STATus EESR Queries the contents of the extended event register and clears the register 5 131 STATus ERRor Queries the error code and message of the last error that has occurred 5 131 STATus FILTer lt x gt Sets or queries the transition filter 5 131 STATus QENable Sets or queries whether messages other than errors will be stored to the 5 131 error queue ON or not OFF STATus OMESsage Sets or queries whether message information will be attached to the 5 131 response to the STAT ERR query ON or not OFF STOP Group STOP Stops waveform acquisition 5 132 STORe Group STORe Queries all the information related to setup data in the internal memory 5 133 STORe SETup lt x gt Queries information about the setup data in the specified location of the 5 133 internal memory STORe SETup lt x gt CLEar Clear the setup data that is stored to the specified location in the internal 5 133 memory STORe SETup lt x gt COMMent Sets or queries the comment for the setup data that is stored to
317. nneeeenaes 4 8 Commands 5 1 List Of ComManGS sirisser arinina ena ani Goes aa aaea Eaa aN ae aaa LEAR 5 1 5 2 AC QUIRG GUP ideaa E Eep aene a Earr a Ea E 5 28 5 3 ASE TUP GrOUD irs piar EE a EE E R E 5 30 5 4 CALDiate Group sate a aa teens ae otic a a 5 31 55 GAP TUT GOUD ranira ea Ra aE E a cea da wast EAE ne AAEE Ea E AESi A 5 32 5 6 GRANGE Group see e ea e re saet 5 35 5 7 CLEar Group messia Seek aces iii ean aia cian EE ERE 5 66 5 8 COMMu micate Gro p s ceresexesssccccersccssrcezesracanseatesaet a heats menses 5 67 5 9 CURSO GOUD kirru ir N aia a aan nisin 5 69 O10 DISPl y Grow Pix frrrt a a e 5 81 511 EVENE Group si tsseia iia minania inom ann ARE E IAA EAEE EENE ENERE TNR 5 84 512 PPT GOUD a a e ee et eg HE ee eee 5 85 SS MEE GOUD enn aS aa a EE E EEE 5 89 5 14 GONOGO Group wessseccescced sax cids cin Gbcie ts oben attend hicedeena vente Sa aiaa ed eed Lae naan 5 93 515 HOOP Y GOUD soriire aea be ods euien a scene ca svgsdeega viens needs vgst EEEE anes a a En Ea 5 98 5 16 HISTORY GrOUP ii sss ccs cscctieianciees eetceeaued sivitons cevcdevens ietescdeas sites say ui sin aneca eset dees EE SESER 5 99 5I IMAGE GOUD aienea prr reer tern rere teeter at errr erecrerr tree esr erty ene retary eter rene nr 5 102 5 18 INMMialize Group id tvs esivter tein iranian A Aiea Asien 5 103 SA9 MSW att GrOUp sesiss secs chetecaedea coautsses ces a a a a e aE 5 104 IM DL850E 17EN Contents Chapter 6 Appendix Index 5 20
318. nstalled strain module Syntax gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum Function Sets or queries the decimal place that is used during linear scaling when the display mode is set to Float for an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum lt NRf gt AUTO CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 to 3 CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM AUTO CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM gt CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM AUTO Example CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype MODE Function Sets or queries the display mode that is used during linear scaling for an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype MODE EXPonent FLOating CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype MODE lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE EXPONENT CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE gt CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE EXPONENT CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit Function Sets or queries the unit prefix that is used during linear scaling when the display mode is set to Float for an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit AUTO NONE PICO NANO
319. nt lt String gt Up to 120 characters Example ACQUIRE RTOUT COMMENT ABC ACQUIRE RTOUT COMMENT gt ACQUIRE RTOUT COMMENT ABC ACQuire RTOut DIVide MODE Function Sets or queries whether divided recording is enabled for hard disk recording Syntax ACQuire RTOut DIVide MODE lt Boolean gt ACQuire RTOut DIVide MODE Example ACQUIRE RTOUT DIVIDE MODE ON ACQUIRE RTOUT DIVIDE MODE gt ACQUIRE RTOUT DIVIDE MODE 1 puewwoy ACQuire RTOut DIVide NUMBer Function Sets or queries the number of divisions when divided recording is performed during hard disk recording Syntax ACQuire RTOut DIVide NUMBer lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 10 20 50 100 ACQuire RTOut DIVide NUMBer Example ACQUIRE RTOUT DIVIDE NUMBER 10 ACQUIRE RTOUT DIVIDE NUMBER gt ACQUIRE RTOUT DIVIDE NUMBER 10 ACQuire RTOut FILename Function Sets or queries the hard disk recording file name Syntax ACQuire RTOut FILename lt String gt ACQuire RTOut FILename lt String gt Up to 16 characters Example ACQUIRE RTOUT FILENAME ABC ACQUIRE RTOUT FILENAME gt ACQUIRE RTOUT FILENAME ABC IM DL850E 17EN 5 29 5 3 ASETup Group The commands in this group deal with auto setup You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the SETUP key on the front panel ASETup EXECute Function Executes auto setup Syntax ASETup EXECute Description Auto s
320. nually or by using 5 135 SNTP SYSTem CRMode Sets or queries the mode used to read vertical marker and degree cursor 5 135 values SYSTem GPS Queries all GPS settings 5 135 SYSTem GPS GMTTime Sets or queries the time difference from GMT during GPS time 5 135 synchronization SYSTem GPS STATe Queries the GPS signal reception state when using GPS for time 5 135 synchronization SYSTem HAFormat Horizontal Axis Sets or queries the horizontal axis display mode 5 135 Format SYSTem IRIG Queries all IRIG settings 5 136 SYSTem IRIG FORMat Sets or queries the IRIG format for synchronizing the time through IRIG 5 136 signals SYSTem IRIG IMPedance Sets or queries the input impedance for synchronizing the time through IRIG 5 136 signals SYSTem IRIG MODulation Sets or queries the IRIG modulation type for synchronizing the time through 5 136 IRIG signals SYSTem IRIG STATe Queries the sync signal reception state when using IRIG for time 5 136 synchronization SYSTem INPut OGADjust Offset Sets or queries whether the input DC offset gain adjustment feature is used 5 136 Gain Adjust SYSTem KEYProtect Queries all key lock settings 5 136 SYSTem KEYProtect EPASsword Enters the password to release the key lock 5 136 Enter password SYSTem KEYProtect MODE Sets or queries whether the keys are locked 5 136 SYSTem KEYProtect RTYPe Sets or qu
321. ny number provided that it corresponds to the number of a channel of a strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain BWIDth Function Sets or queries the filter of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain BWIDth FULL lt Frequency gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain BWIDth lt Frequency gt 10Hz 100Hz 1kHz CHANNEL11 STRAIN BWIDTH 10 00E 00 CHANNEL11 STRAIN BWIDTH gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN BWIDTH 10 00E 00 Example CHANnel lt x gt STRain EXCitation Function Sets or queries the bridge voltage of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain EXCitation lt Voltage gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain EXCitation lt Voltage gt 2V 5V 10V CHANNEL11 STRAIN EXCITATION 5 CHANNEL11 STRAIN EXCITATION gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN EXCITATION 5 Example CHANnel lt x gt STRain GFACtor Function Sets or queries the gauge factor of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain GFACtor lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain GFACtor lt NRf gt 1 90 to 2 20 CHANNEL11 STRAIN GFACTOR 1 9 CHANNEL11 STRAIN GFACTOR gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN GFACTOR 1 90 Example CHANnel lt x gt STRain INVert Function Sets or queries whether the display is inverted ON or not OFF for an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain INVert lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain INVert CHANNEL11 STRAIN INVERT ON CHANNEL11 STRAIN INVERT
322. o commands with a terminator two program messages will be sent Therefore the common header must be specified for each command even if commands belonging to the same command group are being concatenated Example ACQuire MODE NORMal lt PMT gt ACQuire COUNt 1 lt PMT gt IM DL850E 17EN 4 2 Commands Upper Level Query An upper level query is a query that is made by appending a question mark to the highest level command of a group The controller can receive all of the settings in a group collectively by executing an upper level query Some upper level queries of a group which may be comprised of more than three hierarchical levels can cause the DL850E DL850EV to transmit all the lower level settings Example CHANnel1 lt PMT gt gt CHANNEL1 DISPLAY ON LABEL CH1 COUPLING DC POSITION 0 00 PROBE 10 VDIV 50 0E 00 BWIDTH FULL OFFSET 0 0E 00 LSCALE MODE 0 The response to an upper level query can be sent back to the DL850E DL850EV as a program message This enables the settings that were present when the upper level query was made to be reproduced later on However some upper level queries do not return setup data that is not currently in use Exercise caution because not all of a group s information is necessarily returned in a response Header Interpretation Rules The DL850E DL850EV interprets the header that it receives according to the rules below e
323. of data points varies depending on the DL850E DL850EV settings For details see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Record Length and Sample Rate in the DL850E DL850EV Getting Started Guide IM DL850E 17EN 5 153 puewwoy 5 35 WAVeform Group WAVeform MODule Function Queries the module of the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command Syntax WAVeform MODule Example WAVEFORM MODULE gt WAVEFORM MODULE M701250 Description The values returned for each module are listed below NOMODULE No module M701250 701250 HS10M12 M701251 701251 HS1M16 M701255 701255 NONISO_10M12 M701260 701260 67 HV with RMS M701261 701261 Voltage Temp M701262 701262 Voltage Temp with AAF M701265 701265 TEMP HPV M701270 701270 STRAIN_NDIS M701271 701271 STRAIN_DSUB M701275 701275 ACCL VOLT M701280 701280 FREQ M720210 720210 HS100M12 M720220 720220 16CH VOLT M720221 720221 16CH TEMP VOLT M720230 720230 LOGIC M720240 720240 CAN M7202414 720241 CAN amp LIN If the waveform that WAVeform commands will be applied to is set as an event EVENT is returned M701260 is returned also for the 701267 module WAVeform OFFSet Function Queries the offset value used to convert the waveform data specified by the WAVeform TRACe command to physical values Syntax WAVeform OFFSet Example WAVEFORM OFFSET gt W
324. of the scale that is displayed on 5 56 SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe the screen when the 16 CH temperature voltage input module performs temperature measurements CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature Sets or queries the type of thermocouple that is used when the 16 CH 5 56 SCHannel lt x2 gt PE temperature voltage input module performs temperature measurements CHANnel lt x1 gt TEMPerature Sets or queries the unit that is used when the 16 CH temperature voltage 5 57 SCHannel lt x2 gt UNIT input module performs temperature measurements CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature TYPE Sets or queries the thermocouple type that is used when temperature 5 57 measurements are performed CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature UNIT Sets or queries the unit that is used when temperature measurements are 5 57 performed CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Queries all settings of an installed module that can perform analog voltage 5 57 measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage BWIDth Sets or queries the bandwidth limit of an installed module that can perform 5 57 analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage COUPling Sets or queries the input coupling of an installed module that can perform 5 57 analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage DOCancel Executes DC offset canceling on a voltage measurement module 5 58 EXECute CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage DOCancel Sets or queries the on off status of DC offset canceling of voltage 5 58 MOD
325. ogic channel of condition B Syntax TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Example TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL9 BIT1 LOW TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL9 BIT1 gt TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL9 BIT1 LOW TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic channel of condition B Syntax TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt CONDition DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt CONDition CHAN lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL2 CONDITION HIGH TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL2 CONDITION gt TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL2 CONDITION HIGH Description Use this command on channels that do not have sub channels TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel of condition B Syntax TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Example TRIGGER BTRIGGER C SCHANNEL1 BIT1 LOW TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 gt TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 LOW ANNEL1 TRIGger BTRigger CH
326. om waveform display frame 5 159 ZOOM FORMat lt x gt Sets or queries the display format of the specified zoom waveform 5 159 ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt Queries all settings related to the specified group display of zoom 5 159 waveforms ZOOM GROUp lt x1 gt FORMat lt x2 gt Sets or queries the zoom waveform display format of the specified display 5 159 group ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Sets or queries whether the specified source waveform of the specified 5 160 group display of zoom waveforms is displayed ZOOM MAG lt x gt Sets or queries the horizontal magnification of the specified zoom waveform 5 160 ZOOM MAIN Sets or queries the proportion of the main waveform display area that is used 5 160 when zooming waveforms ZOOM MODE lt x gt Sets or queries whether the specified zoom waveform is displayed 5 160 ZOOM MOVE Sets or queries whether the movement of the zoom position to the latest 5 160 position is enabled or disabled ZOOM POSition lt x gt Sets or queries the zoom position of the specified zoom waveform 5 160 ZOOM TDIV lt x gt Sets or queries the T DIV value of the specified zoom waveform 5 160 ZOOM WLAYout Window Layout Sets or queries the window layout that is used when waveforms are zoomed 5 160 ZOOM Z2Target Sets or queries the source window of Z2 when both Z1 and Z2 are displayed 5 160 Common Command Group
327. or TY DEGRee Queries all angle cursor settings for the T Y display 5 71 CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt Queries all angle difference D lt x gt settings for the angle cursors on the T Y 5 71 display CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt STATe Sets or queries whether the angle difference D lt x gt between the angle 5 71 cursors on the T Y display is displayed CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt VALue Queries the angle difference D lt x gt between the angle cursors on the T Y 5 71 display CURSor TY DEGRee DD Queries all angle difference Ad value settings The angle difference is 5 71 between the angle cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee DD STATe Sets or queries whether the angle difference Ad value between the angle 5 71 cursors on the T Y display is displayed CURSor TY DEGRee DD VALue Queries the angle difference Ad value between the angle cursors on the 5 72 T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee DY Queries all angle difference AY value settings The angle difference is 5 72 between the angle cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee DY STATe Sets or queries whether the angle difference AY value between the angle 5 72 cursors on the T Y display is displayed CURSor TY DEGRee DY VALue Queries the angle difference AY value between the angle cursors on the 5 72 T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee JUMP M
328. orm TRACe command the 5 155 main waveform data WAVeform SIGN Queries whether signs are included in the block data of the source waveform 5 155 data specified by WAVeform TRACe when the data is queried WAVeform SRATe Sample RATE Queries the sample rate of the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe 5 155 command WAVeform STARt Sets or queries the start data point in the waveform specified by the 5 156 WaAVeform TRACe command the main waveform WAVeform TRACe Sets or queries the waveform that WAVeform commands will be applied to 5 156 WAVeform TRIGger Queries the trigger position of the record specified by the WAVeform 5 156 RECord command WAVeform TYPE Queries the acquisition mode of the source waveform 5 156 XY Group XY Queries all XY settings 5 157 XY CDISplay Combine Display Sets or queries whether to combine the displays of Window1 and Window2 5 157 on the XY waveform display XY DOTConnect Sets or queries whether dot connect is ON or OFF for XY waveforms 5 157 XY DECimation Sets or queries the number of dots after decimation that XY waveforms 5 157 use XY MARKer Sets or queries whether XY pen markers are on 5 157 XY TCLear Trace Clear On Sets or queries whether the XY trace clear on start feature is on 5 157 Start XY WAVeform lt x1 gt Queries all settings related to the specified XY waveform 5 157 XY WAVeform lt x1 gt DISPlay Sets or queries whether the specified XY wavefo
329. orm of the marker cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer FORM LINE MARK CURSor TY MARKer FORM CURSOR TY MARKER FORM MARK CURSOR TY MARKER FORM gt CURSOR TY MARKER FORM MARK Example CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Function Queries all settings related to the marker cursor measurement items for the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt Function Queries all AX value settings AX is between the marker cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AX value between the marker cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt STATe lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DX2 STATE ON CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DX2 STATE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DX2 STATE 1 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt VALue Function Queries the AX value between the marker cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt VALue lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DX2 VALUE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DX2 VALUE 2 0000000E 03
330. ot set the distal mesial and proximal points using units on frequency modules Depending on the settings that were in use before you sent this command the values may not be set according to the parameters IM DL850E 17EN 5 117 puewwoy 5 21 MEASure Group MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt METHod Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the modes of a set of high and low points rising time and falling time measurement references MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt METHod AUTO MAXMin MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt METHod MEASURE CHANNEL1 METHOD AUTO MEASURE CHANNEL1 METHOD gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 METHOD AUTO MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt Function Syntax Example Queries the setting of a waveform parameter measurement item MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt Parameter gt AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDth1 BWIDth2 DUTY cycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWIDth PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TY 1Integ TY2Integ MEASURE CHANNEL PTOPEAK gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK STATE 0
331. oves the specified angle cursor to the center of the specified zoom window 5 72 CURSor TY DEGRee POSition lt x gt Sets or queries an angle cursor position on the T Y display 5 72 CURSor TY DEGRee Sets or queries the angle reference start Ref1 or end Ref2 point on the 5 72 REFerence lt x gt T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee RVALue Sets or queries an angle cursor s reference angle on the T Y display 5 72 CURSor TY DEGRee TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the 5 72 angle cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt Queries all measured value settings for an angle cursor on the T Y display 5 72 CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt STATe Sets or queries whether the measured value of an angle cursor onthe T Y 5 73 display is displayed CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt VALue Queries the measured value of an angle cursor on the T Y display 5 73 CURSor TY HORizontal Queries all horizontal cursor settings for the T Y display 5 73 CURSor TY HORizontal DY Queries all AY axis settings of the horizontal cursors on the T Y display 5 73 CURSor TY HORizontal DY Sets or queries whether the AY axis value between the horizontal cursors on 5 73 STATe the T Y display is displayed IM DL850E 17EN 5 9 5 1 List of Commands
332. p TRIGger SIMPle Function Queries all simple trigger settings Syntax TRIGger SIMPle TRIGger SIMPle EXTernal SLOPe Function Sets or queries the external trigger slope Syntax TRIGger SIMPle EXTernal SLOPe FALL RISE TRIGger SIMPle EXTernal SLOPe TRIGGER SIMPLE EXTERNAL SLOPE RISE TRIGGER SIMPLE EXTERNAL SLOPE gt TRIGGER SIMPLE EXTERNAL SLOPE RISE Example TRIGger SIMPle HYSTeresis Function Sets or queries the hysteresis for simple triggers Syntax TRIGger SIMPle HYSTeresis HIGH LOW MIDD1le TRIGger SIMPle HYSTeresis TRIGGER SIMPLE HYSTERESIS HIGH TRIGGER SIMPLE HYSTERESIS gt TRIGGER SIMPLE HYSTERESIS HIGH Description You cannot use this command to set the setting when the trigger zone is EXTernal LINE or TIME Example TRIGger SIMPle LEVel Function Sets or queries the trigger level of the channel specified by TRIGger SIMPle SOURce for simple triggers Syntax TRIGger SIMPle LEVel lt Voltage gt lt NR gt lt Current gt TRIGger SIMPle LEVel TRIGGER SIMPLE LEVEL 1 TRIGGER SIMPLE LEVEL gt TRIGGER SIMPLE LEVEL 1 00000E 00 Description You cannot use this command to set the setting when the trigger zone is EXTernal LINE or TIME The selectable range is the range that can be measured with the current measurement range setting Example If VDiv is 10 the selectable range is Example 100 V For strain
333. p lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Queries all source waveform settings for a display group 5 82 DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Sets or queries the source that is assigned to the specified source waveform 5 82 SOURce of the specified display group DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Sets or queries the zone number that displays the specified source waveform 5 82 ZNUMber Zone Number of the specified display group DISPlay INTENsity Queries all intensity settings 5 83 DISPlay INTENsity CURSor GRID Sets or queries the intensity of a display item 5 83 MARKer DISPlay INTerpolate Sets or queries the waveform interpolation method 5 83 DISPlay LINDicator Level Sets or queries whether the right indicator on the TY waveform display is 5 83 Indicator displayed DISPlay MAPPing Sets or queries the waveform mapping mode for when the display formatis 5 83 set to an option other than 1 DISPlay MODE EKEY Esc Key Switches the menu area display mode 5 83 IM DL850E 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page This command causes the DL850E DL850EV to perform the same action as 5 83 if its front panel ESC key had been pressed DISPlay MODE SET Sets the menu area display mode 5 83 DISPlay SDGRoup Select Display Sets or queries the number of the display group that is displayed 5 83 Group DISPlay SVALue Scale VALUE Sets or queries whether scale values are displayed 5 83 DI
334. port the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 276 Macro recursion error The DL850E DL850EV does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 277 Macro redefinition not allowed The DL850E DL850EV does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 278 Macro header not found The DL850E DL850EV does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications IM DL850E 17EN App 3 xipueddy 3 Appendix 2 Error Messages Communication Query Errors 400 to 499 Code Message Corrective Action Page 410 Query INTERRUPTED Check the transmission and reception order 4 2 420 Query UNTERMINATED Check the transmission and reception order 4 2 430 Query DEADLOCKED Keep program messages to 1024 bytes or less in length 4 2 including lt PMT gt 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response Do not write a query after IDN or OPT System Communication Errors 300 and 399 Code Message Corrective Action Page 300 Communication device specific error Servicing required 399 Fatal error in the communication driver Servicing required Other Error 350 Code Message Corrective Action Page 350 Queue overflow Read the error queue 6 6 Note Code 350 occurs when the error queue overflows This error is only returned in response to a STATus ERRor query it is never displayed on the screen App 4 IM DL850E 17EN Appendix 3 About the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard
335. r queries the FFT peak cursor measurement range Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt RANGe lt NRf gt lt NR gt CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt RANGe lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 2 is valid on models with the G2 option lt NRf gt 5 00 div to 5 00 div CURSOR FFT PEAK1 RANGE 5 00 5 00 CURSOR FFT PEAK1 RANGE gt CURSOR FFT PEAK1 RANGE 5 00 5 00 Example CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y Function Queries all Y axis settings of an FFT cursor peak cursor Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 2 is valid on models with the G2 option CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value of an FFT cursor peak cursor is displayed Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y STATe lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 2 is valid on models with the G2 option Example CURSOR FFT PEAK2 Y STATE ON CURSOR FFT PEAK2 Y STATE gt CURSOR FFT PEAK2 Y STATE 1 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of an FFT cursor peak cursor Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y VALue lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 2 is valid on models with the G2 option Example CURSOR FFT PEAK2 VALUE gt CURSOR FFT PEAK2 Y VALUE 30 933333E 00 CURSor FFT TYPE Function Sets or queries the FFT cursor type Syntax CURSor
336. r queries the input coupling setting of an installed acceleration voltage 5 35 module CHANnel lt x gt ACCL GAIN Sets or queries the gain when the input coupling of an installed acceleration 5 35 voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL POSit ion Sets or queries the vertical position when the input coupling of an installed 5 35 acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SCALe Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen when the input 5 35 coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SENSitivity Sets or queries the sensitivity when the input coupling of an installed 5 36 acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL UNIT Sets or queries the unit string when the input coupling of an installed 5 36 acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL VARiable Sets or queries the scale setup mode when the input coupling of an installed 5 36 acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL ZOOM Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor when the input coupling of an 5 36 installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt CAN Queries all the settings of an installed module that can perform CAN bus 5 36 signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN 0SOut Queries all the one
337. r queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel of condition A Syntax TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition CHAN lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel Example TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION HIGH TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION gt TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION HIGH Description Use this command on channels that have sub channels TRIGger ATRigger CONDition Function Sets or queries the achievement condition of condition A Syntax TRIGger ATRigger CONDition ENTer EXIT FALSe TRUE TRIGger ATRigger CONDition Example TRIGGER ATRIGGER CONDITION ENTER TRIGGER ATRIGGER CONDITION gt TRIGGER ATRIGGER CONDITION ENTER Description This command is valid when the trigger type is ABN or ADB TRIGger BBETween Function Queries all B Between trigger settings Syntax TRIGger BBETween TRIGger BBETween TIME lt x gt Function Sets or queries a pulse width for B Between triggers Syntax TRIGger BBETween TIME lt x gt lt Time gt TRIGger BBETween TIME lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 lt Time gt 10ns to 10s Example TRIGger BBET TIME1 0 001 TRIGGER BBETWEEN TIME1 gt TRIGGER BBETWEEN TIME1 1 00000000E 03 B B
338. r the measurement shown on the screen s left edge will be queried 5 120 IM DL850E 17EN 5 22 MONitor Group The commands in this group deal with switching the screen that is displayed and the output of the numeric monitor MONitor ASENd Function Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of all channels Syntax MONitor ASENd Example MONITOR ASEND gt See the response format shown in the figure below Description The measured values of each channel are divided by semicolons 0x3b The values for all active channels are output Depending on the MONitor VERBose command s setting the measured value is returned with a label and the unit or just the measured value is returned The active channels are those that meet the following conditions For two channel modules they are the channels that are displayed For 16 channel modules they are the sub channels that are displayed and whose input is off e Logic channels follow the same guidelines explained here The measured value is right justified The unit is returned as white space Response Format JelHj Jalal 2v IBIG L JL JL J Label 8 char Measured value Unit 4 char 11 char right justified MONitor ASENd CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of the specified channel Syntax MONi
339. r this manual The manual explains the DL850E DL850EV Communication Interface communication interface features and instructions on how User s Manual to use them DL850E DL850EV IM DL850E 51EN The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this manual This ScopeCorder manual explains the features of the DL850E DL850EV Real Time Math Power Math Real Time Math Power Math option and how to use them User s Manual DL850E DL850EV IM DL850E 61EN The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this manual This ScopeCorder manual explains all the features of the acquisition software Acquisition Software which performs continuous measurement on the DL850E User s Manual DL850EV The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions The figures given in this manual may differ from those that actually appear on your screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer e Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of YOKOGAWVA is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the documents concerning it have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from the Regents of th
340. rature voltage input module is installed and you specify an even channel for lt x gt this command will return NOMODULE CHANnel lt x gt STRain Function Queries all settings of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance Function Queries whether balancing will be performed on an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance Description Returns the status of all installed strain modules IM DL850E 17EN 5 51 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x1 gt STRain BALance CHANnel lt x2 gt Function Sets or queries the channels that balancing will be performed on for an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance CHANnel lt x gt lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance CHANnel lt x gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN BALANCE CHANNEL12 ON CHANNEL11 STRAIN BALANCE CHANNEL12 gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN BALANCE CHANNEL12 1 Description The channels you can specify are 1 to 16 for lt x1 x2 gt However you must specify strain module channels Example CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance EXECute Function Executes strain balancing on an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance EXECute Description This command balances channels that are switched on with the CHANnel lt x1 gt STRain BALance CHANnel lt x2 gt command lt x gt can be a
341. re cleared Because the output queue is not cleared with a CLS command bit 4 MAV in the status byte is not affected However the output queue will be cleared if the CLS command is received just after a program message terminator IM DL850E 17EN syoday snyejs l 6 3 Standard Event Register Standard Event Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PONIURQICME EXE DDE QYERQCIOPC e Bit 7 PON Power ON This bit is set to 1 when the DL850E DL850EV is turned on e Bit 6 URQ User Request Not used always zero e Bit 5 CME Command Error This bit is set to 1 when there is a command syntax error Example Incorrectly spelled command name 9 used in octal data e Bit 4 EXE Execution Error This bit is set to 1 when the command syntax is correct but the command cannot be executed in the current state Example The DL850E DL850EV receives a command whose parameter is outside the selectable range An attempt is made to print a hard copy while the DL850E DL850EV is running e Bit 3 DDE Device Error This bit is set to 1 when a command cannot be executed for internal reasons other than a command syntax error or command execution error e Bit 2 QYE Query Error This bit is set to 1 when a query command is received but the output queue is empty or the data is lost Example There is no response data Data is lost due to an overflow in the output queue e Bit 1 RQC Request Control Not u
342. response data are created upon receiving a send request from the controller Commands that have parameters that restrict one another There are commands such as CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INOut PROBe and CHANnel lt x gt FREQ VDIV that have parameters that place restrictions unilaterally but there are no commands that have parameters that restrict one another 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Items that are included in the functional or composite header elements constituting a command See chapters 4 and 5 Buffer sizes that affect block data transmission When block data is being transmitted the output queue is expanded to match the size of the data that is being transmitted A list of program data elements that can be used in equations and their nesting limitations Equations cannot be used Syntax of the responses to queries See the example of the commands given in chapter 5 Communication between devices that do not follow the response syntax is not supported by the DL850E DL850EV Size of the response data block 1 to 2004000 bytes A list of supported common commands See section 5 38 Common Command Group Device condition after a successful calibration The device will be performing measurements The maximum length of block data that can be used for the DDT trigger macro definition Not supported The maximum length of the macro label for defining ma
343. ring the DL850E DL850EV Ethernet Settings c ccececeeseceeeteeseeteeeeseeeeeseaes 1 5 USB Interface 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 Component Names and Functions cccccececeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseeaeeeseeseeeneeeeeeeneeea 2 1 USB Interface Features and Specifications ccccecccceeeecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenaeeeeeeeesneaeees 2 2 Connecting tothe USB Internaten pir oniga aki aeria ipa iaeiiai iaiia 2 3 Configuring the DL850E DL850EV USB Settings eeeeeeenieeererererrrerrireerirerrrnrrenes 2 4 GP IB Interface Optional 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 Component Names and Functions 0 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenaeeseeeeenneeeeeaes 3 1 Connecting GP IB Cables Optional cccccecesceceeeeeeceeeeeeseeneaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeneeea 3 2 GP IB Interface Features inisinia eniinn E PE EEEa dn essed 3 4 GP IB Interface Specifications cccccecccceceeeececeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeseceeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeneeea 3 5 Configuring the DL850E DL850EV GP IB SettingS iaiiecrniinnicnniirrirerinaiaerisrnen 3 6 Responses to Interface Messages cccccceceececeteceeceeeesecceeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeseaeaeeeeseneeaeees 3 7 Programming Overview 4 1 Messages senn a e a E ts 4 1 4 2 Commands oreina E E Nina ni E AS ANETE 4 3 4 3 RESPONSE sy e N E 4 5 4 4 Dataran ee oa a e a aaa aaa 4 6 4 5 Synchronization with the Controller eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessneeeeeeaeeseeeee
344. rm SRATe Example WAVEFORM SRATE gt WAVEFORM SRATE 500 0E 03 Description This command returns the sample rate of measured data IM DL850E 17EN 5 155 puewwog 5 35 WAVeform Group WAVeform STARt Function Sets or queries the start data point in the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command the main waveform Syntax WAVeform STARt lt NRf gt WAVeform STARt lt NRf gt 0 to the number of data points 1 Example WAVEFORM START 0 WAVEFORM START gt WAVEFORM START 0 Description You can query the total number of data points that have been acquired by using the WAVeform LENGth command WAVeform TRACe Function Sets or queries the waveform that WAVeform commands will be applied to Syntax WAVeform TRACe EVENt MATH lt x gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt WAVeform TRACe lt NRf gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 to 60 sub channel MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 EVENt Sends event data Example WAVEFORM TRACE 1 WAVEFORM TRACE gt WAVEFORM TRACE 1 Description An error will occur if nothing is installed in the specified channel WAVeform TRIGger Function Queries the trigger position of the record specified by the WAVeform RECord command Syntax WAVeform TRIGger Example WAVEFORM TRIGGER gt WAVEFORM TRIGGER 5000 Description Queries the number of points from the beginning of the record to the trigger position WAVeform TYPE Function Queries the acquis
345. rm is displayed 5 157 XY WINDow lt x gt TRANge Sets or queries the T Y waveform range to display in the XY window 5 157 XY WAVeform lt x1 gt YTRace Sets or queries the channel that is assigned to the specified XY waveform s 5 157 Y axis XY WINDow lt x gt Queries all settings related to the specified XY window 5 158 XY WINDow lt x gt MODE Sets or queries whether the specified XY window is displayed 5 158 XY WAVeform lt x1 gt XTRace Sets or queries the channel that is assigned to the specified XY waveform s 5 158 X axis ZOOM Group ZOOM Queries all zoom settings 5 159 ZOOM ANALySis lt x1 gt FORMat lt x2 gt Sets or queries the display format the number of divisions in the vertical 5 159 direction of zoomed waveforms of display group P and H 5 26 IM DL850E 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page ZOOM ASCRo11 Queries all auto scroll settings 5 159 ZOOM ASCRo11 JUMP Moves the center position of the zoom box to the left or right edge of the 5 159 main window ZOOM ASCRo11 SPEed Sets or queries the auto scroll speed of the zoom box 5 159 ZOOM ASCRo11 STARt Starts auto scrolling 5 159 ZOOM ASCRo11 STOP Stops auto scrolling 5 159 ZOOM ASCRo11 TARGet Sets or queries the zoom window that will be auto scrolled 5 159 ZOOM FITMeasure Moves the range on which automated measurement of waveform parameters 5 159 is performed to the zo
346. rm mode 5 81 DISPlay ACCumulate PERSistence Sets or queries the number of times that waveforms are accumulated 5 81 DISPlay AGRoup Auto Grouping Automatically assigns the waveforms whose displays are turned on to 5 81 display groups 1 to 4 DISPlay ANALysis lt x gt FORMat Sets or queries the display format the number of divisions in the vertical 5 81 direction of display group P and H DISPlay CINFormation Channel Sets or queries the contents of the channel information display 5 81 Information DISPlay CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries a waveform color 5 81 SCHannel lt x gt COLor DISPlay COLor BASecolor Sets or queries the base color of the screen 5 81 DISPlay DECimation Sets or queries the number of dots after decimation that are used on the 5 82 dot display DISPlay DMMode Sets the display mode of the digital monitor display 5 82 DISPlay ESIZe Extra window Sets or queries the size of the extra window 5 82 Size DISPlay FORMat Sets or queries the display format the number of divisions in the vertical 5 82 direction DISPlay GRATicule Sets or queries the grid type 5 82 DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt Queries all display group settings 5 82 DISPlay GROup lt x1l gt ACLear All Clears all the trace assignments of the specified display group 5 82 Clear DISPlay GROUp lt x1 gt FORMat Sets or queries the display format the number of divisions in the vertical 5 82 direction of the specified display group DISPlay GROu
347. rmination action condition Syntax GONogo ACONdition ALWays FAILure SUCCess GONogo ACONdition Example GONOGO ACONDITION ALWAYS GONOGO ACONDITION gt GONOGO ACONDITION ALWAYS GONogo ACTion Function Queries all settings for the action that is performed when the condition is met and the settings for the condition itself Syntax GONogo ACTion GONogo ACTion BUZZer Function Sets or queries whether a beep is sounded when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion BUZZer lt Boolean gt GONogo ACTion BUZZer GONOGO ACTION BUZZER ON GONOGO ACTION BUZZER gt GONOGO ACTION BUZZER 1 Example GONogo ACTion FOLDer Function Sets or queries whether a folder is created with the date when waveform data and screen captures are saved to a storage medium when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion FOLDer lt Boolean gt Example GONOGO ACTION FOLDER ON GONOGO ACTION FOLDER gt GONOGO ACTION FOLDER 1 GONogo ACTion HCOPy HardCOPY Function Sets or queries whether a screen capture is printed from the built in printer when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion HCOPy lt Boolean gt GONogo ACTion HCOPy Example GONOGO ACTION HCOPY ON GONOGO ACTION HCOPY gt GONOGO ACTION HCOPY 1 GONogo ACTion IMAGe Function Queries all settings for the screen capture that is saved when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion IMAGe GONogo
348. rned e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later WAVeform CAPTure END Function Sets or queries the end point to use when capturing waveform data Syntax WAVeform CAPTure END lt NRf gt WAVeform CAPTure END lt NRf gt 0 to the number of data points in the waveform that is being captured 1 WAVEFORM CAPTURE END 10000 WAVEFORM CAPTURE END gt WAVEFORM CAPTURE END 10000 Example IM DL850E 17EN 5 151 puewwoy 5 35 WAVeform Group WAVeform CAPTure LENGth Function Queries the number of data points in the captured waveform Syntax WAVeform CAPTure LENGth WAVEFORM CAPTURE LENGTH gt WAVEFORM CAPTURE LENGTH 10010 Example WAVeform CAPTure RECord Function Sets or queries the record number to use when capturing waveform data Syntax WAVeform CAPTure RECord MAXimum MINimum lt NRf gt WAVeform CAPTure RECord lt NRf gt 5000 to 5000 WAVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD 1 WAVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD gt WAVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD 1 Example WAVeform CAPTure RECord MAXimum Function Queries the largest record number of the captured waveform Syntax WAVeform CAPTure RECord MAXimum WAVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD MAXIMUM gt WAVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD 0 Example WAVeform CAPTure RECord MINimum Function Queries the smallest record number of the captured waveform Syntax WAVeform CAPTure RECord MINimum W
349. rom the PC regardless of the local lockout state e The REMOTE indicator at the top center of the screen disappears once the DL850E DL850EV is in local mode e All keys are enabled e The settings in remote mode are retained even when the DL850E DL850EV switches to local mode Note You cannot use the USB interface at the same time as other interfaces GP IB and Ethernet interfaces IM DL850E 17EN 2 3 Connecting to the USB Interface Precautions to Be Taken When Connecting Probes Be sure to insert the USB cable connectors firmly into the USB ports If you are connecting multiple devices by using a USB hub connect the DL850E DL850EV to the USB hub port that is closest to the port that the controller is connected to Do not connect a USB cable type B to the GO NO GO output terminal Doing so may damage the DL850E DL850EV Do not connect or remove USB cables from the time when the DL850E DL850EV is turned on until operation becomes available approximately 20 to 30 seconds Doing so may damage the DL850E DL850EV IM DL850E 17EN 2 3 aoeyJa U ASN 2 4 Configuring the DL850E DL850EV USB Settings This section explains the settings listed below You must configure these settings when controlling the DL850E DL850EV remotely through a USB interface e Communication interface UTILITY Remote Ctrl Menu Press UTILITY and then the Remote Ctrl soft key to display the following menu Remote Ctrl D B
350. roup WAVeform CAPTure TIME Function Queries the time of the trigger of the specified capture waveform Syntax WAVeform CAPTure TIME lt NRf gt MAXimum MINimum When the capture mode is set to Auto lt NRf gt 0 to 4999 If you specify MAXimum the trigger time of the latest waveform the same as number 0 is queried If you specify MINimum the trigger time of the oldest waveform is queried When the capture mode is set to On Start lt NRf gt 0 to 5000 If you specify MAXimum the trigger time of the latest waveform the same as the capture count is queried If you specify MINimum the trigger time of the oldest waveform the same as number 1 is queried If you specify 0 the trigger time of the latest waveform the same as the capture count and MAXimum is queried WAVeform CAPTure TIME gt WAVeform CAPTure TIME 0001 10 00 00 06 Description If you set lt NRf gt to a number greater than the number of captures the string lt NRf gt is returned If you specify MAXimum or MINimum when nothing has been captured the string 0000 Example is returned If you query while the DL850E DL850EV is running the string 0000 is returned e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later WAVeform CAPTure TRIGger Function Queries the trigger position represented as a number of points in the captured waveform Syntax WAVeform CAPTure T
351. rs However there are query only commands whose responses the DL850E DL850EV will attach headers to Example MEASure CHANnel1 PTOPeak VALue lt PMT gt gt 10 0E 00 lt RMT gt If You Want the DL850E DL850EV to Return Responses without Headers You can configure the DL850E DL850EV so that even responses that have both headers and data are returned without headers Use the COMMunicate HEADer command for this purpose Abbreviated Form The DL850E DL850EV normally returns response headers with the lower case section removed You can configure the DL850E DL850EV so that full headers are returned Use the COMMunicate VERBose command for this purpose The sections enclosed in braces are also omitted in the abbreviated form IM DL850E 17EN MAIAJZACQ Bulwwesboig gt 4 4 Data Data Data contains conditions and values that are written after the header A space separates the data from the header Data is grouped as follows Data Description lt Decimal gt A value expressed in decimal notation Example Probe attenuation for CH1 gt CHANnell PROBe 100 lt Voltage gt lt Time gt A physical value lt Frequency gt lt Current gt Time axis range gt TIMebase TDIV 1US lt Register gt A register value expressed as binary octal decimal or hexadecimal Example Extended event register value gt STATUS EESE HFE lt Character data gt Predefined character string mnemon
352. rsors lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AF value between the FFT cursors marker cursors is displayed Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt STATe lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DF2 STATE ON CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DF2 STATE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DF2 STATE 1 Example CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt VALue Function Queries the AF value between the FFT cursors marker cursors Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt VALue lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DF2 VALUE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DF2 VALUE 100 Example CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt Function Queries all AY display settings AY is between the FFT cursors marker cursors Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AY value between the FFT cursors marker cursors is displayed Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt STATe lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DY2 STATE ON CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DY2
353. rt mode capture event Example SEARCH EVENT COUNT 1 SEARCH EVENT COUNT gt SEARCH EVENT COUNT 1 SEARch EVENt SOURce Function Sets or queries the event search source event Syntax SEARCh EVENt SOURce CAPTure MANual SEARch EVENt SOURce Example SEARCH EVENT SOURCE CAPTURE SEARCH EVENT SOURCE gt SEARCH EVENT SOURCE CAPTURE SEARch LSTate Function Queries all logic pattern search settings Syntax SEARch LSTate SEARch LSTate BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the level of the specified bit for logic pattern searches Syntax SEARdh LSTate BIT lt x gt DONTcare HIGH LOW SEARdh LSTate BIT lt x gt lt x gt 1to8 Example SEARCH LSTATE BIT1 HIGH SEARCH LSTATE BIT1 gt SEARCH LSTATE BIT1 HIGH SEARch LSTate COUNt Function Sets or queries the logic pattern search count Syntax SEARch LSTate COUNt lt NRf gt SEARch LSTate COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 1000000 Example SEARCH LSTATE COUNT 100 SEARCH LSTATE COUNT gt SEARCH LSTATE COUNT 100 Description This setting is the same as the edge search count setting SEARch LSTate SOURce Function Sets or queries the trace to perform the logic pattern search on Syntax SEARch LSTate SOURce lt NRf gt lt NRf gt SEARch LSTate SOURce lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Second lt NRf gt 1 to 60 sub channel Example SEARCH LSTATE SOURCE 7 SEARCH LSTATE SOURCE gt SEARCH LSTAT
354. ry waveform parameter searches Q Syntax HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt 3 lt gt 104 3 5 2 HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the specified parameter s reference condition for history waveform parameter searches Syntax HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt CONDition OFF IN OUT lt x gt 1to4 Example HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM1 CONDITION IN HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM1 CONDITION gt HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM1 CONDITION IN HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt LOGic BIT Function Sets or queries the bit when the specified parameter s source trace for history waveform parameter searches is set to 720230 logic module Syntax HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt LOGic BIT lt NRf gt HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt LOGic BIT lt NRf gt 1 to 8 lt x gt 1 to 16 Example HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM LOGIC BIT 2 HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM LOGIC BIT gt HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM LOGIC BIT 2 Description e The default value is 1 e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later IM DL850E 17EN 5 99 5 16 HISTory Group HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt SOURce Function Sets or queries the specified parameter s source trace for history waveform parameter searches Syntax HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt SOURce lt NRf gt HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt SOURce lt x gt 1 to 4 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Examp
355. s Command Function Page SEARch LSTate Queries all logic pattern search settings 5 126 SEARch LSTate BIT lt x gt Sets or queries the level of the specified bit for logic pattern searches 5 126 SEARch LSTate COUNt Sets or queries the logic pattern search count 5 126 SEARch LSTate SOURce Sets or queries the trace to perform the logic pattern search on 5 126 SEARCh MAG lt x gt Sets or queries a zoom waveform magnification 5 126 SEARch POSition lt x gt Sets or queries the position of a zoom box 5 126 SEARch SELect Sets the search point that is displayed on the zoom window and queries the 5 127 zoom position of that search point gt SEARch SELect MAXimum Queries the maximum save number which is the number that is attached to 5 127 the last position that the search retrieved SEARch SPOint Start POint Sets or queries the search start position 5 127 SEARCh TDIV lt x gt Sets or queries a zoom waveform T DIV value 5 127 SEARch TIME Queries all time search settings 5 127 SEARch TIME TIME Sets or queries the time of the time search 5 127 SEARch TWINdow Target WINdow Sets or queries the window that search results will be displayed in 5 127 SEARCh TYPE Sets or queries the search type 5 127 SNAP Group SNAP Takes a snapshot 5 128 SSTart Group SSTart Executes the si
356. s CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VGAin Sets or queries the gain adjustment of a voltage measurement module 5 65 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage ZOOM Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed module that can 5 65 perform analog voltage measurements CLEar Group CLEar Clears traces 5 66 COMMunicate Group COMMunicate Queries all communication settings 5 67 COMMunicate HEADer Sets or queries whether headers are attached to query responses 5 67 COMMunicate LOCKout Sets or clears local lockout 5 67 COMMunicate OPSE Sets or queries the overlap command that is used by the OPC OPC and 5 67 WAI commands COMMunicate OPSR Queries the operation pending status register 5 67 COMMunicate OVERLap Sets or queries the commands that operate as overlap commands 5 67 COMMunicate REMote Sets or queries whether the DL850E DL850EV is in remote or local mode 5 67 ON is remote mode COMMunicate VERBose Sets or queries whether query responses are returned in full or abbreviated 5 67 form COMMunicate WAIT Waits for a specified extended event to occur 5 67 COMMunicate WAIT Creates the response that is returned when a specified extended event 5 68 occurs CURSor Group CURSor Queries all cursor measurement settings 5 69 CURSor FFT Queries all FFT cursor settings 5 69 CURSor FFT MARKer FORM Sets or queries the form of an FFT cursor marker cursor 5 69 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Queries all setting
357. s between the angle cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee DD CURSor TY DEGRee DD STATe Function Sets or queries whether the angle difference Ad value between the angle cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee DD STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY DEGRee DD STATe CURSOR TY DEGREE DD STATE ON CURSOR TY DEGREE DD STATE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE DD STATE 1 Example IM DL850E 17EN 5 71 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor TY DEGRee DD VALue Function Queries the angle difference Ad value between the angle cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee DD VALue Example CURSOR TY DEGREE DD VALUE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE DD VALUE 719 55000E 00 CURSor TY DEGRee DY Function Queries all angle difference AY value settings The angle difference is between the angle cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee DY CURSor TY DEGRee DY STATe Function Sets or queries whether the angle difference AY value between the angle cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee DY STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY DEGRee DY STATe CURSOR TY DEGREE DY STATE ON CURSOR TY DEGREE DY STATE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE DY STATE 1 Example CURSor TY DEGRee DY VALue Function Queries the angle difference AY value between the angle cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor
358. s of an FFT cursor marker cursor 5 69 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt Queries all AF display settings AF is between the FFT cursors marker 5 69 cursors CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt Sets or queries whether the AF value between the FFT cursors marker 5 69 STATe cursors is displayed CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt Queries the AF value between the FFT cursors marker cursors 5 69 VALue CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt Queries all AY display settings AY is between the FFT cursors marker 5 69 cursors IM DL850E 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt Sets or queries whether the AY value between the FFT cursors marker 5 69 STATe cursors is displayed CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt Queries the AY value between the FFT cursors marker cursors 5 69 VALue CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F Queries all frequency axis settings of an FFT cursor marker cursor 5 70 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F STATe Sets or queries whether the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor marker 5 70 cursor is displayed CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F Queries the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor 5 70 VALue CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Sets or queries the position of an FFT cursor marker cursor 5 70 POSition
359. s or queries the filter of an installed strain module 5 52 CHANnel lt x gt STRain EXCitation Sets or queries the bridge voltage of an installed strain module 5 52 CHANnel lt x gt STRain GFACtor Sets or queries the gauge factor of an installed strain module 5 52 CHANnel lt x gt STRain INVert Sets or queries whether the display is inverted ON or not OFF for an 5 52 installed strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed strain module 5 52 CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for 5 52 AVALue an installed strain module IM DL850E 17EN 5 5 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Sets or queries the scaling coefficient B that is used during linear scaling for 5 52 BVALue an installed strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Queries all the linear scaling display mode settings of an installed strain 5 53 DISPlaytype module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Sets or queries the decimal place that is used during linear scaling when the 5 53 DISPlaytype DECimalnum display mode is set to Float for an installed strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Sets or queries the display mode that is used during linear scaling for a
360. s or queries the start point to use when capturing waveform data 5 152 WAVeform CAPTure TIME Queries the time of the trigger of the specified capture waveform 5 153 WAVeform CAPTure TRIGger Queries the trigger position represented as a number of points in the 5 153 captured waveform WAVeform DATaselect Queries whether to query the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe 5 153 command using ACQ data or PP data WAVeform END Sets or queries the end data point in the waveform specified by the 5 153 WaAVeform TRACe command the main waveform WAVeform FORMat Sets or queries the transmission data format 5 153 WAVeform LENGth Queries the total number of data points in the waveform specified by the 5 153 WaAVeform TRACe command the main waveform WAVeform MODule Queries the module of the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe 5 154 command WAVeform OFFSet Queries the offset value used to convert the waveform data specified by the 5 154 WaAVeform TRACe command to physical values WAVeform RANGe Queries the measurement range used to convert the waveform data 5 154 specified by the WAVeform TRACe command to physical values WAVeform RECord Sets or queries the main waveform record number that WAVeform 5 154 commands will be applied to WAVeform RECord MINimum Queries the minimum record number in the history memory for the main 5 154 waveform WAVeform SEND Queries the waveform data specified by the WAVef
361. s the edge search count Syntax SEARCh EDGE COUNt lt NRf gt SEARCh EDGE COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 1000000 Example SEARCH EDGE COUNT 100 SEARCH EDGE COUNT gt SEARCH EDGE COUNT 100 SEARch EDGE HYSTeresis Function Sets or queries the edge search determination level hysteresis Syntax SEARch EDGE HYSTeresis HIGH LOW MIDD1le SEARCh EDGE HYSTeresis Example SEARCH EDGE HYSTERESIS LOW SEARCH EDGE HYSTERESIS gt SEARCH EDGE HYSTERESIS LOW Description This setting is valid if the channel that is being searched is not a logic channel SEARch EDGE LEVE1 Function Sets or queries the edge search determination level Syntax SEARCh EDGE LEVE1 lt Voltage gt lt Current gt lt NRf gt SEARCh EDGE LEVE1 Example SEARCH EDGE LEVEL 2 SEARCH EDGE LEVEL gt SEARCH EDGE LEVEL 2 00000E 00 SEARch EDGE LOGic BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the edge polarity of the specified bit for when the edge search is performed on logic traces Syntax SEARch EDGE LOGic BIT lt x gt BISLope OFF FALL RISE SEARCh EDGE LOGic BIT lt x gt lt x gt 1t08 Example SEARCH EDGE LOGIC BIT1 BISLOPE SEARCH EDGE LOGIC BIT1 gt SEARCH EDGE LOGIC BIT1 BISLOPE SEARch EDGE SLOPe Function Sets or queries the edge polarity for when the edge search is performed on traces other than logic traces Syntax SEARCh EDGE SLOPe BISLope FALL RISE SEAR
362. s the reference waveform bit used to measure the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence BIT lt NRf gt MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence BIT lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to 8 MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE BIT 1 MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE BIT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE BIT 1 Description The default value is 1 This command is valid only on logic module channels This command is valid when the channel specified by MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence TRACe isa logic module channel This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence SLOPe Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the edge polarity of the reference waveform used to measure the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence SLOPe RISE FALL MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay REFerence SLOPe lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE SLOPE FALL EASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE SLOPE MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 DELAY REFERENCE SLOPE FALL Ss Vv Description The default value is RISE This command is valid only on
363. s the trigger slope 5 147 TRIGger SIMPle LOGic SLOPe Sets or queries the slope for logic triggers 5 147 TRIGger SIMPle SLOPe Sets or queries the trigger slope of the channel specified by TRIGger 5 147 SIMPle SOURce for simple triggers TRIGger SIMPle SOURce Sets or queries the source for simple triggers 5 147 TRIGger SOURce Queries all the settings of the trigger source for enhanced triggers 5 147 TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt Queries all the settings of the specified channel s trigger source for enhanced 5 148 SCHannel lt x gt triggers TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the window trigger center for enhanced triggers 5 148 SCHannel lt x gt CENTer TRIGger SOURce CHANne1 lt x gt Sets or queries the specified channel s hysteresis for enhanced triggers 5 148 SCHannel lt x gt HYSTeresis TRIGger SOURce CHANne1 lt x gt Sets or queries the specified channel s level for enhanced triggers 5 148 SCHannel lt x gt LEVel TRIGger SOURce CHANne1 lt x gt Sets or queries the window trigger width for enhanced triggers 5 148 SCHannel lt x gt WIDTh TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the width for wave window triggers 5 148 WWIDth TRIGger TGTime Queries all T gt Time trigger settings 5 148 TRIGger TGTime TIME Sets or queries the pulse width for T gt Time triggers 5 149 TRIGger TIMer Queries all time trigger settings 5 149 TRIGger TIMer DATE Sets or queries the date for time tr
364. s to 10s Example TRIGGER TLTIME TIME 0 001 TRIGGER TLTIME TIME gt TRIGGER TLTIME TIME 1 00000000E 03 TRIGger TOTime Function Queries all T lt T1 T2 lt T trigger settings Syntax TRIGger TOTime TRIGger TOTime TIME lt x gt Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the pulse width for T lt T1 T2 lt T triggers TRIGger TOTime TIME lt x gt lt Time gt TRIGger TOTime TIM lt Time gt 10 ns to 10s E lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 TR TR gt e TIME1 GGER TOTIME TIM GGER TOTIME TIM TRIGGER TOTIME 00000000 El 0 001 EL E 03 IM DL850E 17EN 5 149 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger TYPE Function Sets or queries the trigger type Syntax TRIGger TYPE ABN ADB AND EOA BBETween BLTime BGTime BTOut OR MPle TGTime TLTime TITime TOTime INdow TRIGger TYPE RIGGER TYPE SIMPLE RIGGER TYPE gt TRIGGER TYPE SIMPLE Example T TRIGger WWINdow Function Queries all wave window trigger settings Syntax TRIGger WWINdow TRIGger WWINdow CHANnel lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified channel for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow CHANnel lt x gt lt Boolean gt TRIGger WWINdow CHANnel lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER WWINDOW CHANNEL1 ON TRIGGER WWINDOW CHANNEL1 gt TRIGGER WWINDOW CHANNEL1 1 Description The DL850E DL850EV cannot perform wa
365. s turned on for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup STOPpredict lt NRf gt OFF CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup STOPpredict lt NRf gt 1 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Example CHANNELS FREQ SETUP STOPPREDICT 10 CHANNELS FREQ SETUP STOPPREDICT gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP STOPPREDICT 10 5 46 IM DL850E 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup TUNit Function Sets or queries the time unit when measuring velocity of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup TUNit HOUR MIN SEC CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup TUNit Example CHANNELS FREQ SETUP TUNIT MIN CHANNELS FREQ SETUP TUNIT gt CHANNELS FREQ SETUP TUNIT MIN CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup UNIT Function Sets or queries the pulse integration unit of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup UNIT lt String gt Up to 4 characters CHANNELS FREQ SETUP UNIT ABC CHANNELS FREQ SETUP UNIT gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP UNIT ABC Example CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup UPULse Function Sets or queries the unit pulse setting of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup UPULse lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup UPULse lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 CHANNELS FREQ SETUP UPULSE 3 CHANNELS FREQ SETUP UPULSE
366. s used when captured data is saved to a storage medium Syntax CAPTure ACTion SAVE NAME lt Filename gt CAPTure ACTion SAVE NAME CAPTURE ACTION SAVE NAME ABC CAPTURE ACTION SAVE NAME gt CAPTURE ACTION SAVE NAME ABC Example Description This setting is shared with other file name settings CAPTure ACTion SAVE TYPE Function Sets or queries the data format that is used when captured data is saved to a storage medium Syntax CAPTure ACTion SAVE TYPE ASCii BINary FLOat CAPTure ACTion SAVE TYPE CAPTURE ACTION SAVE TYPE BINARY CAPTURE ACTION SAVE TYPE gt CAPTURE ACTION SAVE TYPE BINARY Example Description This setting is shared with the corresponding data format settings of other actions CAPTure ANALysis lt x gt FORMat Function Sets or queries the capture window display format of display group P and H number of divisions in the vertical direction Syntax CAPTure ANALysis lt x gt FORMat MAIN lt NR gt CAPTure ANALysis lt x gt FORMat lt NRf gt 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 lt x gt 1 2 1 display group P 2 display group H Example CAPTURE ANALYSIS1 FORMAT 1 CAPTURE ANALYSIS1 FORMAT gt CAPTURE ANALYSIS1 FORMAT 4 Description This command is valid on models with the G5 option CAPTure BITDisp Function Sets or queries whether captured event waveforms are displayed Syntax CAPTure BITDisp lt Boolean gt CAPTure BITDisp
367. scription For details on how to use the STATus CONDition command to synchronize the DL850E DL850EV STATus OMESsage see page 4 9 Function Sets or queries whether message information will be attached to the response to the STAT ERR STATus EESE query ON or not OFF Function Sets or queries the extended event enable Syntax STATus QMESsage lt Boolean gt register STATus OMESsage Syntax STATus EESE lt Register gt Example STATUS QMESSAGE ON STATus EESE STATUS QMESSAGE lt Register gt 0 to 65535 gt STATUS QMESSAGE 1 Example STATUS EESE B00000000 STATUS EESE gt STATUS EESE 0 STATus EESR Function Queries the contents of the extended event register and clears the register Syntax STATus EESR Example STATUS EESR gt 0 STATus ERRor Function Queries the error code and message of the last error that has occurred Syntax STATus ERRor Description If no errors have occurred 0 No error is returned You can use the STATus QMESsage command to specify whether the message is included STATus FILTer lt x gt Function Sets or queries the transition filter Syntax STATus FILTer lt x gt RISE FALL BOTH NEVer STATus FILTer lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 16 Description Set how each bit in the condition register must change to trigger the setting of an event If you specify RISE a change from 0 to 1 triggers the setting of an event IM DL850E 17EN 5 131
368. sed always zero e Bit 0 OPC Operation Complete This bit is set to 1 upon the completion of the operation designated by the OPC command see chapter 5 Bit Masking To mask a certain bit of the standard event register so that it does not cause bit 5 ESB in the status byte to change set the corresponding bit of the standard event enable register to zero For example to mask bit 2 QYE so that ESB will not be set to 1 even if a query error occurs set bit 2 of the standard event enable register to zero Do this using the ESE command To query whether each bit of the standard event enable register is 1 or 0 use ESE For details on the ESE command see chapter 5 Standard Event Register Operation The standard event register indicates eight types of events that occur inside the DL850E DL850EV When one of the bits in this register becomes 1 and the corresponding bit of the standard event enable register is also 1 bit 5 ESB in the status byte is set to 1 Example 1 A query error occurs 2 Bit 2 QYE is set to 1 3 If bit 2 of the standard event enable register is 1 bit 5 ESB in the status byte is set to 1 You can also check what type of event occurred in the DL850E DL850EV by reading the contents of the standard event register Reading the Standard Event Register You can use the ESR command to read the contents of the standard event register The register is cle
369. settings 5 31 CALibrate EXECute NSTart Executes calibration 5 31 CALibrate MODE Sets or queries the auto calibration mode 5 31 CALibrate SBOCancel Sets or queries whether the specified channel is included in the balancing of 5 31 CHANnel lt x gt Strain Balance amp all channels on strain modules or the DC offset canceling of all channels on Offset Cancel voltage measurement modules CALibrate SBOCancel Executes the balancing of all channels on strain modules or the DC offset 5 31 EXECute Strain Balance amp Offset canceling of all channels on voltage measurement modules Cancel CAPTure Group CAPTure Queries all dual capture settings 5 32 CAPTure ACTion Queries all dual capture action settings 5 32 CAPTure ACTion BUZZer Sets or queries whether a beep is sounded as one of the capture actions 5 32 CAPTure ACTion FOLDer Sets or queries whether a folder is created with the date when capture data 5 32 and screen images are saved to a storage medium as a capture action CAPTure ACTion MAIL Queries all dual capture action e mail transmission settings 5 32 CAPTure ACTion MAIL COUNt Sets or queries the upper limit of e mail transmissions to perform as a 5 32 capture action CAPTure ACTion MAIL MODE Sets or queries whether e mail is transmitted as a capture action 5 32 CAPTure ACTion SAVE Queries all dual capture action data save settings 5 32 CAPTure ACTion SAVE ANAMing Sets or queries the auto file na
370. settings of an installed frequency module 5 45 PAVerage CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Sets or queries whether pulse averaging is turned on for an installed 5 45 PAVerage MODE frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Sets or queries the number of pulses to average over for an installed 5 45 PAVerage VALue frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Queries all the smoothing settings of an installed frequency module 5 45 SMOothing CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Sets or queries whether smoothing is turned on for an installed frequency 5 46 SMOothing MODE module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Sets or queries the moving average order of smoothing of an installed 5 46 SMOothing VALue frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FUNCtion Sets or queries the measurement mode of an installed frequency module 5 46 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup LRESet Sets or queries whether over limit reset is turned on for an installed 5 46 frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup MPULse Sets or queries whether the measurement pulse is positive or negative for an 5 46 installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup PROTate Sets or queries the number of pulses per rotation of an installed frequency 5 46 module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup RESet Resets the pulse count of an installed frequency module 5 46 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ
371. ssed as MHZ is an exception Therefore M Milli cannot be used for frequencies e If both lt Multiplier gt and lt Unit gt are omitted the default unit is used e Response messages are always expressed in the lt NR3 gt form Response messages are returned using the default unit without the lt Multiplier gt or lt Unit gt 4 6 IM DL850E 17EN 4 4 Data lt Register gt e Ifa character string contains a double quotation lt Register gt is an integer that can be expressed in mark the double quotation mark is expressed as decimal hexadecimal octal or binary notation It two consecutive quotation marks This rule also is used when each bit of the value has a particular meaning The following types of expressions are possible Form Example lt NRf gt i H lt Hexadecimal value made up of the digits HOF 0 to 9 andA to F gt Q lt Octal value made up of the digits 0 to 7 gt Q777 B lt Binary value made up of the digits 0 and 1 gt 8001100 e lt Register gt is not case sensitive e Response messages are always expressed in the lt NR1 gt form lt Character Data gt lt Character data gt is a predefined character string mnemonics It is mainly used to indicate that an option listed as a character string in braces must be selected and entered The data interpretation rules are the same as those described in Header Interpretation Rules on page 4 4 Form Ex
372. ssssssissiisriiisin 5 85 analysis source points number FFT ccseeeeeteeee 5 85 angle cursor T Y Jiesios ASCII character codes i attenuation constant FFT ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneees 5 85 attenuation constant MATH cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 105 auto NAMING CaptUNe iirinn de keer a 5 32 AULOINAMING file Jnsas aae a a 5 90 auto naming hard disk recording auto scrolling average number of times frequency c ecseeeeeees 5 45 average COUNT FFT iccsscsscsscesseesserss 5 85 average count MATH 5 105 averaging domain FFT we 5 85 averaging domain MATH cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneees 5 105 B backgrounds a ER backlight automatic off balancing strain e fos bandwidth limit 16CH Voltage ccceceeeeseeeeeteeseeeeeees 5 60 bandwidth limit acceleration cccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeees 5 42 bandwidth limit temperature 5 55 beep capture 0 eee 5 32 beep GO NO GO wae 9 93 Deep trigger sae ncssecascasacteessences cpcedbselieeecsnends ees tindacsersmened 5 140 bit length GAN naa 5 38 bit length LIN i bit number CAN ce iissa sidisen ar 5 41 bit number LINY isesi mner 5 48 Bitrate CAN Yanone n iaaa A a ETE ERREEN 5 37 bitrate LIN ii rrsiisososo iioa EE 5 47 block data 4 7 Boolean aa iiiad iaae ana aaan bridge voltage Stain issia iierieerais 5 52 burno
373. stant CAN 5 39 5 40 Scaling factor LIN sssini euesesnaavserveveccncessesnaneenelins 5 49 sereen DASE Color aissis ris aoui enira E STEAT Viina 5 81 screen capture printing GO NO GO ssssssessessesreesreeese 5 93 screen capture printing trigger z screen capture saving GO NO GO sseeesesesrererreeee 5 94 screen capture saving trigger ccseceeeseteeeeeeeeeeee 5 140 SDC Selected Device Clear ccccceeeesceeeeteeeeeeneeeeeees 3 7 search NISTO ses ce eevee eee search end position j S arch Start POSiION snnisssgsagien naa a 5 127 Sele Staur A natnraancasmscvuratvats 5 162 sensitivity acceleration 5 36 shunt calibration strain 5 54 side panel 000 1 1 2 1 3 1 Single Start asiaan tae 5 129 SIOPe MEQUENCY aien a e a 5 43 smoothing frequency 5 46 SNAPSHOT osiin 5 128 SN Ti E E cancate 5 135 SPD Serial Poll Disable tases asccaeece ese ciravneneeies 3 7 SPE Se al Poll Enable rissie enrik 3 7 standard event register START STOP KEY iison tnni aa a iE Stat S DVE aea a a aa cach cal a A AE AEE Status TED OMS accecie cease e EEE EEE stop prediction frequency cccceceeseeeseeteeeeeeeeeetaeees 5 46 SUING Calais oo ie lus et ae wey ee eae ate Mi ees 4 7 T Page TDV annn a civeeeee 5 160 T DIV Capture spyna a 5 34 TDV time Dase aa 5 139 TCP IP terminator 5 106 time base TIME DIV cceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee
374. t MONitor BYTeorder Sets or queries the transmission byte order for data formats that are 2 bytes 5 121 or longer MONitor FORMat CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the transmission data format 5 121 SCHannel lt x gt MONitor GAIN CHANnel lt x gt Queries the gain that is used when the specified channel s numeric monitor 5 121 SCHannel lt x gt data is converted to a physical value MONitor LATCh ASENd Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of all channels 5 121 MONitor LATCh ASENd Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of the specified channel 5 122 CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MONitor LATCh EXECute Latches the monitor data 5 122 MONitor LATCh Sends numeric monitor data 5 122 SEND ALL CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MONitor OFFSet CHANnel lt x gt Queries the offset that is used when the specified channel s numeric monitor 5 122 SCHannel lt x gt data is converted to a physical value MONitor RANGe CHANnel lt x gt Queries the range that is used when the specified channel s numeric monitor 5 122 SCHannel lt x gt data is converted to a physical value MONitor SEND ALL Sends the numeric monitor data in binary format 5 122 MONitor SEND CHANnel lt x gt Sends the numeric monitor data in binary format of the specified channel 5 122 SCHannel lt x gt MONitor VERBose Set whether to include labels and units in the response to the MONitor 5
375. t ALL lt Boolean gt lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 ALL ON Description This command is valid only on logic module channels e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt CDEStination Function Sets or queries whether the copy destination channel is on or off for when parameter measurement items are copied between channels and bits Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt CDEStination lt Boolean gt lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 CDESTINATION ON Description e The default value is ON This command is valid only on logic module channels Example e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt COPY Function Copies the on off setting of the specified bit of the specified channel to another specified channel Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt COPY lt x1 gt 1 to 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 8 Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 BIT1 COPY Description This command is valid only on logic module channels e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt DELay Function Queries all settings related to the delay of the specified bit of the specified channel on a logic module Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x1 gt BIT lt x2 gt
376. t HISTORY ZONE EDIT1 SOURCE 1 HISTory ZONE LOGic Function Sets or queries the logic condition of history waveform zone searches Syntax HISTory ZONE LOGic AND OR HISTory ZONE LOGic Example HISTORY ZONE LOGIC AND HISTORY ZONE LOGIC gt HISTORY ZONE LOGIC AND IM DL850E 17EN 5 101 puewwoy 5 17 IMAGe Group The commands in this group deal with saving screen capture data You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the SHIFT SAVE keys on the front panel IMAGe Function Syntax IMAGe Function Syntax Example IMAGe Function Syntax Example IMAGe Function Syntax Example IMAGe Function Syntax Example IMAGe Function Syntax IMAGe Function Syntax Example Queries all screen capture data output settings IMAGe BACKground Sets or queries the screen capture background png IMAGe BACKground NORMal TRANsparent IMAGe BACKground IMAGE BACKGROUND NORMAL IMAGE BACKGROUND gt IMAGE BACKGROUND NORMAL COMMent Sets or queries the screen comment IMAGe COMMent lt String gt IMAGe COMMent lt String gt Up to 26 characters IMAGE COMMENT ABC IMAGE COMMENT gt IMAGE COMMENT ABC EXECute Saves the screen capture data IMAGe EXECute IMAGE EXECUTE FORMat Sets or queries the screen capture ou
377. t STORE SETUP1 COMMENT ABCD STORe SETup lt x gt DATE Function Queries the date and time of the setup data that is stored to the specified location in the internal memory Syntax STORe SETup lt x gt DATE lt x gt 1to3 Example STORE SETUP1 DATE gt STORE SETUP1 DATE 2010 03 11 09 44 02 Description This command returns No Valid Data if no setup data is stored in the specified location STORe SETup lt x gt EXECute Function Saves setup data to the specified location in the internal memory Syntax STORe SETup lt x gt EXECute lt x gt 1to3 Example STORE SETUP1 EXECUTE IM DL850E 17EN 5 133 puewwoy 5 32 SYSTem Group The commands in this group deal with the system You can make the same settings and queries that you can by pressing the UTILITY key on the front panel and then using the System Config menu SYSTem Function Queries all system settings Syntax SYSTem SYSTem ACQSoft Function Sets or queries whether connection from the Acquisition Software is forbidden or permitted Syntax SYSTem ACQSoft FORBid PERMit SYSTem ACQSoft FORBid Forbidden PERMit Permitted Example SYSTEM ACQSOFT FORBID SYSTEM ACQSOFT gt SYSTEM ACQSOFT FORBID SYSTem CHANnel lt x gt SNUMber lt Serial Number gt Function Queries the instrument number of the specified channel Syntax SYSTem CHANnel lt x gt SNUMber lt x gt 1 to 16 Example SYSTEM CHANNEL1 SN
378. t HOUR1 HOUR2 HOUR3 HOUR4 HOURS HOUR6 HOURT HOURS HOUR HOUR10 HOUR12 DAY1 DAY2 DAY3 TIMebase TDIV lt Time gt 100ns to 1800s Example TIMEBASE TDIV ims TIMEBASE TDIV gt TIMEBASE TDIV 1 000E 03 IM DL850E 17EN 5 139 5 34 TRIGger Group The commands in this group deal with triggers You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the TRIGGER group keys MODE SIMPLE ENHANCED POSITION and DELAY keys on the front panel TRIGger Function Queries all trigger settings Syntax TRIGger TRIGger ABN A gt B n Function Queries all A gt B n trigger settings Syntax TRIGger ABN TRIGger ABN COUNt Function Sets or queries the number of times condition B must be met for A gt B n triggers Syntax TRIGger ABN COUNt lt NRf gt TRIGger ABN COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 10000 Example TRIGGER ABN COUNT 100 TRIGGER ABN COUNT gt TRIGGER ABN COUNT 100 TRIGger ACTion Function Queries all action settings Syntax TRIGger ACTion TRIGger ACTion BUZZer Function Sets or queries whether a beep is sounded as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion BUZZer lt Boolean gt TRIGger ACTion BUZZer Example TRIGGER ACTION BUZZER ON TRIGGER ACTION BUZZER gt TRIGGER ACTION BUZZER 1 TRIGger ACTion FOLDer Function Sets or queries whether a folder is created with the date when waveform data and screen captures are saved to a storage
379. t data data the start point Event Waveform Bit Assignments js 7je sats 2 i Bit 1 Dual capture event Bit 2 Manual event Bits 3 to 8 Reserved The equations used to convert the sent BYTE WORD or DWORzd values to physical values are as follows Use the WAVeform RANGe and WAVeform OFF Set commands to query the range and offset values For Voltage Acceleration Frequency or CAN Bus Monitor When the display mode is set to Float Modules or Computed Waveforms Physical value Range x data x 10 Division Offset BYTE WORD DWORd Division 93 75 24000 For Strain Modules Physical value Range x data x 10 Division Offset BYTE WORD DWORd Division 187 5 48000 For Temperature Modules Physical value Data x Division BYTE WORD DWORd Division 25 6 0 1 For CAN Bus Monitor and CAN amp LIN Bus Monitor Modules When the display mode is set to Unsigned or Signed Physical value Range x data Offset WAVeform SIGN Function Queries whether signs are included in the block data of the source waveform data specified by WaAVeform TRACe when the data is queried Syntax WAVeform SIGN Example WAVEFORM SIGN gt WAVEFORM SIGN 1 Description This command returns 0 if the source waveform is a logic waveform and 1 otherwise WAVeform SRATe Sample RATE Function Queries the sample rate of the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command Syntax WAVefo
380. t is used when saving data in 5 91 ASCII format FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Sets or queries the save range for a specific type of data 5 91 RANGe FILE SAVE ASCii SCHannel Sets or queries the writing method of sub channel data when saving data in 5 91 ASCII format FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Sets or queries the waveform that will be saved for a specific type of data 5 91 STRace CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Sets or queries the selection method for the waveforms that will be saved for 5 91 TALL Trace All a specific type of data FILE SAVE ASCii MEASure Sets or queries whether time information is included when saving data in 5 91 TINFormation ASCII format or CSV format FILE SAVE BINary COMPression Sets or queries whether waveform data is compressed during saving 5 92 FILE SAVE COMMent Sets or queries the comment that will be saved 5 92 FILE SAVE FFT FINFormation Sets or queries whether frequency information is included when FFT 5 92 waveforms are saved in ASCII format FILE SAVE MEASure UNIT Sets or queries whether the unit of measure is included in each cell when 5 92 measured results are saved FILE SAVE NAME Sets or queries the name of the file that will be saved 5 92 GONogo Group GONogo Queries all GO NO GO determination settings 5 93 GONogo ACONdition Sets or queries the GO NO GO determination action condition 5 93 GONogo ACTion Queries all settings for the action that
381. t the directory that contains the file that you want to delete e Include the extension when you specify the file name e If you specify a directory the directory will be deleted FILE DIRectory CDIRectory Change Directory Function Changes the current directory on the storage medium Syntax FILE DIRectory CDIRectory lt String gt lt String gt Up to 16 characters Example FILE DIRECTORY CDIRECTORY NO_1 FILE DIRectory DRIVe Function Sets the storage medium to perform file operations on Syntax FILE DIRectory DRIVe IFMemory HD lt NR gt NETWork SD USB lt NR gt Example FILE DIRECTORY DRIVE HD Description Specify HD for the internal hard disk lt NRf gt This can be omitted if the disk is not partitioned For the DL850E DL850EV internal hard disk omit this value or specify 0 Specify SD for the SD memory card Specify NETWork for a network drive Specify USB for a USB storage medium lt NRf gt 0 to LUN or the partition number can be omitted On the DL850E DL850EV this number is decided by the order that USB storage media are inserted into the device Partition numbers Internal hard disk 0 to 2 USB 0 to 3 FILE DIRectory FREE Function Queries the free space on the medium that is being operated on in bytes Syntax FILE DIRectory FREE FILE DIRECTORY FREE gt FILE DIRECTORY FREE 3 7567939E 09 Example IM DL850E 17EN 5 89 puewwoy 5 13
382. ta 32 bit or Windows XP 32 bit SP2 or later A separate device driver is required to enable the connection with the PC Data Transfer Rate Switching The following table contains approximations of how much time it takes for the DL850E DL850EV to transmit waveform data Model DL850E DL850EV Controller PC Pentium 4 3 2 GHz USB 2 0 ICH6 OS Windows XP Programming language Visual C Number of Data Points Byte Data Word Data ASCII Data 1000 Approx 1 ms Approx 1 ms Approx 30 ms 10000 Approx 1 ms Approx 2 ms Approx 300 ms 100000 Approx 16 ms Approx 15 ms Approx 3 s 1000000 Approx 111 ms Approx 170 ms Approx 30 s between Remote and Local Modes Switching from Local to Remote Mode The DL850E DL850EV switches to remote mode when it is in local mode and it receives a COMMunicate REMote ON command from the PC e REMOTE appears at the top center of the screen once the DL850E DL850EV is in remote mode All keys except the SHIFT CLEAR TRACE keys are disabled e The local mode settings are retained even when the DL850E DL850EV switches to remote mode Switching from Remote to Local Mode When the DL850E DL850EV is in Remote mode and you press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE the DL850E DL850EV switches to local mode However this does not work if the DL850E DL850EV has received a COMMunicate LOCKout ON command from the PC The DL850E DL850EV switches to local mode when it receives a COMMunicate REMote OFF command f
383. tax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup CFRequency lt Frequency gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup CFRequency lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Frequency gt 50Hz 60Hz 400Hz Example CHANnel5 FREQ SETup CFRequency 60 CHANnel5 FREQ SETup CFRequency gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup CFRequency 60 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DECeleration Function Sets or queries whether deceleration prediction is turned on for an installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DECeleration lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DECeleration lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNELS FREQ SETUP DECELERATION ON CHANNELS FREQ SETUP DECELERATION gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP DECELERATION 1 Syntax Example CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DPULse Function Sets or queries the distance per pulse of an installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DPULse lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DPULse lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 CHANNELS FREQ SETUP DPULSE 1 00000E 00 CHANNELS FREQ SETUP DPULSE gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP DPULSE 1 00000E 00 Syntax Example CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Function Queries all the filter settings of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer PAVerage Function Syntax Queries all the p
384. tax CURSor TY VERTical DX IM DL850E 17EN 5 75 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor TY VERTical DX STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AX value between the V cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY VERTical DxX STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY VERTical DX STATe CURSOR TY VERTICAL DX STATE 1 CURSOR TY VERTICAL DX STATE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL DX STATE 1 Example CURSor TY VERTical DX VALue Function Queries the AX value between the V cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical DX VALue CURSOR TY VERTICAL DX VALUE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL DX VALUE 3 0000000E 03 Description e When the Internal Clock Is Being Used as the Time Base When measurements are performed in the time domain this queries the time between markers When measurements are performed in the frequency domain this queries the frequency between markers e When an External Clock is Being Used as the Time Base This queries the number of points between marker cursors Example CURSor TY VERTical DY Function Queries all Y axis value settings for V cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical DY CURSor TY VERTical DY STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for V cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY VERTical DY STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY VERTical DY STATe CURSOR TY VERTICAL DY STATE ON CURSOR TY
385. tax MATH lt x gt DEFine lt String gt MATH lt x gt DEFine MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt String gt Up to 80 characters MATH1 DEFINE PS C1 MATH1 DEFINE gt MATH1 DEFINE PS C1 Example Description If OPERation is set to a value other than USERdefine this query will return the OPERation setting This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt DISPlay Function Sets or queries whether computations will be performed Syntax MATH lt x gt DISPlay lt Boolean gt MATH lt x gt DISPlay MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 MATH1 DISPLAY ON MATH1 DISPLAY gt MATH1 DISPLAY 1 Example MATH lt x gt ESHift CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COUNt Function Sets or queries the amount of phase shift in the Shift computation when an external clock is used Syntax MATH lt x gt ESHift CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt COUNt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt ESHift CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COUNt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt ESHift CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt COUNt MATH lt x gt ESHift CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COUNt MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt record length 2 The resolution is 1 MATH1 ESHIFT CHANNEL1 COUNT 10 MATH1 ESHIFT CHANNEL1 COUNT gt MATH1 ESHIFT CHANNEL1 COUNT 10 Example MATH lt x gt EXPonential Function Queries all exponential window settings Syntax MATH
386. te lt NRf gt ACQuire PROTate lt NRf gt 1 to 24000 ACQUIRE PROTATE 100 ACQUIRE PROTATE gt ACQUIRE PROTATE 100 Example ACQuire RLENgth Function Sets or queries the record length Syntax ACQuire RLENgth lt NRf gt ACQuire RLENgth lt NRf gt 1000 to 2000000000 Step 1000 2500 5000 10000 25000 50000 100000 250000 500000 1000000 2500000 5000000 10000000 25000000 50000000 100000000 250000000 500000000 1000000000 2000000000 Only possible during hard disk recording 5000000000 10000000000 20000000000 50000000000 ACQUIRE RLENGTH 10000 ACQUIRE RLENGTH gt ACQUIRE RLENGTH 10000 Example ACQuire RTOut Function Queries all hard disk recording settings Syntax ACQuire RTOut 5 28 IM DL850E 17EN 5 2 ACQuire Group ACQuire RTOut ANAMing ACQuire RTOut MODE Function Sets or queries the hard disk recording auto Function Sets or queries whether hard disk recording is naming feature enabled Syntax ACQuire RTOut ANAMing DATE Syntax ACQuire RTOut MODE HD OFF NUMBering ACQuire RTOut MODE ACQuire RTOut ANAMing Example ACQUIRE RTOUT MODE OFF Example ACQUIRE RTOUT ANAMING DATE ACQUIRE RTOUT MODE gt ACQUIRE RTOUT ANAMING ACQUIRE RTOUT MODE OFF gt ACQUIRE RTOUT ANAMING DATE ACQuire RTOut COMMent Function Sets or queries the hard disk recording comment Syntax ACQuire RTOut COMMent lt String gt ACQuire RTOut COMMe
387. teresis for enhanced triggers Syntax TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt HySTeresis HIGH LOW MIDD1le CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 Example TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 HYSTERESIS HIGH TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 HYSTERESIS gt TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 HYSTERESIS HIGH TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt LEVel Function Sets or queries the specified channel s level for enhanced triggers TRIGger SOURCe CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt LEVel lt Voltage gt lt NRf gt lt Current gt TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt LEVel CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 LEVEL 1 TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 LEVEL gt TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNELI15 SCHANNEL1 LEVEL 1 Syntax Example TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt WIDTh Function Sets or queries the window trigger width for enhanced triggers TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt WIDTh lt Voltage gt lt NRf gt lt Current gt TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt WIDTh CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 WIDTH 2 TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 WIDTH gt TRIGGER
388. the capture actions Syntax CAPTure ACTion BUZZer lt Boolean gt CAPTure ACTion BUZZer Example CAPTURE ACTION BUZZER ON CAPTURE ACTION BUZZER gt CAPTURE ACTION BUZZER 1 Description This setting is shared with the corresponding buzzer settings of other actions CAPTure ACTion FOLDer Function Sets or queries whether a folder is created with the date when capture data and screen images are saved to a storage medium as a capture action Syntax CAPTure ACTion FOLDer lt Boolean gt CAPTure ACTion FOLDer Example CAPTURE ACTION FOLDER ON CAPTURE ACTION FOLDER gt CAPTURE ACTION FOLDER 1 CAPTure ACTion MATL Function Queries all dual capture action e mail transmission settings Syntax CAPTure ACTion MAIL CAPTure ACTion MATL COUNt Function Sets or queries the upper limit of e mail transmissions to perform as a capture action Syntax CAPTure ACTion MAIL COUNt lt NRf gt CAPTure ACTion MAIL COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 1000 Example CAPTURE ACTION MAIL COUNT 100 CAPTURE ACTION MAIL COUNT gt CAPTURE ACTION MAIL COUNT 100 Description This setting is shared with the corresponding e mail transmission settings of other actions CAPTure ACTion MATL MODE Function Sets or queries whether e mail is transmitted as a capture action Syntax CAPTure ACTion MAIL MODE lt Boolean gt CAPTure ACTion MAIL MODE Example CAPTURE ACTION MAIL MODE ON CAPTURE ACTION MAIL MODE
389. the level of the synchronization channel for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow SYNC LEVel lt Voltage gt lt NRf gt lt Current gt TRIGger WWINdow SYNC LEVel Example TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC LEVEL 2 00000E 00 TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC LEVEL gt TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC LEVEL 2 00000E 00 Description You cannot set this setting when the synchronization channel is set to AUTO TRIGger WWINdow SYNC TRACe Function Sets or queries the synchronization channel for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow SYNC TRACe lt NRf gt AUTO TRIGger WWINdow SYNC TRACe lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC TRACE 1 TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC TRACE gt TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC TRACE 1 5 150 IM DL850E 17EN 5 35 WAVeform Group The commands in this group deal with the acquired waveform data There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group WAVeform Function Queries all waveform data output settings Syntax WAVeform WAVeform BITS Function Queries the bit length of the waveform data specified by the WAVeform TRACe command Syntax WAVeform BITS Example WAVEFORM BITS gt WAVEFORM BITS 16 WAVeform BYTeorder Function Sets or queries the transmission byte order for data formats that are 2 bytes or longer Syntax WAVeform BYTeorder LSBFirst MSBFirst WAVeform BYTeorder Example WAVEFORM BYTEORDER LSBFIRST WAVEFORM
390. the subsequent command until the specified overlap command is completed WAI WAI e For details on how to use the WAI command to synchronize the DL850E DL850EV see page 4 8 e The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to specify the overlap command 5 162 IM DL850E 17EN Chapter6 Status Reports 6 1 About Status Reports Status Reports The figure below shows the format of status reports that are read by serial polling This status report format is an extended version of the status report format defined in IEEE 488 2 1992 f 6 8 4 3 2 1 0 Service request enable De i register A OR 4 Ls t_ A MSS 7 6 ESBIMAV EES EAV 1 0 Status byte RaS A K A y Service request y occurrence Output Error o L queue queue 2 D Po 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Standard event enable a i e oe register a tg tg OR A M na ty t A 7 6 5 4 3 241 0 Standard event register 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 E
391. ther the XY trace clear on start feature is on Syntax XY TCLear lt Boolean gt XY TCLear Example XY TCLEAR ON XY TCLEAR gt XY TCLEAR 1 XY WAVeform lt x1 gt Function Queries all settings related to the specified XY waveform Syntax XY WAVeform lt x1 gt XY WAVeform lt x1 gt DISPlay Function Sets or queries whether the specified XY waveform is displayed Syntax XY WAVeform lt x1 gt DISPlay lt Boolean gt XY WAVeform lt x1 gt DISPlay lt x1 gt 1 t08 Example XY WAVEFORM1 DISPLAY ON XY WAVEFORM1 DISPLAY gt XY WAVEFORM1 DISPLAY 1 puewwoy XY WINDow lt x gt TRANge Function Sets or queries the T Y waveform range to display in the XY window Syntax gt XY WINDow lt x gt TRANge lt NRf gt lt NRf gt gt XY WINDow lt x gt TRANge lt NRf gt 5 00 to 5 00div Resolution 10 record length Example XY WINDOW1 TRANGE 5 5 XY WINDOW1 TRANGE gt XY WINDOW1 TRANGE 5 000000000000 5 000000000000 XY WAVeform lt x1 gt YTRace Function Sets or queries the channel that is assigned to the specified XY waveform s Y axis Syntax XY WAVeform lt x1 gt YTRace lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x2 gt XY WAVeform lt x1 gt YTRace lt x1 gt 1to8 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 to 60 sub channel lt x2 gt 1 to 8 Example XY WAVEFORM1 YTRACE 2 XY WAVEFORM1 YTRACE gt XY WAVEFORM1 YTRACE 2 Description You cannot select the channel of a logic
392. timeout or if no CURSor command is being processed Even if you make the timeout value long 0 is returned as soon as the CURSor command finishes 7 XY Queries all cursor settings for the X Y display CURSor XY XY HORizontal Queries all H cursor settings for the X Y display CURSor XY HORizontal IM DL850E 17EN 5 77 puewwoy 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor XY HORizontal DY Function Queries all AY axis value settings The AY axis value is between the H cursors on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal DyY CURSor XY HORizontal DY STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AY axis value between the H cursors on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal DY STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor XY HORizontal DY STATe Example CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL DY STATE ON CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL DY STATE gt CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL DY STATE 1 CURSor XY HORizontal DY VALue Function Queries the AY axis value between the H cursors on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal DY VALue Example CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL DY VALUE gt CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL DY VALUE 300 00000E 00 CURSor XY HORizontal POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries H cursor positions on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor XY HORizontal POSition lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 5 to 5 in steps of 1 100 Example CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL POSITION
393. tion it means to press the shift key so that its indicator lights and then to press the indicated panel key A setup menu for the item written in purple above the key that you pressed appears on the screen Unit k Denotes 1000 Example 100 kS s sample rate K Denotes 1024 Example 720 KB file size Metasyntax The following table contains the symbols that are used in the syntax discussed mainly in chapters 4 and 5 These symbols are referred to as BNF Backus Naur Form symbols For details on how to write data using these symbols see pages 4 6 and 4 7 Symbol Description Syntax Example Example lt gt A defined value CHANnel lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 4 CHANNEL2 Select an optionin COUPling AC DC DC50 GND COUPLING AC Exclusive OR Can be omitted TRIGger SIMPle SLOPe TRIGger SLOPe IM DL850E 17EN Contents How to Use This Manual cccccccccccccsccccccsceeecceeeeeeceesuceeseuaueueesseeeessusaeesseseaaeeseeuueeseeseaedeeeeaaeeeeees iii Chapter 1 Ethernet Interface Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Component Names and Functions ccccceececeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeaeeeeeeseeaeseeeeseceeeeeeeeeneeea 1 1 Ethernet Interface Features and Specifications ccccccceseeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeesenneaeees 1 2 Connecting to the Ethernet Interface cccccececceceeeceeceeeeee cee eeaeceeeesecaeceseeseeeaneeeeeeesaes 1 4 Configu
394. tion Aborts cyclic statistical processing Syntax MEASure CYCLe ABORt Example MEASURE CYCLE ABORT MEASure CYCLe EXECute Function Executes cyclic statistical processing Syntax MEASure CYCLe EXECute Example MEASURE CYCLE EXECUTE MEASure CYCLe LOGic BIT Function Sets or queries the cycle trace bit of cycle statistics Syntax MEASure CYCLe LOGic BIT lt NRf gt MEASure CYCLe LOGic BIT lt NRf gt 1 to 8 Example MEASURE CYCLE LOGIC BIT 1 MEASURE CYCLE LOGIC BIT gt MEASURE CYCLE LOGIC BIT 1 Description e The default value is 1 e This command is valid only when the channel specified by the MEASure CYCLe TRACe command is a logic module channel e This can be used on models with firmware version 2 10 and later MEASure CYCLe TRACe Function Sets or queries the cycle trace of cycle statistics Syntax MEASure CYCLe TRACe OWN lt NR gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt MEASure CYCLe TRACe First lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Second lt NRf gt 1 to 60 sub channel MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 MEASURE CYCLE TRACE OWN MEASURE CYCLE TRACE gt MEASURE CYCLE TRACE OWN Example MEASure HISTory ABORt Function Aborts the statistical processing of history waveforms Syntax MEASure HISTory ABORt Example MEASURE HISTORY ABORT MEASure HISTory EXECute Function Executes the statistical processing of history waveforms Syntax MEASure HISTory EXECute E
395. tor ASENd CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel MONITOR ASEND CHAN1 gt See the response format for MONitor ASENd Description Depending on the MONitor VERBose command s setting the measured value is returned with a label and the unit or just the measured value is returned Ifthe specified channel is not displayed OFF is returned for the measured value Example MONitor BITS CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Queries the effective bit length of the specified channel s data Syntax MONitor BITS CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 sub channel MONitor BITS CHAN1 gt MONITOR BITS CHAN1 16 Description For example if this command is received by a 701250 voltage module effective bit length of 12 bits 12 is be returned A logic module returns 8 Example MONitor BYTeorder Function Sets or queries the transmission byte order for data formats that are 2 bytes or longer Syntax MONitor BYTeorder LSBFirst MSBFirst MONitor BYTeorder Example MONITOR BYTEORDER MSBFIRST MONITOR BYTEORDER gt MONITOR BYTEORDER MSBFIRST MONitor FORMat CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Sets or queries the transmission data format Syntax MONitor FORMat CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BYTE
396. tput format IMAGe FORMat BMP JPEG PNG IMAGe FORMat IMAGE FORMAT PNG IMAGE FORMAT gt IMAGE FORMAT PNG SAVE Queries all file output settings IMAGe SAVE SAVE ANAMing Sets or queries the setting of the auto naming feature for saving files IMAGe SAVE ANAMing DATE NUMBering OFF IMAGe SAVE ANAMing IMAGE SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING IMAGE SAVE ANAMING gt IMAGE SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING IMAGe SAVE CDIRectory Function Changes the output destination directory Syntax IMAGe SAVE CDIRectory lt String gt lt String gt Up to 16 characters Example IMAGW SAVE CDIRECTORY 20100318 000 IMAGe SAVE DRIVe Function Sets the output destination medium Syntax IMAGe SAVE DRIVe IFMemory HD lt NRf gt NETWork SD USB lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Example IMAGe SAVE DRIVe USB 0 Description See the description of the FILE DIRectory DRIVe command IMAGe SAVE FRAMe Function Sets or queries whether a white frame is attached to the saved screen capture s image Syntax IMAGe SAVE FRAMe lt Boolean gt IMAGe SAVE FRAMe Example IMAGe SAVE FRAMe 1 IMAGe SAVE FRAMe gt IMAGe SAVE FRAMe 1 IMAGe SAVE NAME Function Sets or queries the name of the file that will be saved Syntax IMAGe SAVE NAME lt Filename gt IMAGe SAVE NAME Example IMAGE SAVE NAME ABC IMAGe SAVE NAME gt IMAGe SAVE NAME IMAGe
397. trigger point or to a waveform REFerence SOURce MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the reference waveform trace used to measure the delay 5 116 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay between channels for a waveform EFerence TRACe MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the display format of the delay parameters of the specified 5 116 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay channel STATe MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Queries a measured delay value of the specified waveform s parameter 5 117 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay VALue MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Queries all distal mesial and proximal settings 5 117 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the distal mesial and proximal point mode setting 5 117 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal MODE MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the distal mesial and proximal points as percentages 5 117 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal PERCent MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the distal mesial and proximal points as units 5 117 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal UNIT MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the modes of a set of high and low points rising time and 5 118 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt METHod falling time measurement references MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt Queries the setting of a waveform parameter measurement item 5 118 x gt
398. tring gt CHANnel lt x gt LABel lt x gt 1 to 16 lt String gt Up to 16 characters Example CHANNELS LABEL ABC CHANNELS LABEL gt CHANNEL5 LABEL ABC Description This setting is invalid for a module that has sub channels but it is valid for logic modules CHANnel lt x gt LIN Function Queries all settings of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN lt x gt 14 16 CHANnel lt x gt LIN PORT Function Queries all settings of each port of a module that can monitor LIN busses Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN PORT lt x gt 14 16 CHANnel lt x gt LIN PORT BRATe Function Sets or queries the bit rate of the specified LIN bus signal port Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN PORT BRATe lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt LIN PORT BRATe lt x gt 14 16 lt NRf gt 2400 9600 19200 CHANNEL14 LIN PORT BRATE 19200 CHANNEL14 LIN PORT BRATE gt CHANNEL14 LIN PORT BRATE 19200 Example IM DL850E 17EN 5 47 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt LIN FRAMe lt x2 gt Function Queries all settings of the specified LIN bus signal frame Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LIN FRAMe lt x2 gt lt x gt 14 16 lt x2 gt 1 to 64 Description When FRAMe lt x2 gt is 1 the frame ID is 0 When FRAMe lt x2 gt is 64 the frame ID is 63 CHANnel lt x gt LIN FRAMe lt x2 gt DLENgth Function Sets or queries the data length of t
399. ttings This section explains the settings listed below You must configure these settings when controlling the DL850E DL850EV remotely through an Ethernet interface e Communication interface e Network connection timeout setting UTILITY Remote Ctrl Menu Press UTILITY and then the Remote Ctrl soft key to display the following menu Remote Ctrl lt Device 7 Set Device to Network Network amp Time Out 7 Set the timeout value using the jog shuttle Note Only use the selected communication interface If you send commands simultaneously from another communication interface that has not been selected the DL850E DL850EV will not execute the commands properly Configuring TCP IP Settings To use the Ethernet interface features you must specify the following TCP IP settings e IP address e Subnet mask e Default gateway For details on how to specify these settings see section 17 2 Configuring TCP IP Settings in the DL850E DL850EV User s Manual IM DL850E 02EN IM DL850E 17EN 1 5 ade 19 U JOUIOYIZ Chapter 2 USB Interface 2 1 Component Names and Functions Front Panel SHIFT key and CLEAR TRACE key Press these keys to switch from remote mode in which settings and operations are performed through remote commands to local mode in which operations can be performed using the DL850E DL850EV keys These keys are disabled when local lockout see page 2 2 has been activated by a controller
400. u can by using the SHIFT MATH keys on the front panel gt FFT Function Queries all FFT settings Syntax FFT FFT AVERage Function Queries all FFT averaging settings Syntax FFT AVERage gt FFT AVERage COUNt Function Sets or queries the average count of linear averaging Syntax FFT AVERage COUNt lt NRf gt FFT AVERage COUNt lt NRf gt 2 to 128 in 2n steps Example FFT AVERAGE COUNT 32 FFT AVERAGE COUNT gt FFT AVERAGE COUNT 32 FFT AVERage EWEight Function Sets or queries the attenuation constant of exponential averaging Syntax FFT AVERage EWEight lt NRf gt FFT AVERage EWEight lt NRf gt 2 to 256 in 2n steps Example FFT AVERAGE EWEIGHT 16 FFT AVERAGE EWEIGHT gt FFT AVERAGE EWEIGHT 16 FFT AVERage MODE Function Sets or queries the FFT averaging mode Syntax FFT AVERage MODE EXPonent LINear OFF PEAK FFT AVERage MODE Example FFT AVERAGE MODE PEAK FFT AVERAGE MODE gt FFT AVERAGE MODE PEAK FFT AVERage TYPE Function Sets or queries the averaging domain Syntax FFT AVERage TYPE FREQuency TIME FFT AVERage TYPE Example FFT AVERAGE TYPE FREQUENCY FFT AVERAGE TYPE gt FFT AVERAGE TYPE FREQUENCY FFT POINt Function Sets or queries the number of analysis source points of the FFT windows Syntax FFT POINt lt NRf gt FFT POINt lt NRf gt 1000 2000 5000 10000 20000 50000 100000 Example F
401. ulse averaging settings of an installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt PAVerage gt FREQ SETup FILTer CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer PAVerage MODE Sets or queries whether pulse averaging is turned on for an installed frequency module Function Syntax Example CHANnel lt x gt PAVerage MO CHANnel lt x gt PAVerage MO lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNELS F PAVERAGE MO CHANNELS F PAVERAGE MO gt CHANNEL PAVERAGE FREQ SETup FILTer DE lt Boolean gt FREQ SETup FILTer DE REQ SETUP FILTER DE ON REQ SETUP FILTER 9 DE 3 5 FREQ SETUP FILTER 3 D MODE 1 5 a CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer PAVerage VALue Sets or queries the number of pulses to average over for an installed frequency module Function Syntax Example CHANnel lt x gt PAVerage VA CHANnel lt x gt PAVerage VA lt x gt 1 to 16 FREQ SETup FILTer Lue lt NRf gt FREQ SETup FILTer Lue lt NRf gt 1 to 4096 CHANNELS F PAVERAGE VA CHANNELS F PAVERAGE VA REQ SETUP FILTER LUE 2 REQ SETUP FILTER LUE gt CHANNELS FREQ SETUP FILTER PAVERAGE VALUE 2 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing Function Syntax Queries all the smoothing settings of an installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt SMOothing gt FREQ SETup FILTer IM DL850E 17EN 5 45
402. unction Sets or queries the number of FFT points Syntax MATH lt x gt FFT POINt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt FFT POINt MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify lt NRf gt 1000 2000 5000 10000 20000 50000 100000 Example MATH1 FFT POINT 1000 MATH1 FFT POINT gt MATH1 FFT POINT 1000 MATH lt x gt FFT WINDow Function Sets or queries the time window for FFT computations Syntax MATH lt x gt FFT WINDow HANNing RECTangle FLATtop EXPonential HAMMing MATH lt x gt FFT WINDow MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify H1 FFT WINDOW HANNING H1 FFT WINDOW MATH1 FFT WINDOW HANNING Description The EXPonential parameter is valid on models with the G2 option Example g MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt Function Queries all digital filter settings Syntax MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify FiLTer lt x gt 1 2 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt BAND Function Sets or queries a digital filter band Syntax MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt BAND BPASs HPASs LPASs MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt BAND MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify FiLTer lt x gt 1 2 MATH1 FILTER1 BAND LPASS M
403. ure is saved when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion IMAGe MODE lt Boolean gt GONogo ACTion IMAGe MODE Example GONOGO ACTION IMAGE MODE ON GONOGO ACTION IMAGE MODE gt GONOGO ACTION IMAGE MODE 1 GONogo ACTion IMAGe PATH Function Queries the path on the storage medium that a screen capture is saved to when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion IMAGe PATH Example GONOGO ACTION IMAGE PATH gt GONOGO ACTION IMAGE PATH PATH USB UTIL GONogo ACTion MATL Function Queries all settings for sending e mail when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion MAIL GONogo ACTion MATL COUNt Function Sets or queries the number of times that e mail is sent when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion MAIL COUNt lt NRf gt GONogo ACTion MAIL COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 1000 Example GONOGO ACTION MAIL COUNT 100 GONOGO ACTION MAIL COUNT gt GONOGO ACTION MAIL COUNT 100 GONogo ACTion MATL MODE Function Sets or queries whether e mail is sent when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion MAIL MODE lt Boolean gt GONogo ACTion MAIL MODE Example GONOGO ACTION MAIL MODE ON GONOGO ACTION MAIL MODE gt GONOGO ACTION MAIL MODE 1 GONogo ACTion SAVE CDIRectory Function Sets the current directory on the storage medium where waveform data is saved to when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion SAVE CDIRector
404. urements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the unit prefix that is used during linear scaling when the 5 59 DISPlaytype SUBunit display mode is set to Float for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an 5 59 GETMeasure installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed module that can perform 5 59 O MODE analog voltage measurements S CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed 5 59 3 LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y module that can perform analog voltage measurements 2 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed module that can 5 59 2 UNIT perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage OFFSet Sets or queries the offset voltage of an installed module that can perform 5 60 analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage POSition Sets or queries the vertical position of an installed module that can perform 5 60 analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage PROBe Sets or queries the probe type of an installed module that can perform 5 60 analog voltage measure
405. ut temperature 5 54 5 55 byte count we 5 38 VLC SIZ oe a E E E seems 5 36 C Page CaliDatlOMicisivsesetiecesctestecisecuatioasecitdi ceudeemuatietiieess 5 31 5 161 capture WINK OW iisese2ivese ivi necro etter 5 33 center frequency freqUuencCy ccccceeeeeteeeeeeteeeteeeeeeees 5 45 character data a 4 7 Character NOTATIONS i siscass seen certerccasenvarsaneurensepmcusscavsemteverioressues iv chattering elimination acceleration c eeeseeeeees 5 42 chattering elimination logic checksum clear trace dir CICK SOUMG aanne resar an EN E EENS CmMaN Siada mo aaoi aera vacate EE comment file n comment hard disk recording sissisisisirrisiriisinini 5 29 comment Screen Capture cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereaees 5 102 comment Screen Printing iniii 5 98 COMMONCOMMANG NEAMEM siccsscrtievanecscveccdevsssersencesteraenecs 4 3 computation range 7 Computation Window FFT csccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 5 88 Condition fEGISIEM cfevieta ise cee ag 5 131 CUMIN cessed E EATA 4 6 CULOTE ME QUENCY sninen evaa iaa re 5 107 cycle averaging 5 105 cycle trace measure sessseseeen 5 119 cyclic statistical processing measure 5 119 D Page dampingirate FF T esssirsrpsnripapnin a 5 88 damping rat MATH Jesis ciiisean iiai 5 107 dataleng tissen i o eae e IR EEE 5 48 data loading 5 90 data saving 5 90 d
406. uted regardless of whether the acquisition has been completed and may result in a command execution error TRIGger MODE SINGle STARt WAVeform SEND lt PMT gt If this happens you must use the following method to synchronize to the end of waveform acquisition e Using the STATus CONDition query STATus CONDition is used to query the contents of the condition register see page 6 5 You can determine whether waveform acquisition is in progress by reading bit 0 in the condition register If the bit is 1 waveform acquisition is in progress If the bit is 0 waveform acquisition is not in progress Example TRIGger MODE SINGle STARt lt PMT gt STATus CONDition lt PMT gt Read the response If bit 0 is 1 return to the previous command WAVeform SEND lt PMT gt WAVeform SEND is not executed until bit O in the condition register becomes 0 Using the Extended Event Register The changes in the condition register can be reflected in the extended event register see page 6 5 Example STATus FILTerl FALL STATus ODE SINGle STARt lt PMT gt Read the response to STATus E Wait for a service request WAVe form SEND lt PMT gt The STATus FILTerl FALL command sets the transition filter so that bit O in the extended event FlLTer1 is set to 1 when bit 0 in the condition register changes from 1 to 0 The STATus EESE 1 command is used to only
407. ve window triggering on modules that have sub channels logic modules modules that are performing temperature measurements and frequency modules TRIGger WWINdow FREQuency Function Sets or queries the cycle frequency for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow FREQuency lt Frequency gt TRIGger WWINdow FREQuency lt Frequency gt 40 to 1000 Hz Example TRIGGER WWINDOW FREQUENCY 400 TRIGGER WWINDOW FREQUENCY gt TRIGGER WWINDOW FREQUENCY 400 TRIGger WWINdow REFCycle Function Sets or queries the reference cycle for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow REFCycle lt NRf gt TRIGger WWINdow REFCycle lt NRf gt 1 2 4 Example TRIGGER WWINDOW REFCYCLE 1 TRIGGER WWINDOW REFCYCLE gt TRIGGER WWINDOW REFCYCLE 1 TRIGger WWINdow SYNC Function Queries all synchronization channel settings for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow SYNC TRIGger WWINdow SYNC HYSTeresis Function Sets or queries the hysteresis of the synchronization channel for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow SYNC HYSTeresis HIGH LOW MIDD1le TRIGger WWINdow SYNC HYSTeresis Example TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC HYSTERESIS MIDDLE TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC HYSTERESIS gt TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC HYSTERESIS MIDDLE Description You cannot set this setting when the synchronization channel is set to AUTO TRIGger WWINdow SYNC LEVel Function Sets or queries
408. version gt Sets bit 0 the OPC bit of the standard event register to 1 upon the completion of the specified overlap command OPC OPC e For details on how to use the OPC command to synchronize the DL850E DL850EV see page 4 8 e The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to specify the overlap command e If OPC is not the last command of the message its operation is not guaranteed Returns ASCII code 1 when the specified overlap command is completed OPC ORC gt a e For details on how to use the OPC command to synchronize the DL850E DL850EV see page 4 8 The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to specify the overlap command e If OPC is not the last command of the message its operation is not guaranteed IM DL850E 17EN 5 161 puewwog 5 38 Common Command Group OPT Function Syntax Example Queries the installed options OPT OPT gt 250MW HD PROBEPOWER Description This command returns the lt size of waveform RST Function Syntax Example memory gt and whether the lt printer gt lt hard disk interface gt lt GPIB gt lt IRIG gt lt user defined computation gt and lt probe power supply output gt options are installed Size of waveform memory The total size of waveform data memory 250MW when the total size is 250 Mpoint 1GW when the total size is 1 Gpoint 2GW when the total size is 2 Gpoint e Printer PRINTER Hard disk interface
409. w s vertical scale mode 5 87 Vertical Scale Mode FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale Sets or queries the sensitivity of an FFT window s vertical scale 5 87 SENSitivity FFT WINDow Queries all FFT analysis settings 5 87 FFT WINDow EXPonential Queries all FFT exponential window settings 5 87 FFT WINDow EXPonential DRATe Sets or queries the FFT exponential window s damping rate 5 88 FFT WINDow EXPonential Sets or queries the FFT exponential window s Force1 or Force2 value 5 88 FORCe lt x gt FFT WINDow TYPE Sets or queries the computation window type for FFT analysis 5 88 FILE Group FILE Queries all storage media settings 5 89 FILE COPY ABORt Aborts file copying 5 89 IM DL850E 17EN 5 13 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page FILE COPY CDIRectory Changes the file copy destination directory 5 89 FILE COPY EXECute Executes file copying This is an overlap command 5 89 FILE COPY PATH Queries the file copy destination directory 5 89 FILE DELete Deletes files This is an overlap command 5 89 FILE DIRectory CDIRectory Changes the current directory on the storage medium 5 89 Change Directory FILE DIRectory DRIVe Sets the storage medium to perform file operations on 5 89 FILE DIRectory FREE Queries the free space on the medium that is bei
410. x gt CAN PORT Function Syntax Queries all the port settings of an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANne1 lt x gt CAN PORT For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 CHANne1l lt x gt CAN PORT BRATe Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the bitrate of a CAN bus signal port CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BRATe lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BRATe For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 lt NRf gt 10000 20000 33300 50000 62500 66700 83300 100000 125000 250000 500000 800000 1000000 100000 covers firmware versions 1 30 and later CHANNEL13 CAN PORT BRATE 33300 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT BRATE gt CHANNEL13 CAN PORT BRATE 33300 CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BSNum Bit sample num Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the number of sample points for each bit of a CAN bus signal port CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BSNum lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BSNum For the 720240 lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 lt x gt 13 15 lt NRf gt 1 to 3 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT BSNUM 1 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT BSNUM gt CHANNEL13 CAN PORT BSNUM 1 CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT LONLy Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the Listen Only setting for an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring port CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT L
411. x gt Sets or queries the specified parameter s upper and lower limits for history 5 100 TYPE lt Parameter gt waveform parameter searches HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt Queries the specified parameter s measured value for history waveform 5 100 VALue parameter searches HISTory PARameter LOGic Sets or queries the logic to apply to history waveform searches 5 100 HISTory PARameter TRANge Sets or queries the determination range of history waveform parameter 5 100 searches HISTory RECord Sets or queries the source record 5 100 HISTory RECord MINimum Queries the minimum record number 5 100 HISTory SMODe Sets or queries the history waveform search mode 5 100 HISTory TIME Queries the trigger time of the data at the specified record number 5 101 HISTory ZONE Queries all history waveform zone search settings 5 101 HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt Queries all settings for the specified search zone 5 101 HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt CONDition Sets or queries the specified search zone s search condition 5 101 HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt SOURce Sets or queries the specified search zone s source waveform 5 101 HISTory ZONE LOGic Sets or queries the logic condition of history waveform zone searches 5 101 IMAGe Group IMAGe Queries all screen capture data output settings 5 102 MAGe BACKground Sets or queries the screen capture background png 5 102 MAGe COMMent Sets or queries the screen comment 5 102 MAGe EXE
412. xample Sets or queries the message format of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt MFORmat EXTended STANdard CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt MFORmat For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 MFORMAT STANDARD CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 MFORMAT gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 MFORMAT STANDARD CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt MID Function Syntax Example Description Sets or queries the message ID of a sub channel on an installed module that can perform CAN bus signal monitoring CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt MID lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt MID For the 720240 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 For the 720241 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 15 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 60 e When the CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MFORmat command is set to STANdard lt String gt 0 to 7FF e When the CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MFORmat command is set to EXTended lt String gt 0 to 1FFFFFFF CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 MID 7FF CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 MID gt CHANNEL1 CAN SCHANNEL1 MID 7FEF Error 151 Invalid string data will occur if an invalid string is specified CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt OFFSet
413. xample MEASURE HISTORY EXECUTE MEASure MODE Function Sets or queries the measure mode Syntax MEASure MODE OFF ON CYCLe HISTory STATistics MEASure MODE Example MEASURE MODE ON MEASURE MODE gt MEASURE MODE ON IM DL850E 17EN 5 119 puewwoy 5 21 MEASure Group MEASure ONECycle Function Sets or queries whether one cycle mode is ON or OFF Syntax MEASure ONECycle lt Boolean gt MEASure ONECycle MEASURE ONECYCLE ON MEASURE ONECYCLE gt MEASURE ONECYCLE 1 Example MEASure TRANge Time Range Function Sets or queries the waveform parameter measurement range Syntax MEASure TRANge lt NRf gt lt NR gt MEASure TRANge lt NRf gt 5 to 5 div in 10 div display record length steps Example MEASURE TRANGE 5 5 MEASURE TRANGE gt MEASURE TRANGE 5 000000000000 5 000000000000 MEASure WAIT Function Waits for the completion of measurement by using a timeout valuer Syntax MEASure WAIT lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 36000 timeout value in units of 100 msec Example MEASure WAIT 100 gt MEAS WAIT 1 Description The command returns 0 if the measurement finishes within the specified timeout If measurement does not finish or if it was never taking place to begin with the command returns 1 Even if you make the timeout value long 0 is returned as soon as the measurement finishes MEASure XY lt x gt Function Queries all the
414. xtended event enable DE 4 register A t g Np S t A OR A t E i ty ee i g tf A 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Extended event register A A 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O Transition filter A AA 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O Condition register IM DL850E 17EN 6 1 About Status Reports Overview of Registers and Queues Name Function Write Read Status byte Serial polling RQS STB MSS Service request enable Status byte mask SRE SRE register Standard event register Indicates device status changes ESR Standard event enable Standard event register mask ESE ESE register Extended event Indicates device status changes STATus EESR register Extended event enable Extended event register mask STATus EESE STATus EESE register Condition register Current device status STATus CONDition Transition filter Conditions that change the STATus FILTer lt x gt STATus FILTer lt x gt extended event register Output queue Stores response messages for Query commands queries Error Queue Stores error numbers and z STATus ERRor messages Registers and Queues That Affect the Status Byte The following registers affect the status byte bits ESB of the status byte to 1 or 0 Standard event register Sets bit 5 Output queue Sets bit 4 MAV of the status byte to 1 or 0 Extended event register
415. y ACCumulate MODE Function Sets or queries the accumulated waveform mode Syntax DISPlay ACCumulate MODE OFF ON DISPlay ACCumulate MODE Example DISPLAY ACCUMULATE MODE ON DISPLAY ACCUMULATE MODE gt DISPLAY ACCUMULATE MODE ON DISPlay ACCumulate PERSistence Function Sets or queries the number of times that waveforms are accumulated Syntax DISPlay ACCumulate PERSistence lt NRf gt INFinity DISPlay ACCumulate PERSistence lt NRf gt 2 to 128 in 2n steps Example DISPLAY ACCUMULATE PERSISTENCE 128 DISPLAY ACCUMULATE PERSISTENCE gt DISPLAY ACCUMULATE PERSISTENCE 128 DISPlay AGRoup Auto Grouping Function Automatically assigns the waveforms whose displays are turned on to display groups 1 to 4 Syntax DISPlay AGRoup Example DISPLAY AGROUP DISPlay ANALysis lt x gt FORMat Function Sets or queries the display format the number of divisions in the vertical direction of display group P and H Syntax DISPlay ANALysis lt x gt FORMat G1 lt NRf gt DISPlay ANALysis lt x gt FORMat lt NRf gt 1 to 4 lt x gt 1 2 1 display group P 2 display group H Example DISPLAY ANALYSIS FORMAT 1 DISPLAY ANALYSIS FORMAT gt DISPLAY ANALYSIS FORMAT 1 Description This command is valid on models with the G5 option DISPlay CINFormation Channel Information Function Sets or queries the contents of the channel information display Syntax
416. y lt String gt GONogo ACTion SAVE CDIRectory Example GONOGO ACTION SAVE CDIRECTORY CASE1 GONOGO ACTION SAVE CDIRECTORY gt GONOGO ACTION SAVE CDIRECTORY CASE1 GONogo ACTion SAVE DRIVe Function Sets or queries the storage medium that waveform data is saved to when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion SAVE DRIVe HD lt NRf gt NETWork SD USB lt NRf gt GONogo ACTion SAVE DRIVe Example GONOGO ACTION SAVE DRIVE HD GONOGO ACTION SAVE DRIVE gt GONOGO ACTION SAVE DRIVE HD 0 Description Specify HD for the internal hard disk lt NRf gt This can be omitted if the disk is not partitioned For the DL850E DL850EV internal hard disk omit this value or specify 0 Specify SD for the SD memory card Specify NETWork for a network drive Specify USB for a USB storage medium First lt NRf gt 0 to LUN or the partition number can be omitted On the DL850E DL850EV this number is decided by the order that USB storage media are inserted into the device Partition numbers Internal hard disk 0 to 2 USB 0 to 3 GONogo ACTion SAVE MODE Function Sets or queries whether waveforms are saved to the storage medium when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion SAVE MODE lt Boolean gt GONogo ACTion SAVE MODE GONOGO ACTION SAVE MODE ON GONOGO ACTION SAVE MODE gt GONOGO ACTION SAVE MODE 1 Example GONogo ACTion SAVE PATH Function Queri
417. y module 5 42 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut Sets or queries the hysteresis of an installed frequency module 5 42 HYSTeresis CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PRESet Sets or queries the preset setting of an installed frequency module 5 43 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PROBe Sets or queries the probe attenuation of an installed frequency module 5 43 IM DL850E 17EN 5 3 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PULLup Sets or queries whether pull up is turned on for an installed frequency 5 43 module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut SLOPe Sets or queries the input slope of an installed frequency module 5 43 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut Sets or queries the threshold level of an installed frequency module 5 43 THReshold CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut VRANge Sets or queries the voltage range of an installed frequency module 5 43 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed frequency module 5 43 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale AVALue Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for 5 43 an installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale BVALue Sets or queries the scaling coefficient B that is used during linear scaling for 5 44 an installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale Executes the m
418. zontal axis for FFT analysis Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal CSPan CENTer lt Frequency gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal CSPan CENTer lt x gt 1 2 1 when the G2 option is not installed lt Frequency gt 0 Hz to the sampling rate 2 Hz Example FFT WAVEFORM1 HORIZONTAL CSPAN CENTER 250 00000E 03 FFT WAVEFORM HORIZONTAL CSPAN CENTER gt FFT WAVEFORM1 HORIZONTAL CSPAN CENTER 250 00000E 03 FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal CSPan SPAN Function Sets or queries the span value of the horizontal axis for FFT analysis Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal CSPan SPAN lt Frequency gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal CSPan SPAN lt x gt 1 2 1 when the G2 option is not installed lt Frequency gt the sampling rate FFT Points 10 Hz to the sampling rate 2 Hz FFT WAVEFORM HORIZONTAL CSPAN SPAN 500 00000E 03 FFT WAVEFORM HORIZONTAL CSPAN SPAN gt FFT WAVEFORM1 HORIZONTAL CSPAN SPAN 500 00000E 03 Example FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal LRIGht Function Queries all the settings for the left and right ends of the horizontal axis for FFT analysis Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal LRIGht lt x gt 1 2 1 when the G2 option is not installed FFT WAVeform lt x gt HORizontal LRIGht RANGe Function Sets or queries the range for the left and right ends of the horizontal axis for FFT analysis Syntax
419. zoom settings ZOOM ZOOM ANALysis lt x1 gt FORMat lt x2 gt Function Syntax Example Description Sets or queries the display format the number of divisions in the vertical direction of zoomed waveforms of display group P and H ZOOM ANALysis lt x1 gt FORMat lt x2 gt MAIN lt NRf gt ZOOM ANALysis lt x gt FORMat lt NRf gt 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 lt x gt 1 2 1 display group P 2 display group H lt x2 gt 1 2 1 21 2 22 ZOOM ANALYSIS1 FORMAT1 1 ZOOM ANALYSIS1 FORMAT1 gt CAPTURE ANALYSIS1 FORMAT1 4 This command is valid on models with the G5 option ZOOM ASCRo11 Function Syntax Queries all auto scroll settings ZOOM ASCRo11 ZOOM ASCRo11 JUMP Function Syntax Example Moves the center position of the zoom box to the left or right edge of the main window ZOOM ASCRol1 JUMP LEFT RIGHt ZOOM ASCROLL JUMP RIGHT ZOOM ASCRo11 SPEed Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the auto scroll speed of the zoom box ZOOM ASCRo11 SPEed lt NRf gt ZOOM ASCRo11 SPEed lt NRf gt 1 to 10 ZOOM ASCROLL SPEED 5 ZOOM ASCROLL SPEED gt ZOOM ASCROLL SPEED 5 ZOOM ASCRo11 STARt Function Syntax Example Starts auto scrolling ZOOM ASCRol11 STARt LEFT RIGHt ZOOM ASCROLL STAR LEFT ZOOM ASCRo11 STOP Function Stops auto scrolling Syntax ZOOM ASCRo11 STOP Example ZOOM ASCROLL STOP ZOOM

DL850/DL850V ScopeCorder Communication Interface User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents